Skip to main content

Full text of "The psychology of beauty"

See other formats


FROM  THE-  LIBRARY  OF 
TR1NITYCOLLEGE  TORONTO 


PURCHASED  UNDER  GRANT 

FROM    THE 

CARNEGIE  CORPORATION 
•  193-  • 


THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 


THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF 
BEAUTY 


BY 

ETHEL  D.  PUFFER 


HOUGHTON  MIFFLIN  COMPANY 

BOSTON     •     NEW  YORK     •     CHICAGO     •     DALLAS 
SAN  FRANCISCO 

ttfc  ftibetttbe  $re**  Cambrfoge 


COPYRIGHT   1905  BY  ETHEL  D.  PUFFER 
ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 

Published  May  1905 


CAMBRIDGE  .   MASSACHUSETTS 
PRINTED  IN  THE  U.S.A 


MAY  2 


7  193, 


PKEFACE 

THE  human  being  who  thrills  to  the  experience  of 
beauty  in  nature  and  in  art  does  not  forever  rest 
with  that  experience  unquestioned.  The  day  comes 
when  he  yearns  to  pierce  the  secret  of  his  emotion, 
to  discover  what  it  is,  and  why,  that  has  so  stung 
him  —  to  defend  and  to  justify  his  transport  to  him 
self  and  to  others.  He  seeks  a  reason  for  the  faith 
that  is  in  him.  And  so  have  arisen  the  speculative 
theories  of  the  nature  of  beauty,  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  studies  of  concrete  beauty  and  our  feelings 
about  it,  on  the  other.  Speculative  theory  has  taken 
its  own  way,  however,  as  a  part  of  philosophy,  in 
relating  the  Beautiful  to  the  other  great  concepts 
of  the  True  and  the  Good ;  building  up  an  archi 
tectonic  of  abstract  ideas,  far  from  the  immediate 
facts  and  problems  of  the  enjoyment  of  beauty. 
There  has  grown  up,  on  the  other  hand,  in  the  last 
years,  a  great  literature  of  special  studies  in  the 
facts  of  aesthetic  production  and  enjoyment.  Ex 
periments  with  the  aesthetic  elements;  investiga 
tions  into  the  physiological  psychology  of  aesthetic 
reactions  ;  studies  in  the  genesis  and  development 
of  art  forms,  have  multiplied  apace.  But  these  are 
still  mere  groups  of  facts  for  psychology;  they 
have  not  been  taken  up  into  a  single  authoritative 


vi  PREFACE 

principle.  Psychology  cannot  do  justice  to  the  im 
perative  of  beauty,  by  virtue  of  which,  when  we  say 
"  this  is  beautiful,"  we  have  a  right  to  imply  that 
the  universe  must  agree  with  us.  A  synthesis  of 
these  tendencies  in  the  study  of  beauty  is  needed, 
in  which  the  results  of  modern  psychology  shall 
help  to  make  intelligible  a  philosophical  theory  of 
beauty.  The  chief  purpose  of  this  book  is  to  seek 
to  effect  such  a  union. 

A  way  of  defining  Beauty  which  grounds  it  in 
genera]  principles,  while  allowing  it  to  reach  the 
concrete  case,  is  set  forth  in  the  essay  on  the  Nature 
of  Beauty.  The  following  chapters  aim  to  expand, 
to  test,  and  to  confirm  this  central  theory,  by  show 
ing,  partly  by  the  aid  of  the  aforesaid  special  stud 
ies,  how  it  accounts  for  our  pleasure  in  pictures, 
music,  and  literature. 

The  whole  field  of  beauty  is  thus  brought  under 
discussion  ;  and  therefore,  though  it  nowhere  seeks 
to  be  exhaustive  in  treatment,  the  book  may  fairly 
claim  to  be  a  more  or  less  consistent  and  complete 
aesthetic  theory,  and  hence  to  address  itself  to  the 
student  of  aesthetics  as  well  as  to  the  general  reader. 
The  chapter  on  the  Nature  of  Beauty,  indeed,  will 
doubtless  be  found  by  the  latter  somewhat  technical, 
and  should  be  omitted  by  all  who  definitely  object 
to  professional  phraseology.  The  general  conclu 
sions  of  the  book  are  sufficiently  stated  in  the  less 
abstract  papers. 

Of  the  essays  which  compose  the  following  vol- 


PREFACE  vii 

ume,  the  first,  third,  and  last  are  reprinted,  in  more 
or  less  revised  form,  from  the  "  Atlantic  Monthly  " 
and  the  "  International  Monthly."  Although  writ 
ten  as  independent  papers,  it  is  thought  that  they 
do  not  unduly  repeat  each  other,  but  that  they 
serve  to  verify,  in  each  of  the  several  realms  of 
beauty,  the  truth  of  the  central  theory  of  the 
book. 

The  various  influences  which  have  served  to 
shape  a  work  of  this  kind  become  evident  in  the 
reading;  but  I  cannot  refrain  from  a  word  of  thanks 
to  the  teachers  whose  inspiration  and  encourage 
ment  first  made  it  possible.  I  owe  much  gratitude 
to  Professor  Mary  A.  Jordan  and  Professor  H. 
Norman  Gardiner  of  Smith  College,  who  in  litera 
ture  and  in  philosophy  first  set  me  in  the  way  of 
aesthetic  interest  and  inquiry,  and  to  Professor 
Hugo  Munsterberg  of  Harvard  University,  whose 
philosophical  theories  and  scientific  guidance  have 
largely  influenced  my  thought. 

WELLESLEY  COLLEGE,  AprU  24,  1905. 


CONTENTS 

PAGB 

I.  CRITICISM  AND  ^ESTHETICS      ....  1 

II.   THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY     ....  27 

III.  THE  ^ESTHETIC  REPOSE 57 

IV.  THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART  ....  89 

A.  THE  BEAUTY  OF  VISUAL  FORM       .        .  91 

B.  SPACE   COMPOSITION  AMONG  THE   OLD 

MASTERS 128 

V.  THE  BEAUTY  OF  Music 149 

VI.  THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       .        .        .  203 

VII.   THE  NATURE  OF  THE  EMOTIONS  OF  THE  DRAMA  229 

VIII.  THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS 263 


I 

CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS 


THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS 

IT  is  not  so  long  ago  that  the  field  of  literary 
criticism  was  divided  into  two  opposing  camps. 
France  being  the  only  country  in  the  world  where 
criticism  is  a  serious  matter,  the  battle  waged  most 
fiercely  there,  and  doubtless  greatly  served  to  bring 
about  the  present  general  interest  and  understand 
ing  of  the  theoretical  questions  at  issue.  The  com 
batants  were,  of  course,  the  impressionistic  and 
scientific  schools  of  criticism,  and  particularly  en 
lightening  were  the  more  or  less  recent  controversies 
between  MM.  Anatole  France  and  Jules  Lemaitre 
as  representatives  of  the  first,  and  M.  Brunetiere  as 
the  chief  exponent  of  the  second.  They  have  planted 
their  standards  ;  and  we  see  that  they  stand  for  ten 
dencies  in  the  critical  activity  of  every  nation.  The 
ideal  of  the  impressionist  is  to  bring  a  new  piece  of 
literature  into  being  in  some  exquisitely  happy  char 
acterization,  —  to  create  a  lyric  of  criticism  out  of 
the  unique  pleasure  of  an  aesthetic  hour.  The  strong 
hold  of  the  scientist,  on  the  other  hand,  is  the  doc 
trine  of  literary  evolution,  and  his  aim  is  to  show 
the  history  of  literature  as  the  history  of  a  process, 


4          THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

and  the  work  of  literature  as  a  product ;  to  explain 
it  from  its  preceding  causes,  and  to  detect  thereby 
the  general  laws  of  literary  metamorphosis. 

Such  are  the  two  great  lines  of  modern  criti 
cism  ;  their  purposes  and  ideals  stand  diametrically 
opposed.  Of  late,  however,  there  have  not  been 
wanting  signs  of  a  spirit  of  reconciliation,  and  of 
a  tendency  to  concede  the  value,  each  in  its  own 
sphere,  of  different  but  complementary  activities. 
Now  and  again  the  lion  and  the  lamb  have  lain 
down  together ;  one  might  almost  say,  on  reading 
a  delightful  paper  of  Mr.  Lewis  E.  Gates  on  Im 
pressionism  and  Appreciation,1  that  the  lamb  had 
assimilated  the  lion.  For  the  heir  of  all  literary 
studies,  according  to  Professor  Gates,  is  the  appre 
ciative  critic ;  and  he  it  is  who  shall  fulfill  the  true 
function  of  criticism.  He  is  to  consider  the  work 
of  art  in  its  historical  setting  and  its  psychological 
origin,  "  as  a  characteristic  moment  in  the  devel 
opment  of  human  spirit,  and  as  a  delicately  trans 
parent  illustration  of  a3sthetic  law."  But,  "  in 
regarding  the  work  of  art  under  all  these  aspects, 
his  aim  is,  primarily,  not  to  explain,  and  not  to 
judge  or  dogmatize,  but  to  enjoy ;  to  realize  the 
manifold  charms  the  work  of  art  has  gathered  unto 
itself  from  all  sources,  and  to  interpret  this  charm 
imaginatively  to  the  men  of  his  own  day  and  gen 
eration." 

Thus  it  would  seem  that  if  the  report  of  his  per- 
.  i  Atlantic  Monthly,  July,  1900. 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  5 

sonal  reactions  to  a  work  of  literary  art  is  the  in 
tention  of  the  impressionist,  and  its  explanation 
that  of  the  scientist,  the  purpose  of  the  appreciative 
critic  is  fairly  named  as  the  illuminating  and  inter 
preting  reproduction  of  that  work,  from  material 
furnished  by  those  other  forms  of  critical  activity. 
Must,  then,  the  method  of  appreciation,  as  combin 
ing  and  reconciling  the  two  opposed  views,  forth 
with  claim  our  adherence  ?  To  put  to  use  all  the 
devices  of  science  and  all  the  treasures  of  scholar 
ship  for  the  single  end  of  imaginative  interpretation, 
for  the  sake  of  giving  with  the  original  melody  all 
the  harmonies  of  subtle  association  and  profound 
meaning  the  ages  have  added,  is,  indeed,  a  great 
undertaking.  But  is  it  as  valuable  as  it  is  vast  ? 
M.  Brunetiere  has  poured  out  his  irony  upon  the 
critics  who  believe  that  their  own  reactions  upon 
literature  are  anything  to  us  in  the  presence  of  the 
works  to  which  they  have  thrilled.  May  it  not  also 
be  asked  of  the  interpreter  if  his  function  is  a  neces 
sary  one  ?  Do  we  require  so  much  enlightenment, 
only  to  enjoy?  Appreciative  criticism  is  a  salt  to 
give  the  dull  palate  its  full  savor ;  but  what  literary 
epicure,  what  real  book-lover,  will  acknowledge 
his  own  need  of  it?  If  the  whole  aim  of  appre 
ciative  criticism  is  to  reproduce  in  other  arrange 
ment  the  contents,  expressed  and  implied,  and  the 
emotional  value,  original  and  derived,  of  a  piece  of 
literature,  the  value  of  the  end,  at  least  to  the 
intelligent  reader,  is  out  of  all  proportion  to  the 


6          THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

laboriousness  of  the  means.  Sing,  reading 's  a  joy  I 
For  me,  I  read. 

But  a  feeling  of  this  kind  is,  after  all,  not  a  reason 
to  be  urged  against  the  method.  The  real  weakness 
of  appreciative  criticism  lies  elsewhere.  It  teaches 
us  to  enjoy ;  but  are  we  to  enjoy  everything?  Since 
its  only  aim  is  to  reveal  the  "  intricate  implica 
tions  "  of  a  work  of  art ;  since  it  offers,  and  professes 
to  offer,  no  literary  judgments,  —  having  indeed 
no  explicit  standard  of  literary  value,  —  it  must,  at 
least  on  its  own  theory,  take  its  objects  of  apprecia 
tion  ready-made,  so  to  speak,  by  popular  acclaim. 
It  possesses  no  criterion ;  it  likes  whate'er  it  looks 
on  ;  and  it  can  never  tell  us  what  we  are  not  to  like. 
That  is  unsatisfactory ;  and  it  is  worse,  —  it  is  self- 
destructive.  For,  not  being  able  to  reject,  apprecia 
tion  cannot,  in  logic,  choose  the  objects  of  its  atten 
tion.  But  a  method  which  cannot  limit  on  its  own 
principles  the  field  within  which  it  is  to  work  is  con 
demned  from  the  beginning ;  it  bears  a  fallacy  at  its 
core.  In  order  to  make  criticism  theoretically  possible 
at  all,  the  power  to  choose  and  reject,  and  so  the  pro 
nouncing  of  judgment,  must  be  an  integral  part  of  it. 

To  such  a  task  the  critic  may  lend  himself  with 
out  arousing  our  antagonism.  We  have  no  pressing 
need  to  know  the  latent  possibilities  of  emotion  for 
us  in  a  book  or  a  poem ;  but  whether  it  is  excellent 
or  the  reverse,  whether  "  we  were  right  in  being 
moved  by  it,"  we  are  indeed  willing  to  hear,  for  we 
desire  to  justify  the  faith  that  is  in  us. 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  7 

If,  then,  the  office  of  the  judge  be  an  essential 
part  of  the  critical  function,  the  appreciative  critic, 
whatever  his  other  merits,  —  and  we  shall  examine 
them  later,  —  fails  at  least  of  perfection.  His  scheme 
is  not  the  ideal  one  ;  and  we  may  turn  back,  in  our 
search  for  it,  to  a  closer  view  of  those  which  his  was 
to  supersede.  Impressionism,  however,  is  at  once 
out  of  the  running ;  it  has  always  vigorously  repu 
diated  the  notion  of  the  standard,  and  we  know, 
therefore,  that  no  more  than  appreciation  can  it 
choose  its  material  and  stand  alone.  But  scientific 
criticism  professes,  at  least,  the  true  faith.  M.  Brune 
tiere  holds  that  his  own  method  is  the  only  one  by 
which  an  impersonal  and  stable  judgment  can  be 
rendered. 

The  doctrine  of  the  evolution  of  literary  species 
is  more  or  less  explained  in  naming  it.  Literary 
species,  M.  Brunetiere  maintains,  do  exist.  They 
develop  and  are  transformed  into  others  in  a  way 
more  or  less  analogous  to  the  evolution  of  natural 
types.  It  remains  to  see  on  what  basis  an  objective 
judgment  can  be  given.  Although  M.  Brunetiere 
seems  to  make  classification  the  disposal  of  a  work 
in  the  hierarchy  of  species,  and  judgment  the  dis 
posal  of  it  in  relation  to  others  of  its  own  species, 
he  has  never  sharply  distinguished  between  them  ; 
so  that  we  shall  not  be  wrong  in  taking  his  three 
principles  of  classification,  scientific,  moral,  and 
aesthetic,  as  three  principles  by  which  he  estimates 
the  excellence  of  a  work.  His  own  examples,  in- 


8          THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

deed,  prove  that  to  him  a  thing  is  already  judged 
in  being  classified.  The  work  of  art  is  judged,  then, 
by  its  relation  to  the  type.  Is  this  position  tenable  ? 
I  hold  that,  on  the  contrary,  it  precludes  the  possi 
bility  of  a  critical  judgment ;  for  the  judgment  of 
anything  always  means  judgment  with  reference  to 
the  end  for  which  it  exists.  A  bad  king  is  not  the 
less  a  bad  king  for  being  a  good  father ;  and  if  his 
kingship  is  his  essential  function,  he  must  be  judged 
with  reference  to  that  alone.  Now  a  piece  of  litera 
ture  is,  with  reference  to  its  end,  first  of  all  a  work 
of  art.  It  represents  life  and  it  enjoins  morality, 
but  it  is  only  as  a  work  of  art  that  it  attains  con 
sideration  ;  that,  in  the  words  of  M.  Lemaitre,  it 
"  exists  "  for  us  at  all.  Its  aim  is  beauty,  and  beauty 
is  its  excuse  for  being. 

The  type  belongs  to  natural  history.  The  one 
principle  at  the  basis  of  scientific  criticism  is,  as 
we  have  seen,  the  conception  of  literary  history  as 
a  process,  and  of  the  work  of  art  as  a  product. 
The  work  of  art  is,  then,  a  moment  in  a  necessary 
succession,  governed  by  laws  of  change  and  adap 
tation  like  those  of  natural  evolution.  But  how  can 
the  conception  of  values  enter  here?  Excellence 
can  be  attributed  only  to  that  which  attains  an 
ideal  end ;  and  a  necessary  succession  has  no  end 
in  itself.  The  "type,"  in  this  sense,  is  perfectly 
hollow.  To  say  that  the  modern  chrysanthemum  is 
better  than  that  of  our  forbears  because  it  is  more 
chrysanthemum-like  is  true  only  if  we  make  the 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  9 

latter  form  the  arbitrary  standard  of  the  chrysan 
themum.  If  the  horse  of  the  Eocene  age  is  inferior 
to  the  horse  of  to-day,  it  is  because,  on  M.  Brune- 
tiere's  principle,  he  is  less  horse-like.  But  who 
shall  decide  which  is  more  like  a  horse,  the  original 
or  the  later  development  ?  No  species  which  is  con 
stituted  by  its  own  history  can  be  said  to  have  an 
end  in  itself,  and  can,  therefore,  have  an  excellence 
to  which  it  shall  attain.  In  short,  good  and  bad 
can  be  applied  to  the  moments  in  a  necessary  evo 
lution  only  by  imputing  a  fictitious  superiority  to 
the  last  term ;  and  so  one  type  cannot  logically  be 
preferred  to  another.  As  for  the  individual  speci 
mens,  since  the  conception  of  the  type  does  not 
admit  the  principle  of  excellence,  conformity  thereto 
means  nothing. 

The  work  of  art,  on  the  other  hand,  as  a  thing 
of  beauty,  is  an  attainment  of  an  ideal,  not  a  pro 
duct,  and,  from  this  point  of  view,  is  related  not 
at  all  to  the  other  terms  of  a  succession,  its  causes 
and  its  effects,  but  only  to  the  abstract  principles 
of  that  beauty  at  which  it  aims.  Strangely  enough, 
the  whole  principle  of  this  contention  has  been  ad 
mitted  by  M.  Brunetiere  in  a  casual  sentence,  of 
which  he  does  not  appear  to  recognize  the  full  sig 
nificance.  "  We  acknowledge,  of  course,"  he  says, 
"  that  there  is  in  criticism  a  certain  difference  from 
natural  history,  since  we  cannot  eliminate  the  sub 
jective  element  if  the  capacity  works  of  art  have 
of  producing  impressions  on  us  makes  a  part  of 


10        THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

their  definition.  It  is  not  in  order  to  be  eaten  that 
the  tree  produces  its  fruit."  But  this  is  giving 
away  his  whole  position !  As  little  as  the  conform 
ity  of  the  fruit  to  its  species  has  to  do  with  our 
pleasure  in  eating  it,  just  so  little  has  the  conform 
ity  of  a  literary  work  to  its  genre  to  do  with  the 
quality  by  virtue  of  which  it  is  defined  as  art. 

The  Greek  temple  is  a  product  of  Greek  reli 
gion  applied  to  geographical  conditions.  To  com 
prehend  it  as  a  type,  we  must  know  that  it  was  an 
adaptation  of  the  open  hilltop  to  the  purpose  of 
the  worship  of  images  of  the  gods.  But  the  most 
penetrating  study  of  the  slow  moulding  of  the  type 
will  never  reveal  how  and  why  just  those  propor 
tions  were  chosen  which  make  the  joy  and  the 
despair  of  all  beholders.  Early  Italian  art  was 
purely  ecclesiastical  in  its  origin.  The  exigencies 
of  adaptation  to  altars,  convent  walls,  or  cathedral 
domes  explain  the  choice  of  subjects,  the  compo 
sition,  even  perhaps  the  color  schemes  (as  of  fres 
coes,  for  instance)  ;  and  yet  all  that  makes  a  Giotto 
greater  than  a  Pictor  Ignotus  is  quite  unaccounted 
for  by  these  considerations. 

The  quality  of  beauty  is  not  evolved.  All  that 
comes  under  the  category  of  material  and  practical 
purpose,  of  idea  or  of  moral  attitude,  belongs  to 
the  succession,  the  evolution,  the  type.  But  the 
defining  characters  of  the  work  of  art  are  inde 
pendent  of  time.  The  temple,  the  fresco,  and  the 
symphony,  in  the  moment  they  become  objects  of 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  11 

the  critical  judgment,  become  also  qualities  of 
beauty  and  transparent  examples  of  its  laws. 

If  the  true  critical  judgment,  then,  belongs  to  an 
order  of  ideas  of  which  natural  science  can  take  no 
cognizance,  the  self-styled  scientific  criticism  must 
show  the  strange  paradox  of  ignoring  the  very 
qualities  by  virtue  of  which  a  given  work  has  any 
value,  or  can  come  at  all  to  be  the  object  of  aesthetic 
judgment.  In  two  words,  the  world  of  beauty  and 
the  world  of  natural  processes  are  incommensurable, 
and  scientific  criticism  of  literary  art  is  a  logical 
impossibility. 

But  the  citadel  of  scientific  criticism  has  yet  one 
more  stronghold.  Granted  that  beauty,  as  an  ab 
stract  quality,  is  timeless ;  granted  that,  in  the  judg 
ment  of  a  piece  of  literary  art,  the  standard  of  value 
is  the  canon  of  beauty,  not  the  type  ;  yet  the  old 
order  changeth.  Primitive  and  civilized  man,  the 
Hottentot  and  the  Laplander,  the  Oriental  and  the 
Slav,  have  desired  differing  beauties.  May  it,  then, 
still  be  said  that  although  a  given  embodiment  of 
beauty  is  to  be  judged  with  reference  to  the  idea 
of  beauty  alone,  yet  the  concrete  ideal  of  beauty 
must  wear  the  manacles  of  space  and  time,  —  that 
the  metamorphoses  of  taste  preclude  the  notion  of 
an  objective  beauty?  And  if  this  is  true,  are  we 
not  thrown  back  again  on  questions  of  genesis  and 
development,  and  a  study  of  the  evolution,  not  of 
particular  types  of  art,  but  of  general  aesthetic  feel 
ing  ;  and,  in  consequence,  upon  a  form  of  criticism 


12        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

which  is  scientific  in  the  sense  of  being  based  on 
succession,  and  not  on  absolute  value  ? 

It  is  indeed  true  that  the  very  possibility  of  a 
criticism  which  shall  judge  of  aBsthetic  excellence 
must  stand  or  fall  with  this  other  question  of  a 
beauty  in  itself,  as  an  objective  foundation  for 
criticism.  If  there  is  an  absolute  beauty,  it  must 
be  possible  to  work  out  a  system  of  principles 
which  shall  embody  its  laws,  —  an  a3sthetic,  in 
other  words ;  and  on  the  basis  of  that  a3sthetic  to 
deliver  a  well-founded  critical  judgment.  Is  there, 
then,  a  beauty  in  itself  ?  And  if  so,  in  what  does 
it  consist  ? 

We  can  approach  such  an  aBsthetic  canon  in  two 
ways:  from  the  standpoint  of  philosophy,  which 
develops  the  idea  of  beauty  as  a  factor  in  the  sys 
tem  of  our  absolute  values,  side  by  side  with  the 
ideas  of  truth  and  of  morality,  or  from  the  stand 
point  of  empirical  science.  For  our  present  purpose, 
we  may  confine  ourselves  to  the  empirical  facts  of 
psychology  and  physiology. 

When  I  feel  the  rhythm  of  poetry,  or  of  perfect 
prose,  which  is,  of  course,  in  its  own  way,  no  less 
rhythmical,  every  sensation  of  sound  sends  through 
me  a  diffusive  wave  of  nervous  energy.  I  am  the 
rhythm  because  I  imitate  it  in  myself.  I  march  to 
noble  music  in  all  my  veins,  even  though  I  may  be 
sitting  decorously  by  my  own  hearthstone ;  and 
when  I  sweep  with  my  eyes  the  outlines  of  a  great 
picture,  the  curve  of  a  Greek  vase,  the  arches  of  a 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  13 

cathedral,  every  line  is  lived  over  again  in  my  own 
frame.  And  when  rhythm  and  melody  and  forms 
and  colors  give  me  pleasure,  it  is  because  the  imi 
tating  impulses  and  movements  that  have  arisen  in 
me  are  such  as  suit,  help,  heighten  my  physical 
organization  in  general  and  in  particular.  It  may 
seem  somewhat  trivial  to  say  that  a  curved  line  is 
pleasing  because  the  eye  is  so  hung  as  to  move  best 
in  it ;  but  we  may  take  it  as  one  instance  of  the 
numberless  conditions  for  healthy  action  which  a 
beautiful  form  fulfills.  A  well-composed  picture 
calls  up  in  the  spectator  just  such  a  balanced  rela 
tion  of  impulses  of  attention  and  incipient  move 
ments  as  suits  an -organism  which  is  also  balanced 
—  bilateral  —  in  its  own  impulses  to  movement, 
and  at  the  same  time  stable;  and  it  is  the  cor 
respondence  of  the  suggested  impulses  with  the 
natural  movement  that  makes  the  composition  good. 
Besides  the  pleasure  from  the  tone  relations, — 
which  doubtless  can  be  eventually  reduced  to  some 
thing  of  the  same  kind,  —  it  is  the  balance  of 
nervous  and  muscular  tensions  and  relaxations,  of 
yearnings  and  satisfactions,  which  are  the  subjective 
side  of  the  beauty  of  a  strain  of  music.  The  basis, 
in  short,  of  any  aesthetic  experience  —  poetry,  mu 
sic,  painting,  and  the  rest  —  is  beautiful  through 
its  harmony  with  the  conditions  offered  by  our 
senses,  primarily  of  sight  and  hearing,  and  through 
the  harmony  of  the  suggestions  and  impulses  it 
arouses  with  the  whole  organism. 


14        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

But  the  sensuous  beauty  of  art  does  not  exhaust 
the  aesthetic  experience.  What  of  the  special  emo 
tions  —  the  gayety  -or  triumph,  the  sadness  or 
peace  or  agitation  —  that  hang  about  the  work 
of  art,  and  make,  for  many,  the  greater  part  of 
their  delight  in  it?  Those  among  these  special 
emotions  which  belong  to  the  subject-matter  of  a 
work  —  like  our  horror  at  the  picture  of  an  execu 
tion  —  need  not  here  be  discussed.  To  understand 
the  rest  we  may  venture  for  a  moment  into  the  realm 
of  pure  psychology.  We  are  told  by  psychology 
that  emotion  is  dependent  on  the  organic  excita 
tions  of  any  given  idea.  Thus  fear  at  the  sight  of 
a  bear  is  only  the  reverberation  in  consciousness 
of  all  nervous  and  vascular  changes  set  up  instinc 
tively  as  a  preparation  for  flight.  Think  away  our 
bodily  feelings,  ard  we  think  away  fear,  too.  And 
set  up  the  bodily  changes  and  the  feeling  of  them, 
and  we  have  the  emotion  that  belongs  to  them  even 
without  the  idea,  as  we  may  see  in  the  unmotived 
panics  that  sometimes  accompany  certain  heart 
disturbances.  The  same  thing,  on  another  level, 
is  a  familiar  experience.  A  glass  of  wine  makes 
merriment,  simply  by  bringing  about  those  organic 
states  which  are  felt  emotionally  as  cheerfulness. 
Now  the  application  of  all  this  to  aesthetics  is 
clear.  All  these  tensions,  relaxations,  —  bodily 
"  imitations  "  of  the  form,  —  have  each  the  emo 
tional  tone  which  belongs  to  it.  And  so  if  the 
music  of  a  Strauss  waltz  makes  us  gay,  and  Han- 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  15 

del's  Largo  serious,  it  is  not  because  we  are  re 
minded  of  the  ballroom  or  of  the  cathedral,  but 
because  the  physical  response  to  the  stimulus  of 
the  music  is  itself  the  basis  of  the  emotion.  What 
makes  the  sense  of  peace  in  the  atmosphere  of  the 
Low  Countries  ?  Only  the  tendency,  on  following 
those  level  lines  of  landscape,  to  assume  ourselves 
the  horizontal,  and  the  restfulness  which  belongs 
to  that  posture.  If  the  crimson  of  a  picture  by 
Bocklin,  or  the  golden  glow  of  a  Giorgione,  or  the 
fantastic  gleam  of  a  Rembrandt  speaks  to  me  like 
a  human  voice,  it  is  not  because  it  expresses  to  me 
an  idea,  but  because  it  impresses  that  sensibility 
which  is  deeper  than  ideas,  —  the  region  of  the 
emotional  response  to  color  and  to  light.  What  is 
the  beauty  of  the  "  Ulalume,"  or  "  Kufyla  Khan,"  or 
"  Ueber  alien  Gipfeln  "  ?  It  is  the  way  in  which 
the  form  in  its  exquisite  fitness  to  our  senses,  and 
the  emotion  belonging  to  that  particular  form  as 
organic  reverberation  therefrom,  in  its  exquisite 
fitness  to  thought,  create  in  us  a  delight  quite  un 
accounted  for  by  the  ideas  which  they  express. 
This  is  the  essence  of  beauty,  —  the  possession  of 
a  quality  which  excites  the  human  organism  to 
functioning  harmonious  with  its  own  nature. 

We  can  see  in  this  definition  the  possibility  of 
an  aesthetic  which  shall  have  objective  validity  be 
cause  founded  in  the  eternal  properties  of  human 
nature,  while  it  yet  allows  us  to  understand  that 
in  the  limits  within  which,  by  education  and  envi- 


16        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

ronment,  the  empirical  man  changes,  his  norms  of 
beauty  must  vary,  too.  Ideas  can  change  in  inter 
est  and  in  value,  but  these  energies  lie  much  deeper 
than  the  idea,  in  the  original  constitution  of  man 
kind.  They  belong  to  the  instinctive,  involuntary 
part  of  our  nature.  They  are  changeless,  just  as 
the  "  eternal  man  "  is  changeless  ;  and  as  the  basis 
of  aesthetic  feeling  they  can  be  gathered  into  a 
system  of  laws  which  shall  be  subject  to  no  essen 
tial  metamorphosis.  So  long  as  we  laugh  when  we 
are  joyful,  and  weep  when  we  are  sick  and  sorry ; 
so  long  as  we  flush  with  anger,  or  grow  pale  with 
fear,  so  long  shall  we  thrill  to  a  golden  sunset, 
the  cadence  of  an  air,  or  the  gloomy  spaces  of  a 
cathedral. 

The  study  of  these  forms  of  harmonious  function 
ing  of  the  human  organism  has  its  roots,  of  course, 
in  the  science  of  psychology,  but  comes,  neverthe 
less,  to  a  different  flower,  because  of  the  grafting 
on  of  the  element  of  aesthetic  value.  It  is  the  study 
of  the  disinterested  human  pleasures,  and,  although 
as  yet  scarcely  well  begun,  capable  of  a  most  de 
tailed  and  definitive  treatment. 

This  is  not  the  character  of  those  studies  so 
casually  alluded  to  by  the  author  of  "  Impressionism 
and  Appreciation,"  when  he  enjoins  on  the  apprecia 
tive  critic  not  to  neglect  the  literature  of  33sthetics : 
"  The  characteristics  of  his  [the  artist's]  tempera 
ment  have  been  noted  with  the  nicest  loyalty ;  and 
particularly  the  play  of  his  special  faculty,  the  im- 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  17 

agination,  as  this  faculty  through  the  use  of  sensa 
tions  and  images  and  moods  and  ideas  creates  a 
work  of  art,  has  been  followed  out  with  the  utmost 
delicacy  of  observation."  But  these  are  not  pro 
perly  studies  in  aesthetics  at  all.  To  find  out  what 
is  beautiful,  and  the  reason  for  its  being  beautiful, 
is  the  esthetic  task ;  to  analyze  the  workings  of 
the  poet's  mind,  as  his  conception  grows  and  rami 
fies  and  brightens,  is  no  part  of  it,  because  such  a 
study  takes  no  account  of  the  aesthetic  value  of  the 
process,  but  only  of  the  process  itself.  The  same 
fallacy  lurks  here,  indeed,  as  in  the  confusion  of 
the  scientific  critic  between  literary  evolution  and 
poetic  achievement,  and  the  test  of  the  fallacy  is 
this  single  fact :  the  psychological  process  in  the 
development  of  a  dramatic  idea,  for  instance,  is, 
and  quite  properly  should  be,  from  the  point  of 
view  of  such  analysis,  exactly  the  same  for  a  Shake 
speare  and  for  the  Hoyt  of  our  American  farces. 

The  cause  of  the  production  of  a  work  of  art  may 
indeed  be  found  by  tracing  back  the  stream  of 
thought ;  but  the  cause  of  its  beauty  is  the  desire 
and  the  sense  of  beauty  in  the  human  heart.  If  a 
given  combination  of  lines  and  colors  is  beautiful, 
then  the  anticipation  of  the  combination  as  beauti 
ful  is  what  has  brought  about  its  incarnation.  The 
artist's  attitude  toward  his  vision  of  beauty,  and  the 
art  lover's  toward  that  vision  realized,  are  the  same. 
The  only  legitimate  aesthetic  analysis  is,  then,  that 
of  the  relation  between  the  aesthetic  object  and  the 


18        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

lover  of  beauty,  and  all  the  studies  in  the  psycho 
logy  of  invention  —  be  it  literary,  scientific,  or 
practical  invention  —  have  no  right  to  the  other 
name. 

-^Esthetics,  then,  is  the  science  of  beauty.  It  will 
be  developed  as  a  system  of  laws  expressing  the 
relation  between  the  object  and  aesthetic  pleasure  in 
it ;  or  as  a  system  of  conditions  to  which  the  ob 
ject,  in  order  to  be  beautiful,  must  conform.  It  is 
hard  to  say  where  the  task  of  the  aesthetician  ends, 
and  that  of  the  critic  begins  ;  and  for  the  present, 
at  least,  they  must  often  be  commingled.  But  they 
are  defined  by  their  purposes :  the  end  and  aim  of 
one  is  a  system  of  principles ;  of  the  other,  <;he 
disposal  of  a  given  work  with  reference  to  those 
principles  ;  and  when  the  science  of  aesthetics  shall 
have  taken  shape,  criticism  will  confine  itself  to 
the  analysis  of  the  work  into  its  aesthetic  elements, 
to  the  explanation  (by  means  of  the  laws  already 
formulated)  of  its  especial  power  in  the  realm  of 
beauty,  and  to  the  judgment  of  its  comparative 
aesthetic  value. 

The  other  forms  of  critical  activity  will  then  find 
their  true  place  as  preliminaries  or  supplements  to 
the  essential  function  of  criticism.  The  study  of 
historical  conditions,  of  authors'  personal  relations, 
of  the  literary  "  moment,"  will  be  means  to  show 
the  work  of  art  "  as  in  itself  it  really  is."  Shall  we 
then  say  that  the  method  of  appreciation,  being  an 
unusually  exhaustive  presentment  of  the  object  as 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  19 

in  itself  it  really  is,  is  therefore  an  indispensable 
preparation  for  the  critical  judgment  ?  The  modern 
appreciator,  after  the  model  limned  by  Professor 
Gates,  was  to  strive  to  get,  as  it  were,  the  aerial 
perspective  of  a  masterpiece,  —  to  present  it  as  it 
looks  across  the  blue  depths  of  the  years.  This  is 
without  doubt  a  fascinating  study  ;  but  it  may  be 
questioned  if  it  does  not  darken  the  more  important 
issue.  For  it  is  not  the  object  as  in  itself  it  really 
is  that  we  at  last  behold,  but  the  object  disguised 
in  new  and  strange  trappings.  Such  appreciation 
is  to  aesthetic  criticism  as  the  sentimental  to  the 
naive  poet  in  Schiller's  famous  antithesis.  The  vir 
tue  of  the  sentimental  genius  is  to  complete  by  the 
elements  which  it  derives  from  itself  an  otherwise 
defective  object.  So  the  aesthetic  critic  takes  his 
natural  meed  of  beauty  from  the  object;  the 
appreciative  critic  seeks  a  further  beauty  outside  of 
the  object,  in  his  own  reflections  and  fancies  about 
it.  But  if  we  care  greatly  for  the  associations  of 
literature,  we  are  in  danger  of  disregarding  its 
quality.  A  vast  deal  of  pretty  sentiment  may  hang 
about  and  all  but  transmute  the  most  prosaic  ob 
ject.  A  sedan  chair,  an  old  screen,  a  sundial,  —  to 
quote  only  Austin  Dobson,  —  need  not  be  lovely  in 
themselves  to  serve  as  pegs  to  hang  a  poem  on  ;  and 
all  the  atmosphere  of  the  eighteenth  century  may 
be  wafted  from  a  jar  of  potpourri.  Read  a  lyric 
instead  of  a  rose  jar,  and  the  rule  holds  as  well. 
The  man  of  feeling  cannot  but  find  all  Ranelagh 


20        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

and  Vauxhall  in  some  icily  regular  effusion  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  and  will  take  a  deeper  retro 
spective  thrill  from  an  old  playbill  than  from  the 
play  itself.  And  since  this  is  so,  —  since  the  in 
terest  in  the  overtones,  the  added  value  given  by 
time,  the  value  for  us,  is  not  necessarily  related 
to  the  value  as  literature  of  the  fundamental  note, 
—  to  make  the  study  of  the  overtones  an  essential 
part  of  criticism  is  to  be  guilty  of  the  Pathetic  Fal 
lacy  ;  that  is,  the  falsification  of  the  object  by  the 
intrusion  of  ourselves,  —  the  typical  sentimental 
crime. 

It  seems  to  me,  indeed,  that  instead  of  courting 
a  sense  for  the  aromatic  in  literature,  the  critic 
should  rather  guard  himself  against  its  insidious 
approaches.  Disporting  himself  in  such  pleasures 
of  the  fancy,  he  finds  it  easy  to  believe,  and  to 
make  us  believe,  that  a  piece  of  literature  gains  in 
intrinsic  value  from  its  power  to  stimulate  his  his 
torical  sense.  The  modern  appreciative  critic,  in 
short,  is  too  likely  to  be  the  dupe  of  his  "  sophisti 
cated  reverie,"  —  like  an  epicure  who  should  not 
taste  the  meat  for  the  sauces.  A  master  work,  once 
beautiful  according  to  the  great  and  general  laws, 
never  becomes,  properly  speaking,  either  more  or 
less  so.  If  a  piece  of  art  can  take  us  with  its  own 
beauty,  there  is  no  point  in  superimposing  upon  it 
shades  of  sentiment ;  if  it  cannot  so  charm,  all  the 
rose-colored  lights  of  this  kind  of  appreciative 
criticism  are  unavailing. 


CRITICISM  AND  ESTHETICS  21 

The  "  literary  "  treatment  of  art,  as  the  "  emo 
tional  "  treatment  of  literature,  —  for  that  is  what 
"  appreciation  "  and  "  interpretation  "  really  are, — 
can  completely  justify  itself  only  as  the  crowning 
touch  of  a  detailed  aesthetic  analysis  of  those 
"  orders  of  impression  distinct  in  kind  "  which  are 
the  primary  elements  in  our  pleasure  in  the  beau 
tiful.  It  is  the  absence  —  and  not  only  the  absence, 
but  the  ignoring  of  the  possibility  —  of  such  analy 
sis  which  tempts  one  to  rebel  against  such  phrases 
as  those  of  Professor  Gates :  "  the  splendid  and 
victorious  womanhood  of  Titian's  Madonnas,"  "  the 
gentle  and  terrestrial  grace  of  motherhood  in  those 
of  Andrea  del  Sarto,"  the  "  sweetly  ordered  come 
liness  of  Van  Dyck's."  One  is  moved  to  ask  if  the 
only  difference  between  a  Madonna  of  Titian  and 
one  of  Andrea  is  a  difference  of  temper,  and  if  the 
important  matter  for  the  critic  of  art  is  the  moral 
conception  rather  than  the  visible  beauty. 

I  cannot  think  of  anything  for  which  I  would 
exchange  the  enchanting  volumes  of  Walter  Pater, 
and  yet  even  he  is  not  the  ideal  aBsthetic  critic 
whose  duties  he  made  clear.  What  he  has  done  is 
to  give  us  the  most  exquisite  and  delicate  of  inter 
pretations.  He  has  not  failed  to  "  disengage  "  the 
subtle  and  peculiar  pleasure  that  each  picture,  each 
poem  or  personality,  has  in  store  for  us ;  but  of 
analysis  and  explanation  of  this  pleasure  —  of  which 
he  speaks  in  the  Introduction  to  "  The  Renaissance  " 
—  there  is  no  more.  In  the  first  lines  of  his  paper  on 


22        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Botticelli,  the  author  asks,  "  What  is  the  peculiar 
sensation  which  his  work  has  the  property  of  excit 
ing  in  us?"  And  to  what  does  he  finally  come? 
"  The  peculiar  character  of  Botticelli  is  the  result 
of  a  blending  in  him  of  a  sympathy  for  humanity 
in  its  uncertain  conditions  .  .  .  with  his  conscious 
ness  of  the  shadow  upon  it  of  the  great  things  from 
which  it  sinks."  But  this  is  not  aesthetic  analysis ! 
It  is  not  even  the  record  of  a  "  peculiar  sensation," 
but  a  complex  intellectual  interpretation.  Where 
is  the  pleasure  in  the  irrepressible  outline,  fasci 
nating  in  its  falseness,  —  in  the  strange  color,  like 
the  taste  of  olives,  of  the  Spring  and  the  Pallas? 
So,  also,  his  great  passage  on  the  Mona  Lisa,  his 
"  Winckelmann,"  even  his  "  Giorgione  "  itself,  are 
merely  wonderful  delineations  of  the  mood  of  re 
sponse  to  the  creations  of  the  art  in  question.  Such 
interpretation  as  we  have  from  Pater  is  a  priceless 
treasure,  but  it  is  none  the  less  the  final  cornice, 
and  not  the  corner  stone  of  aBsthetic  criticism. 

The  tendency  to  interpretation  without  any  basis 
in  assthetic  explanation  is  especially  seen  in  the 
subject  of  our  original  discussion,  —  literature.  It 
is  indeed  remarkable  how  scanty  is  the  space  given 
in  contemporary  criticism  to  the  study  of  an  au 
thor's  means  to  those  results  which  we  ourselves 
experience.  Does  no  one  really  care  how  it  is  done  ? 
Or  are  they  all  in  the  secret,  and  interested  only  in 
the  temperament  expressed  or  the  aspect  of  life  en 
visaged  in  a  given  work  ?  One  would  have  thought 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  23 

that  as  the  painter  turned  critic  in  Fromentin  at 
least  to  a  certain  extent  sought  out  and  dealt  with 
the  hidden  workings  of  his  art,  so  the  romancer  or 
the  poet-critic  might  also  have  told  off  for  us  "  the 
very  pulse  of  the  machine."  The  last  word  has  not 
been  said  on  the  mysteries  of  the  writer's  art.  We 
know,  it  may  be,  how  the  links  of  Shakespeare's 
magic  chain  of  words  are  forged,  but  the  same  can 
not  be  said  of  any  other  poet.  We  have  studied 
Dante's  philosophy  and  his  ideal  of  love  ;  but  have 
we  found  out  the  secrets  of  his  "inventive  han 
dling  of  rhythmical  language  "  ?  If  Flaubert  is  uni 
versally  acknowledged  to  have  created  a  masterpiece 
in  "  Madame  Bovary,"  should  there  not  be  an  inter 
est  for  criticism  in  following  out,  chapter  by  chap 
ter,  paragraph  by  paragraph,  word  by  word,  the 
meaning  of  what  it  is  to  be  a  masterpiece?  But  such 
seems  not  to  be  the  case.  Taine  reconstructs  the 
English  temperament  out  of  Fielding  and  Dickens ; 
Matthew  Arnold,  although  he  deals  more  than 
others  in  first  principles,  never  carries  his  analysis 
beyond  the  widest  generalizations,  like  the  require 
ment  for  ''profound  truth"  and  "high  serious 
ness,"  for  great  poetry.  And  as  we  run  the  gamut 
of  contemporary  criticism,  we  find  ever  preoccupa 
tion  with  the  personality  of  the  writers  and  the  ideas 
of  their  books.  I  recall  only  one  example  —  the 
critical  essays  of  Henry  James  —  where  the  crafts 
man  has  dropped  some  hints  on  the  ideals  of  the 
literary  art ;  and  even  that,  if  I  may  be  allowed  the 


24        THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

bull,  in  his  novels  rather  than  in  his  essays,  for  in 
critical  theory  he  is  the  most  ardent  of  impression 
ists.  Whatever  the  cause,  we  cannot  but  allow  the 
dearth  of  knowledge  of,  and  interest  in,  the  pecul 
iar  subject-matter  of  criticism,  —  the  elements  of 
beauty  in  a  work  of  literature. 

But  although  the  present  body  of  criticism  con 
sists  rather  of  preliminaries  and  supplements  to 
what  should  be  its  real  accomplishment,  these 
should  not  therefore  receive  the  less  regard.  The 
impressionist  has  set  himself  a  definite  task,  and  he 
has  succeeded.  If  not  the  true  critic,  he  is  an  artist 
in  his  own  right,  and  he  has  something  to  say  to 
the  world.  The  scientific  critic  has  taken  all  know 
ledge  for  his  province ;  and  although  we  hold  that 
it  has  rushed  in  upon  and  swamped  his  distinctly 
critical  function,  so  long  as  we  may  call  him  by  his 
other  name  of  natural  historian  of  literature,  we  can 
only  acknowledge  his  great  achievements.  For  the 
appreciative  critic  we  have  less  sympathy  as  yet, 
but  the  "  development  of  the  luxurious  intricacy 
and  the  manifold  implications  of  our  enjoyment " 
may  fully  crown  the  edifice  of  aesthetic  explanation 
and  appraisal  of  the  art  of  every  age.  But  all  these, 
we  feel,  do  not  fulfill  the  essential  function  ;  the 
Idea  of  Criticism  is  not  here.  What  the  idea  of 
criticism  is  we  have  tried  to  work  out :  a  judgment 
of  a  work  of  art  on  the  basis  of  the  laws  of  beauty. 
That  such  laws  there  are,  that  they  exist  directly 
in  the  relation  between  the  material  form  and  the 


CRITICISM  AND  AESTHETICS  25 

suggested  physical  reactions,  and  that  they  are 
practically  changeless,  even  as  the  human  instincts 
are  changeless,  we  have  sought  to  show.  And  if 
there  can  be  a  science  of  the  beautiful,  then  an  ob 
jective  judgment  on  the  basis  of  the  laws  of  the 
beautiful  can  be  rendered.  The  true  end  of  criti 
cism,  therefore,  is  to  tell  us  whence  and  why  the 
charm  of  a  work  of  art :  to  disengage,  to  explain, 
to  measure,  and  to  certify  it.  And  this  explanation 
of  charm,  and  this  stamping  it  with  the  seal  of 
approval,  is  possible  by  the  help,  and  only  by  the 
help,  of  the  science  of  aesthetics,  —  a  science  now 
only  in  its  beginning,  but  greatly  to  be  desired  in 
its  full  development. 

How  greatly  to  be  desired  we  realize  in  divining 
that  the  present  dearth  of  constructive  and  destruc 
tive  criticism,  of  all,  indeed,  except  interpretations 
and  reports,  is  responsible  for  the  modern  mountains 
of  machine-made  literature.  Will  not  the  aesthetic 
critic  be  for  us  a  new  Hercules,  to  clear  away  the 
ever  growing  heap  of  formless  things  in  book 
covers?  If  he  will  teach  us  only  what  great  art 
means  in  literature ;  if  he  will  give  us  never  so 
little  discussion  of  the  first  principles  of  beauty, 
and  point  the  moral  with  some  "  selling  books,"  he 
will  at  least  have  turned  the  flood.  There  are  sto 
ries  nowadays,  but  few  novels,  and  plenty  of  spec 
tacles,  but  no  plays  ;  and  how  should  we  know  the 
difference,  never  having  heard  what  a  novel  ought 
to  be  ?  But  let  the  aesthetic  critic  give  us  a  firm 


26        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

foundation  for  criticism,  a  real  understanding  of 
the  conditions  of  literary  art ;  let  him  teach  us  to 
know  a  novel  or  a  play  when  we  see  it,  and  we 
shall  not  always  mingle  the  wheat  and  the  chaff. 


II 

THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY 


II 

THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY 

TTWERY  introduction  to  the  problems  of  aesthet- 
Tj  ics  begins  by  acknowledging  the  existence 
and  claims  of  two  methods  of  attack,  —  the  gen 
eral,  philosophical,  deductive,  which  starts  from  a 
complete  metaphysics  and  installs  beauty  in  its 
place  among  the  other  great  concepts;  and  the 
empirical,  or  inductive,  which  seeks  to  disengage  a 
general  principle  of  beauty  from  the  objects  of 
aesthetic  experience  and  the  facts  of  aesthetic  en 
joyment:  Fechner's  "aesthetics  from  above  and 
from  below." 

The  first  was  the  method  of  aesthetics  par  ex- 
cellence.  It  was  indeed  only  through  the  desire 
of  an  eighteenth-century  philosopher,  Baumgarten, 
to  round  out  his  "  architectonic  "  of  metaphysics 
that  the  science  received  its  name,  as  designating 
the  theory  of  knowledge  in  the  form  of  feeling, 
parallel  to  that  of  "  clear,"  logical  thought.  Kant, 
Schelling,  arid  Hegel,  again,  made  use  of  the  con 
cept  of  the  Beautiful  as  a  kind  of  keystone  OP 
cornice  for  their  respective  philosophical  edifices. 
^Esthetics,  then,  came  into  being  as  the  philosophy 
of  the  Beautiful,  and  it  may  be  asked  why  this 


30        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

philosophical  aesthetics  does  not  suffice  —  why 
beauty  should  need  for  its  understanding  also  an 
aesthetics  "  von  unten." 

The  answer  is  not  that  no  system  of  philosophy  is 
universally  accepted,  but  that  the  general  aesthetic 
theories  have  not,  as  yet  at  least,  succeeded  in  an 
swering  the  plain  questions  of  "  the  plain  man  "  in 
regard  to  concrete  beauty.  Kant,  indeed,  frankly 
denied  that  the  explanation  of  concrete  beauty,  or 
"  Doctrine  of  Taste,"  as  he  called  it,  was  possible, 
while  the  various  definers  of  beauty  as  "  the  union 
of  the  Real  and  the  Ideal,"  "  the  expression  of  the 
Ideal  to  Sense,"  have  done  no  more  than  he.  No 
one  of  these  aesthetic  systems,  in  spite  of  volumes 
of  so-called  application  of  their  principles  to  works 
of  art,  has  been  able  to  furnish  a  criterion  of  beauty. 
The  criticism  of  the  generations  is  summed  up  in 
the  mild  remark  of  Fechner,  in  his  "  Vorschule 
der  Aesthetik,"  to  the  effect  that  the  philosophical 
path  leaves  one  in  conceptions  that,  by  reason  of 
their  generality,  do  not  well  fit  the  particular  cases. 
And  so  it  was  that  empirical  aesthetics  arose,  which 
does  seek  to  answer  those  plain  questions  as  to  the 
enjoyment  of  concrete  beauty  down  to  its  simplest 
forms,  to  which  philosophical  aesthetics  had  been 
inadequate. 

But  it  is  clear  that  neither  has  empirical  aesthet 
ics  said  the  last  word  concerning  beauty.  Criticism 
is  still  in  a  chaotic  state  that  would  be  impos 
sible  if  aesthetic  theory  were  firmly  grounded. 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  31 

This  situation  appears  to  me  to  be  due  to  the  in 
herent  inadequacy  and  inconclusiveness  of  empiri 
cal  aesthetics  when  it  stands  alone;  the  grounds 
of  this  inadequacy  I  shall  seek  to  establish  in  the 
following. 

Granting  that  the  aim  of  every  a3sthetics  is  to  de 
termine  the  Nature  of  Beauty,  and  to  explain  our 
feelings  about  it,  we  may  say  that  the  empirical 
treatments  propose  to  do  this  either  by  describing 
the  aesthetic  object  and  extracting  the  essential  ele 
ments  of  Beauty,  or  by  describing  the  aesthetic  ex 
perience  and  extracting  the  essential  elements  of 
aesthetic  feeling,  thereby  indicating  the  elements  of 
Beauty  as  those  which  effect  this  feeling. 

Now  the  bare  description  and  analysis  of  beauti 
ful  objects  cannot,  logically,  yield  any  result;  for 
the  selection  of  cases  would  have  to  be  arbitrary, 
and  would  be  at  the  mercy  of  any  objection.  To 
any  one  who  should  say,  But  this  is  not  beautiful, 
and  should  not  be  included  in  your  inventory,  an 
swer  could  be  made  only  by  showing  that  it  had 
such  and  such  qualities,  the  very,  by  hypothesis, 
unknown  qualities  that  were  to  be  sought.  More 
over,  the  field  of  beauty  contains  so  many  and  so 
heterogeneous  objects,  that  the  retreat  to  their  only 
common  ground,  aesthetic  feeling,  appears  inevit 
able.  A  statue  and  a  symphony  can  be  reduced  to 
a  common  denominator  most  easily  if  the  states 
of  mind  which  they  induce  are  compared.  Thus 
the  analysis  of  objects  passes  naturally  over  to 


32        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

the  analysis  of  mental  states  —  the  point  of  view 
of  psychology. 

There  is,  however,  a  method  subsidiary  to  the 
preceding,  which  seeks  the  elements  of  Beauty  in 
a  study  of  the  genesis  and  the  development  of  art 
forms.  But  this  leaves  the  essential  phenomenon 
absolutely  untouched.  The  general  types  of  aes- 
thetic  expression  may  indeed  have  been  shaped  by 
social  forces,  —  religious,  commercial,  domestic,  — 
but  as  social  products,  not  as  aasthetic  phenomena. 
Such  studies  reveal  to  us,  as  it  were,  the  excuse 
for  the  fact  of  music,  poetry,  painting  —  but  they 
tell  us  nothing  of  the  reason  why  beautiful  rather 
than  ugly  forms  were  chosen,  as  who  should  show 
that  the  bird  sings  to  attract  its  mate,  ignoring  the 
relation  and  sequence  of  the  notes.  The  decorative 
art  of  most  savage  tribes,  for  instance,  is  nearly 
all  of  totemic  origin,  and  the  decayed  and  degraded 
forms  of  snake,  bird,  bear,  fish,  may  be  traced  in  the 
most  apparently  empty  geometric  patterns  ;  —  but 
what  does  this  discovery  tell  us  of  the  essentially 
decorative  quality  of  such  patterns  or  of  the  nature 
of  beauty  in  form  ?  The  study  of  the  Gothic  cathe 
dral  reveals  the  source  of  its  general  plan  and  of 
its  whole  scheme  of  ornament  in  detailed  religious 
symbolism.  Yet  a  complete  knowledge  of  the  char 
acter  of  the  religious  feeling  which  impelled  to  this 
monumental  expression,  and  of  the  genesis  of  every 
element  of  structure,  fails  to  account  for  the  essen 
tial  beauty  of  rhythm  and  proportion  in  the  finished 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  33 

work.  These  researches,  in  short,  explain  the  reason 
for  the  existence,  but  not  for  the  quality,  of  works 
of  art. 

Thus  it  is  in  psychology  that  empirical  aesthetics 
finds  its  last  resort.  And  indeed,  our  plain  man 
might  say,  the  aesthetic  experience  itself  is  inescap 
able  and  undeniable.  You  know  that  the  sight  or 
the  hearing  of  this  thing  gives  you  a  thrill  of  plea 
sure.  You  may  not  be  able  to  defend  the  beauty 
of  the  object,  but  the  fact  of  the  experience  you 
have.  The  psychologist,  seeking  to  analyze  the 
vivid  and  unmistakable  aesthetic  experience,  would 
therefore  proceed  somewhat  as  follows.  He  would 
select  the  salient  characteristics  of  his  mental  state 
in  presence  of  a  given  work  of  art.  He  would  then 
study,  by  experiment  and  introspection,  how  the 
particular  sense-stimulations  of  the  work  of  art  in 
question  could  become  the  psychological  conditions 
of  these  salient  characteristics.  Thus,  supposing 
the  aesthetic  experience  to  have  been  described  as 
"  the  conscious  happiness  in  which  one  is  absorbed, 
and,  as  it  were,  immersed  in  the  sense-object,"  a  the 
further  special  aim,  in  connection  with  a  picture, 
for  instance,  would  be  to  show  how  the  sensations 
and  associated  ideas  from  color,  line,  composi 
tion,  and  all  the  other  elements  of  a  picture  may, 
on  general  psychological  principles,  bring  about 
this  state  of  happy  absorption.  Such  elements 
as  can  be  shown  to  have  a  direct  relation  to  the 

1  M.  W.  Calkins :  An  Introduction  to  Psychology,  1902,  p.  278. 


34        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

aesthetic  experience  are  then  counted  as  elements 
of  the  beauty  of  the  aesthetic  object,  and  such  as 
are  invariable  in  all  art  forms  would  belong  to  the 
general  formula  or  concept  of  Beauty. 

This,  it  seems  to  me,  is  as  favorable  a  way  as 
possible  of  stating  the  possibilities  of  an  independ 
ent  aesthetic  psychology. 

Yet  this  method,  as  it  works  out,  does  not  exhaust 
the  problem  the  solution  of  which  was  affirmed  to 
be  the  aim  of  every  aesthetics.  The  aesthetic  expe 
rience  is  very  complex,  and  the  theoretical  conse 
quences  of  emphasizing  this  or  that  element  very 
great.  Thus,  if  it  were  held  that  the  characteristics 
of  the  aesthetic  experience  could  be  given  by  the 
complete  analysis  of  a  single  well-marked  case,  — 
say,  our  impressions  before  a  Doric  column,  or  the 
Cathedral  of  Chartres,  or  the  Giorgione  Venus,  —  it 
could  be  objected  that  for  such  a  psychological  ex 
perience  the  essential  elements  are  hard  to  isolate. 
The  cathedral  is  stone  rather  than  staff ;  it  is  three 
hundred  rather  than  fifty  feet  high.  Our  reaction 
upon  these  facts  may  or  may  not  be  essentials  to 
the  aesthetic  moment,  and  we  can  know  whether 
they  are  essentials  only  by  comparison  and  exclu 
sion.  It  might  be  said,  therefore,  that  the  analysis 
of  a  single,  though  typical,  aesthetic  experience  is 
insufficient ;  a  wide  induction  is  necessary.  Based 
on  the  experience  of  many  people,  in  face  of  the 
same  object?  But  to  many  there  would  be  no  aes 
thetic  experience.  On  that  of  one  person,  over  an 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  35 

extensive  field  of  objects?  How,  then,  determine 
the  limits  of  this  field?  Half  of  the  dispute  of 
modern  aesthetics  is  over  the  right  to  include  in  the 
material  for  this  induction  various  kinds  of  enjoy 
ment  which  are  vivid,  not  directly  utilitarian,  but 
traditionally  excluded  from  the  field.  Guyau,  for 
instance,  in  a  charming  passage  of  his  "  Problemes 
de  1'Esthetique  Contemporaine,"  argues  for  the 
aesthetic  quality  of  the  moment  when,  exhausted  by 
a  long  mountain  tramp,  he  quaffed,  among  the  slopes 
of  the  Pyrenees,  a  bowl  of  foaming  milk.  The  same 
dispute  appears,  in  more  complicated  form,  in  the 
conflicting  dicta  of  the  critics. 

If  we  do  not  know  what  part  of  our  feeling  is 
aesthetic  feeling,  how  can  we  go  farther?  If  the 
introspecting  subject  cannot  say,  This  is  aesthetic 
feeling,  it  is  logically  impossible  to  make  his  state 
of  mind  the  basis  for  further  advance.  It  is  clear 
that  the  great  question  is  of  what  one  has  a  right 
to  include  in  the  aesthetic  experience.  But  that  one 
should  have  such  a  "  right "  implies  that  there  is 
an  imperative  element  in  the  situation,  an  absolute 
standard  somewhere. 

It  seems  to  me  that  the  secret  of  the  difficulty 
lies  in  the  nature  of  the  situation,  with  which  an 
empirical  treatment  must  necessarily  fail  to  deal. 
What  we  have  called  "  the  aesthetic  experience  "  is 
really  a  positive  toning  of  the  general  aesthetic  atti 
tude.  This  positive  toning  corresponds  to  aesthetic 
excellence  in  the  object.  But  wherever  the  concept 


36        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

of  excellence  enters,  there  is  always  the  implication 
of  a  standard,  value,  judgment.  But  where  there  is 
a  standard  there  is  always  an  implicit  a  priori,  —  a 
philosophical  foundation. 

If,  then,  a  philosophical  method  is  the  last  resort 
and  the  first  condition  of  a  true  esthetics,  what  is 
the  secret  of  its  failure?  For  that  it  has  failed 
seems  to  be  still  the  consensus  of  opinion.  Simply, 
I  believe  and  maintain,  the  unreasonable  and  illogi 
cal  demand  which,  for  instance,  Fechner  makes  in 
the  words  I  have  quoted,  for  just  this  immediate 
application  of  a  philosophical  definition  to  concrete 
cases.  Who  but  an  Hegelian  philosopher,  cries  Pro 
fessor  James,  ever  pretended  that  reason  in  action 
was  per  se  a  sufficient  explanation  of  the  political 
changes  in  Europe?  Who  but  an  Hegelian  phi 
losopher,  he  might  add,  ever  pretended  that  "  the 
expression  of  the  Idea  to  Sense  "  was  a  sufficient 
explanation  of  the  Sistine  Madonna  ?  But  I  think 
the  Hegelian  —  or  other  —  philosopher  might  an 
swer  that  he  had  no  need  so  to  pretend.  Such  a 
philosophical  definition,  as  I  hope  to  show,  cannot 
possibly  apply  to  particular  cases,  and  should  not 
be  expected  to  do  so. 

Beauty  is  an  excellence,  a  standard,  a  value. 
But  value  is  in  its  nature  teleological ;  is  of  the 
nature  of  purpose.  Anything  has  value  because  it 
fulfills  an  end,  because  it  is  good  for  something  in 
the  world.  A  thing  is  not  beautiful  because  it  has 
value,  —  other  things  have  that,  —  it  has  value  be- 


THE  NATURE   OF   BEAUTY  37 

cause  it  is  beautiful,  because  it  fulfills  the  end  of 
Beauty.  Thus  the  metaphysical  definition  of  Beauty 
must  set  forth  what  this  end  of  Beauty  is,  —  what 
it  serves  in  the  universe. 

But  to  determine  what  anything  does,  or  fulfills, 
or  exemplifies,  is  not  the  same  as  to  determine 
what  it  is  in  itself.  The  most  that  can  be  said  is 
that  the  end,  or  function,  shapes  the  means  or  con 
stitution.  The  end  is  a  logical  imperative.  Beauty 
does,  and  must  do,  such  things.  To  ask  how,  is  at 
once  to  indicate  an  ultimate  departure  from  the 
philosophical  point  of  view ;  for  the  means  to  an 
end  are  different,  and  to  be  empirically  determined. 

Now  the  constitution  of  Beauty  can  be  only  the 
means  to  the  end  of  Beauty,  —  that  combination 
of  qualities  in  the  object  which  will  bring  about 
the  end  fixed  by  philosophical  definition.  The  end 
is  general ;  the  means  may  be  of  different  kinds. 
Evidently,  then,  the  philosophical  definition  cannot 
be  applied  directly  to  the  object  until  the  possi 
bilities,  conditions,  and  limitations  of  that  object's 
fitness  for  the  purpose  assigned  are  known.  We 
cannot  ask,  Does  the  Sistine  Madonna  express  the 
Idea  to  Sense  ?  until  we  know  all  possibilities  and 
conditions  of  the  visual  for  attaining  that  expres 
sion.  But,  indeed,  the  consideration  of  causes  and 
effects  suggests  at  once  that  natural  science  must 
guide  further  investigation.  Philosophy  must  lay 
down  what  Beauty  has  to  do ;  but  since  it  is  in  our 
experience  of  Beauty  that  its  end  is  accomplished, 


38        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

since  the  analysis  of  such  experience  and  the  study 
of  its  contributing  elements  is  a  work  of  the  natu 
ral  science  of  such  experience  —  it  would  follow 
that  psychology  must  deal  with  the  various  means 
through  which  this  end  is  to  be  reached. 

Thus  we  see  that  Fechner's  reproach  is  unjus 
tified.  Those  concepts  which  are  too  general  to 
apply  to  particular  cases  are  not  meant  to  do  so. 
If  a  general  concept  expresses,  as  it  should,  the 
place  of  Beauty  in  the  hierarchy  of  metaphysical 
values,  it  is  for  the  psychologist  of  aesthetics  to 
develop  the  means  by  which  that  end  can  be  reached 
in  the  various  realms  in  which  works  of  art  are 
found. 

Nor  can  we  agree  with  Santayana's  dictum 1  that 
philosophical  aesthetics  confuses  the  import  of  an 
experience  with  the  explanation  of  its  cause.  It 
need  not.  The  aesthetic  experience  is  indeed  caused 
by  the  beautiful  object,  but  the  beautiful  object 
itself  is  caused  by  the  possibility  of  the  aesthetic 
experience,  —  beauty  as  an  end  under  the  con 
ditions  of  human  perception.  Thus  the  Nature  of 
Beauty  is  related  to  its  import,  or  meaning,  or  end, 
as  means  to  that  end;  and  therefore  the  import  of 
an  experience  may  well  point  out  to  us  the  con 
stitution  of  the  cause  of  that  experience.  A  work 
of  art,  a  piece  of  nature,  is  judged  by  its  degree 
of  attainment  to  that  end ;  the  explanation  of  its 
beauty  —  of  its  degree  of  attainment,  that  is  —  is 
1  The  Sense  of  Beauty,  1898.  Intro. 


THE  NATURE  OF   BEAUTY  39 

found  in  the  effect  of  its  elements,  according  to 
psychological  laws,  on  the  aesthetic  subject. 

Such  a  psychological  study  of  the  means  by 
which  the  end  of  Beauty  is  attained  is  the  only 
method  by  which  we  can  come  to  an  explanation 
of  the  wealth  of  concrete  beauty.  The  concept  of 
explanation,  indeed,  is  valid  only  within  the  realm 
of  causes  and  effects.  The  aim  of  aesthetics  being 
conceded,  as  above,  to  be  the  determination  of  the 
Nature  of  Beauty  and  the  explanation  of  our  feel 
ings  about  it,  it  is  evident  at  this  point  that  the 
Nature  of  Beauty  must  be  determined  by  philoso 
phy  ;  but  the  general  definition  having  been  fixed, 
the  meaning  of  the  work  of  art  having  been  made 
clear,  the  only  possible  explanation  of  our  feelings 
about  it  —  the  aesthetic  experience,  in  other  words 
—  must  be  gained  from  psychology.  This  method 
is  not  open  to  the  logical  objections  against  the 
preceding.  No  longer  need  we  ask  what  has  a  right 
to  be  included  in  the  aasthetic  experience.  That 
has  been  fix^d  by  the  definition  of  Beauty.  But 
how  the  beautiful  object  brings  about  the  aesthetic 
experience,  the  boundaries  of  which  are  already 
known,  is  clearly  matter  for  psychology. 

The  first  step  must  then  be  to  win  the  philoso 
phical  definition  of  Beauty.  It  was  Kant,  says 
Hegel,  who  spoke  the  first  rational  word  concern 
ing  Beauty.  The  study  of  his  successors  will  reveal, 
I  believe,  that  the  aesthetic  of  the  great  system  of 
idealism  forms,  on  the  whole,  one  identical  doctrine. 


40        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

It  is  worth  while  to  dwell  somewhat  on  this  point, 
because  the  traditional  view  of  the  relation  of  the 
aesthetic  of  Kant,  Schiller,  Schelling,  and  Hegel 
is  otherwise.  Kant's  starting-point  was  the  discov 
ery  of  the  normative,  "  over-individual "  nature 
of  Beauty,  which  we  have  just  found  to  be  the 
secret  of  the  contradictions  of  empirical  sesthetics. 
Yet  he  came  to  it  at  the  bidding  of  quite  other 
motives. 

Kant's  sesthetics  was  meant  to  serve  as  the  key 
stone  of  the  arch  between  sense  and  reason.  The 
discovery  of  all  that  is  implicit  in  the  experience 
of  the  senses  had  led  him  to  deny  the  possibility  of 
knowledge  beyond  the  matter  of  this  experience. 
Yet  the  reason  has  an  inevitable  tendency  to  press 
beyond  this  limit,  to  seek  all-embracing,  absolute 
unities,  —  to  conceive  an  unconditioned  totality. 
Thus  the  reason  presents  us  with  the  ideas  —  be 
yond  all  possibility  of  knowledge  —  of  the  Soul, 
the  World,  and  God.  In  the  words  of  Kant,  the 
Ideas  of  Keason  lead  the  understanding  to  the  con 
sideration  of  Nature  according  to  a  principle  of 
completeness,  although  it  can  never  attain  to  this. 
Can  there  be  a  bridge  across  this  abyss  between 
sense  and  reason  ?  then  asks  Kant ;  which  bridge 
he  believes  himself  to  have  found  in  the  aesthetic 
faculty.  For  on  inquiring  what  is  involved  in  the 
judgment,  "  This  is  beautiful,"  he  discovers  that 
such  a  judgment  is  "  universal  "  and  "  necessary," 
inasmuch  as  it  implies  that  every  normal  spectator 


THE  NATURE   OF   BEAUTY  41 

must  acknowledge  its  validity,  that  it  is  "  disin 
terested  "  because  it  rests  on  the  "  appearance  of 
the  object  without  demanding  its  actual  existence," 
and  that  it  is  "  immediate  "  or  "  free,"  as  it  ac 
knowledges  the  object  as  beautiful  without  definite 
purpose,  as  of  adaptation  to  use.  But  how  does 
this  judgment  constitute  the  desired  bond  between 
sense  and  reason  ?  Simply  in  that,  though  applied 
to  an  object  of  the  senses,  it  has  yet  all  the  marks 
of  the  Idea  of  Reason,  —  it  is  universal,  necessary, 
free,  unconditioned  ;  it  has  "  the  principle  of  com" 
pleteness."  And  as  for  the  object  itself,  it  is  judged 
as  if  it  were  perfect,  and  so  fulfills  those  demands 
of  reason  which  elsewhere  in  the  world  of  sense 
are  unsatisfied. 

The  two  important  factors,  then,  of  Kant's  aes 
thetics  are  its  reconciliation  of  sense  and  reason  in 
beauty,  and  its  reference  of  the  "  purposiveness  " 
of  beauty  to  the  cognitive  faculty. 

Schiller  has  been  given  the  credit  of  transcend 
ing  Kant's  "  subjective  "  aesthetic  through  his  em 
phasis  on  the  significance  of  the  beautiful  object. 
It  is  not  bound  by  a  conception  to  which  it  must 
attain,  so  that  it  is  perceived  as  if  it  were  free. 
Nor  do  we  desire  the  reality  of  it  to  use  for  our 
selves  or  for  others  ;  so  that  we  are  free  in  relation 
to  it.  It,  the  object,  is  thus  "  the  vindication  of 
freedom  in  the  world  of  phenomena,"  that  world 
which  is  otherwise  a  binding  necessity.  But  it  would 
seem  that  this  had  been  already  taught  by  Kant 


42        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

himself,  and  that  Schiller  has  but  enlivened  the 
subject  by  his  two  illuminating  phrases,  "  aesthetic 
semblance"  and  the  "play-impulse,"  to  denote 
the  real  object  of  the  aesthetic  desire  and  the  true 
nature  of  that  desire ;  form  instead  of  material 
existence,  and  a  free  attitude  instead  of  serious 
purpose.  Still,  his  insistence  on  Beauty  as  the  re 
alization  of  freedom  may  be  said  to  have  paved 
the  way  for  Schelling's  theory,  in  which  the  aesthe 
tic  reaches  its  maximum  of  importance. 

The  central  thought  of  the  Absolute  Idealism  of 
Schelling  is  the  underlying  identity  of  Nature  and 
the  Self.  In  Nature,  from  matter  up  to  the  organ 
ism,  the  objective  factor  predominates,  or,  in  Schel 
ling's  phrase,  the  conscious  self  is  determined  by 
the  unconscious.  In  morality,  science,  the  subjec 
tive  factor  predominates,  or  the  unconscious  is  de 
termined  by  the  conscious.  But  the  work  of  art  is 
a  natural  appearance  and  so  unconscious,  and  is 
yet  the  product  of  a  conscious  activity.  It  gives, 
then,  the  equilibrium  of  the  real  and  ideal  factors, 

—  just  that  repose  of  reconciliation  or  "  indiffer 
ence  "  which  alone  can  show  the  Absolute.  But  — 
and  this  is  of  immense  importance  for  our  theory 

—  in  order  to  explain  the  identity  of  subject  and 
object,  the  Ego  must  have  an  intuition,  through 
which,  in  one  and  the  same  appearance,  it  is  in  it 
self  at  once  conscious  and  unconscious,  and  this 
condition  is  given  in  the  aesthetic  experience.    The 
beautiful  is  thus  the  solution  of  the  riddle  of  the 


THE  NATURE   OF  BEAUTY  43 

universe,  for  it  is  the  possibility  of  the  explicit  con 
sciousness  of  the  unity  of  Nature  and  the  Self — or 
the  Absolute. 

So  Beauty  is  again  the  pivot  on  which  a  system 
turns.  Its  place  is  not  essentially  different  from 
that  which  it  held  in  the  systems  of  Kant  and 
Schiller.  As  the  objective  possibility  for  the  bridge 
between  sense  and  reason,  as  the  vindication  of 
freedom  in  the  phenomenal  world,  and  as  the  vin 
dication  of  the  possible  unity  of  the  real  and  the 
ideal,  or  nature  and  self,  the  world-elements,  its 
philosophical  significance  is  nearly  the  same. 

With  Hegel  Beauty  loses  little  of  its  command 
ing  position.  The  universe  is  in  its  nature  rational ; 
Thought  and  Being  are  one.  The  world-process  is 
a  logical  process  ;  and  nature  and  history,  in  which 
spirit  of  the  world  realizes  itself,  are  but  applied 
logic.  The  completely  fulfilled  or  expressed  Truth 
is  then  the  concrete  world-system  ;  at  the  same  time 
the  life  or  self  of  the  universe ;  the  Absolute.  This 
Hegel  calls  the  Idea,  and  he  defines  Beauty  as  the 
expression  of  the  Idea  to  sense. 

This  definition  would  seem  to  be  as  to  the  letter 
in  accord  with  the  general  tendency  we  have  already 
outlined.  It  might  be  said  that  it  is  but  another 
phrasing  of  Schelling's  thought  of  the  Absolute  as 
presented  to  the  Ego  in  Beauty.  But  not  so.  For 
Schelling,  the  aesthetic  is  a  schema  or  form,  —  that 
is,  the  form  of  balance,  equilibrium,  reconciliation 
of  the  rational  ideal,  —  not  a  content.  But  Hegel's 


44        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Beauty  expresses  the  Idea  by  the  way  of  informa 
tion  or  association.  That  this  is  true  any  one  of 
his  traditional  examples  makes  evident.  Correggio's 
Madonna  of  the  St.  Sebastian  is  found  by  him 
inferior  to  the  Sistine  Madonna.  Why  ?  "  In  the 
first  picture  we  have  the  dearest  and  loveliest  of 
human  relations  consecrated  by  contrast  with  what 
is  Divine.  In  the  second  picture  we  have  the  Divine 
relation  itself,  showing  itself  under  the  limitations 
of  the  human."  l  Dutch  painting,  he  tells  us,  ought 
not  to  be  despised  ;  "  for  it  is  this  fresh  and  wake 
ful  freedom  and  vitality  of  mind  in  apprehension 
and  presentation  that  forms  the  highest  aspect  of 
these  pictures."  And  a  commentator  adds,  "  The 
spontaneous  joy  of  the  perfect  life  is  figured  to  this 
lower  sphere."  His  whole  treatment  of  Art  as  a 
symbol  confirms  this  view,  as  do  all  his  criticisms. 
Art  or  Beauty  shall  reveal  to  our  understanding 
the  eternal  Ideal. 

On  comparing  this  with  what  we  have  won  from 
Kant,  Schiller,  and  Schelling,  the  divergence  be 
comes  apparent.  I  have  tried  to  show  that  there  is 
no  essential  difference  between  these  three  either  in 
their  general  view  of  the  aesthetic  experience,  or  in 
the  degree  of  objectivity  of  their  doctrine  of  Beauty. 
They  do  not  contradict  one  another.  They  merely 
emphasize  now  the  unity,  now  the  reconciliation  of 
opposites,  in  the  aesthetic  experience.  The  experi 
ence  of  the  beautiful  constitutes  a  reconciliation  of 
k*  Kedney's  Hegel's  Esthetics,  1892,  p.  158. 


THE   NATURE   OF   BEAUTY  45 

the  warring  elements  of  experience,  in  a  world  in 
which  the  demands  of  Reason  seem  to  conflict  with 
the  logic  of  events,  and  the  beautiful  object  is  such 
that  it  constitutes  the  permanent  possibility  for  this 
reconciliation. 

But  the  attempt  to  include  Hegel  within  this 
circle  reveals  at  once  the  need  of  further  delimita 
tion.  The  beautiful  is  to  reveal,  and  to  vindicate  in 
revealing,  the  union  of  the  world-elements,  that  is, 
the  spirit  of  the  world.  On  Hegel's  own  principles, 
the  Idea  should  be  "  expressed  to  sense."  Now  if 
this  expression  is  not,  after  all,  directly  to  sense, 
but  the  sense  gives  merely  the  occasion  for  passing 
over  to  the  thought  of  the  Divine,  it  would  seem 
that  the  Beauty  is  not  after  all  in  the  work  of  art, 
but  out  of  it.  The  Infinite,  or  the  Idea,  or  the 
fusion  of  real  and  ideal,  must  be  shown  to  sense. 

Is  there  any  way  in  which  this  is  conceivable  ? 
We  cannot  completely  express  to  sense  Niagara 
Falls  or  the  Jungf rau,  for  they  are  infinitely  be 
yond  the  possibilities  of  imitation.  Yet  the  par 
ticular  contour  of  the  Jungfrau  is  never  mistaken 
in  the  smallest  picture.  In  making  a  model  of 
Niagara  we  should  have  to  reproduce  the  rela 
tion  between  body  of  water,  width  of  stream,  and 
height  of  fall,  and  we  might  succeed  in  getting  the 
peculiar  effect  of  voluminousness  which  marks  that 
wonder  of  Nature.  The  soaring  of  a  lark  is  not 
like  the  pointing  upward  of  a  slender  Gothic 
spire,  yet  there  is  a  likeness  in  the  attitudes  with 


46        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

which  we  follow  them.  All  these  cases  have  certain 
form-qualities  in  common,  by  virtue  of  which  they 
resemble  each  other.  Now  it  is  these  very  form- 
qualities  which  Kant  is  using  when  he  takes  the 
aesthetic  judgment  as  representative  of  reason  in 
the  world  of  sense  because  it  shows  the  qualities 
of  the  ideas  of  reason,  —  that  is,  unconditional  to 
tality  or  freedom.  And  we  might,  indeed,  hope  to 
"  express  the  Idea  to  sense  "  if  we  could  find  for 
it  a  form -quality,  or  subjectively,  in  the  phrase  of 
Kant,  a  form  of  reflection. 

What  is  the  form  of  reflection  for  the  Absolute, 
the  Idea  ?  It  would  appear  to  be  a  combination  of 
Unity  and  Totality  —  self -completeness.  An  object, 
then,  which  should  be  self -complete  from  all  possible 
points  of  view,  to  which  could  be  applied  the  "  form 
of  reflection  "  for  the  Absolute,  would,  therefore, 
alone  truly  express  it,  and  so  alone  fulfill  the  end  of 
Beauty.  The  Idea  woidd  be  there  in  its  form  ;  it 
would  be  shown  to  sense,  and  so  first  fully  expressed. 

With  this  important  modification  of  Hegel's  defi 
nition  of  Beauty,  which  brings  it  into  line  with  the 
point  of  view  already  won,  I  believe  the  way  is 
at  last  opened  from  the  traditional  philosophy  of 
aesthetics  to  a  healthy  and  concrete  psychological 
theory. 

But  must  every  self -complete  object  give  rise  to 
the  aesthetic  experience  ?  An  object  is  absolutely 
self -complete  only  for  the  perceiving  subject ;  it  is 
so,  in  other  words,  only  when  it  produces  a  self -com- 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  47 

plete  experience  for  that  subject.  If  reconciliation 
of  the  warring  elements  of  the  universe  is  the  end 
of  Beauty  it  must  take  place  not  for,  but  in,  the 
human  personality  ;  it  must  not  be  understood,  but 
immediately,  completely  experienced  ;  it  should  be 
such  that  the  Unity  of  the  World  should  be  re 
alized  in  the  subject  of  the  aesthetic  experience, 
the  lover  of  beauty.  The  beautiful  object  would 
be  not  that  which  should  show  in  outline  form, 
or  remind  of,  this  Unity  of  the  World,  but  which 
should  create  for  the  subject  the  moment  of  self- 
completeness ;  which  should  inform  the  aesthetic 
subject  with  that  unity  and  self-completeness  which 
are  the  "  forms  of  reflection "  of  the  Infinite. 
The  subject  should  be  not  a  mirror  of  perfection, 
but  a  state  of  perfection.  Only  in  this  sense  does 
the  concept  of  reconciliation  come  to  its  full  mean 
ing.  Not  because  I  see  freedom,  but  because  I  am 
free  ;  not  because  I  think  of  God,  or  the  Infinite,  or 
the  one,  but  because  I  am  for  the  moment  complete, 
at  the  highest  point  of  energy  and  unity,  does  the 
aesthetic  experience  constitute  such  a  reconciliation. 
Not  because  I  behold  the  Infinite,  but  because 
I  have,  myself,  a  moment  of  perfection.  Herein 
it  is  that  our  theory  constitutes  a  complete  con 
tradiction  to  all  "  expression  "  or  "  significance  " 
theories  of  the  Beautiful,  and  does  away  with  the 
necessity  those  theories  are  under  of  reading  ser 
mons  into  stones.  The  yellow  primrose  needs  not 
to  remind  us  of  the  harmony  of  the  universe,  or 


48        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

to  have  any  ulterior  significance  whatever,  if  it 
gives  by  its  own  direct  simple  stimulation  a  mo 
ment  of  Unity  and  Self -completeness.  That  imme 
diate  experience  indeed  contains  in  itself  the  "  form 
of  reflection"  of  the  Absolute,  and  it  is  through 
this  that  we  so  often  pass,  in  the  enjoyment  of 
Beauty,  to  the  thought  of  the  divine.  But  that 
thought  is  a  corollary,  a  secondary  effect,  not  an 
essential  part  of  the  aesthetic  moment.  There  is 
a  wonderful  bit  of  unconscious  aesthetics  in  the 
following  passage  from  Senancour,  touching  the 
"  secret  of  relation  "  we  have  just  analyzed. 

"  It  was  dark  and  rather  cold.  I  was  gloomy,  and 
walked  because  I  had  nothing  to  do.  I  passed  by 
some  flowers  placed  breast-high  upon  a  wall.  A 
jonquil  in  bloom  was  there.  It  is  the  strongest  ex 
pression  of  desire :  it  was  the  first  perfume  of  the 
year.  I  felt  all  the  happiness  destined  for  man. 
This  unutterable  harmony  of  souls,  the  phantom  of 
the  ideal  world,  arose  in  me  complete.  I  never  felt 
anything  so  great  or  so  instantaneous.  I  know  not 
what  shape,  what  analogy,  what  secret  of  relation 
it  was  that  made  me  see  in  this  flower  a  limitless 
beauty.  ...  I  shall  never  inclose  in  a  conception 
this  power,  this  immensity  that  nothing  will  ex 
press  ;  this  form  that  nothing  will  contain ;  this 
ideal  of  a  better  world  which  one  feels,  but  which 
it  would  seem  that  nature  has  not  made."  1 

1  Translation  by  Carleton  Noyes :  The  Enjoyment  of  Art,  1903, 
p.  65. 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  49 

Our  philosophical  definition  of  Beauty  has  thus 
taken  final  shape.  The  beautiful  object  possesses 
those  qualities  which  bring  the  personality  into  a 
state  of  unity  and  self-completeness.  Lightly  to 
cast  aside  such  a  definition  as  abstract,  vague, 
empty,  is  no  less  short  sighted  than  to  treat  the 
idea  of  the  Absolute  Will,  of  the  Transcendental 
Reason,  of  the  Eternal  Love,  as  mere  intellectual 
factors  in  the  esthetic  experience.  It  should  not 
be  criticised  as  giving  "  no  objective  account  of 
the  nature  and  origin  of  Beauty."  The  nature 
of  Beauty  is  indicated  in  the  definition  ;  the  origin 
of  Beauty  may  be  studied  in  its  historical  develop 
ment  ;  its  reason  for  being  is  simply  the  desire  of 
the  human  heart  for  the  perfect  moment. 

Beauty  is  to  bring  unity  and  self -completeness 
into  the  personality.  By  what  means  ?  What  causes 
can  bring  about  this  effect  ?  When  we  enter  the 
realm  of  causes  and  effects,  however,  we  have  al 
ready  left  the  ground  of  philosophy,  and  it  is  fit 
ting  that  the  concepts  which  we  have  to  use  should 
be  adapted  to  the  empirical  point  of  view.  The 
personality,  as  dealt  with  in  psychology,  is  but  the 
pyschophysical  organism ;  and  we  need  to  know 
only  how  to  translate  unity  and  self-completeness 
into  psychological  terms. 

The  psychophysical  organism  is  in  a  state  of  unity 
either  when  it  is  in  a  state  of  virtual  congealment 
or  emptiness,  as  in  a  trance  or  ecstasy ;  or  when  it 
is  in  a  state  of  repose,  without  tendency  to  change. 


50        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Secondly,  the  organism  is  self -complete  when  it  is 
at  the  highest  possible  point  of  tone,  of  functional 
efficiency,  of  enhanced  life.  Then  a  combination  of 
favorable  stimulation  and  repose  would  characterize 
the  esthetic  feeling. 

But  it  may  be  said  that  stimulation  and  repose 
are  contradictory  concepts,  and  we  must  indeed  ad 
mit  that  the  absolute  repose  of  the  hypnotic  trance 
is  not  aesthetic,  because  empty  of  stimulus.  The  only 
aesthetic  repose  is  that  in  which  stimulation  result 
ing  in  impulse  to  movement  or  action  is  checked 
or  compensated  for  by  its  antagonistic  impulse  ; 
inhibition  of  action,  or  action  returning  upon  itself, 
combined  with  heightening  of  tone.  But  this  is  ten 
sion,  equilibrium,  or  balance  of  forces,  which  is 
thus  seen  to  be  a  general  condition  of  all  aesthetic 
experience.  The  concept  is  familiar  in  pictorial 
composition  and  to  some  extent  also  in  music  and 
poetry,  but  here  first  appears  as  grounded  in  the 
very  demand  for  the  union  of  repose  with  activity. 

Moreover,  this  requirement,  which  we  have  de 
rived  from  the  logical  concepts  of  unity  and  totality, 
as  translated  into  psychological  terms,  receives  con 
firmation  from  the  nature  of  organic  life.  It  was 
the  perfect  moment  that  we  sought,  and  we  found 
it  in  the  immediate  experience  of  unity  and  self- 
completeness  ;  and  unity  for  a  living  being  can  only 
be  equilibrium.  Now  it  appears  that  an  authori 
tative  definition  of  the  general  nature  of  an  or 
ganism  makes  it  "  so  built,  whether  on  mechanical 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  51 

principles  or  not,  that  every  deviation  from  the  equi 
librium  point  sets  up  a  tendency  to  return  to  it."  1 
Equilibrium,  in  greater  or  less  excursions  from  the 
centre,  is  thus  the  ultimate  nature  of  organic  life. 
The  perfect  equilibrium,  that  is,  equilibrium  with 
heightened  tone,  will  then  give  the  perfect  moment. 

The  further  steps  of  aesthetics  are  then  toward 
analysis  of  the  psychological  effect  of  all  the  ele 
ments  which  enter  into  a  work  of  art,  with  refer 
ence  to  their  effect  in  producing  stimulation  or 
repose.  What  colors,  forms,  tones,  emotions,  ideas, 
favorably  stimulate  ?  What  combinations  of  these 
bring  to  repose  ?  All  the  modern  studies  in  so- 
called  physiological  aesthetics,  into  the  emotional 
and  other  —  especially  motor  —  effects  of  color, 
tone-sensation,  melodic  sequence,  simple  forms,  etc., 
find  here  their  proper  place. 

A  further  important  question,  as  to  the  fit 
ting  psychological  designation  of  the  aesthetic  state, 
is  now  suggested.  Some  authorities  speak  of  the 
aesthetic  attitude  or  activity,  describing  it  as  "  sym 
pathetic  imitation"  or  "absorption;"  others  of  the 
aesthetic  pleasure.  But,  according  to  our  definition 
of  the  aesthetic  experience  as  a  combination  of  favor 
able  stimulation  with  repose,  this  state,  as  involv 
ing  "  a  distinctive  feeling-tone  and  a  characteristic 
trend  of  activity  aroused  by  a  certain  situation,"  2 
can  be  no  other  than  an  emotion.  This  view  is 

1  L.  T.  Hobhouse,  Mind  in  Evolution. 

2  Baldwin's  Diet,  of  Phil,  and  PsychoL    Art  "  Emotion." 


52        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

confirmed  by  introspection ;  we  speak  of  aesthetic 
activity  and  aesthetic  pleasure,  but  we  are  conscious 
of  a  complete  arrest,  and  sometimes  of  a  very  dis 
tinct  divergence  from  pure  pleasure.  The  expe 
rience  is  unique,  it  seems  to  defy  description,  to  be 
intense,  vivid,  and  yet  —  like  itself  alone.  Any 
attempt  to  disengage  special,  already  known  emo 
tions,  even  at  the  play  or  in  hearing  music,  is  often 
in  vain,  in  just  those  moments  when  our  excitement 
is  most  intense.  But  the  hypothesis  of  a  unique 
emotion,  parallel  to  those  of  joy,  fear,  etc.,  and  with 
a  psychological  basis  as  outlined,  would  account  for 
these  facts.  The  positive  toning  of  the  experience 
. —  what  we  call  aesthetic  pleasure  —  is  due  not  only 
to  the  favorable  stimulation,  but  also  to  the  fact 
that  the  very  antagonism  of  impulses  which  consti 
tutes  repose  heightens  tone  while  it  inhibits  action. 
Thus  the  conditions  of  both  factors  of  aesthetic 
emotion  tend  to  induce  pleasure. 

It  is,  then,  clear  that  no  specific  aesthetic  pleasure 
need  be  sought.  The  very  phrase,  indeed,  is  a  mis 
nomer,  since  all  pleasure  is  qualitatively  the  same, 
and  differentiated  only  by  the  specific  activities 
which  it  accompanies.  It  is  also  to  be  noted  that 
those  writers  on  aesthetics  who  have  dwelt  most  on 
aesthetic  pleasure  have  come  in  conclusion  only  to 
specific  activities,  like  the  "  imitation  "  of  Groos,  for 
instance.  In  the  light  of  the  just-won  definition 
of  aesthetic  emotion,  it  is  interesting  to  examine 
some  of  the  well-known  modern  aesthetic  theories. 


THE  NATURE   OF  BEAUTY  53 

Lipps  defines  the  aesthetic  experience  as  a  "  thrill 
of  sympathetic  feeling,"  Groos  as  "sympathetic 
imitation,"  evidently  assuming  that  pleasure  accom 
panies  this.  But  there  are  many  feelings  of  sym 
pathy,  and  joyful  ones,  which  do  not  belong  to  the 
aesthetic  realm.  In  the  same  way,  not  all  "  imita 
tion  "  is  accompanied  by  pleasure,  and  not  all  of 
that  falls  within  the  generally  accepted  aesthetic 
field.  If  these  definitions  were  accepted  as  they 
stand,  all  our  rejoicings  with  friends,  all  our  inspi 
ration  from  a  healthy,  magnetic  presence  must  be 
included  in  it.  It  is  clear  that  further  limitation 
is  necessary ;  but  if  to  this  sympathetic  imitation, 
this  living  through  in  sympathy,  we  add  the  de 
mand  for  repose,  the  necessary  limitation  is  made. 
Physical  exercise  in  general,  or  the  instinctive 
imitation  of  energetic,  or  easy  (in  general  favor 
able)  movements,  is  pleasurable,  indeed,  but  the 
experience  is  not  aesthetic,  —  as  is  quite  clear,  in 
deed,  to  common  sense,  —  and  it  is  not  aesthetic 
because  it  is  the  contradiction  of  repose.  A  par 
ticular  case  of  the  transformation  of  pleasurable 
physical  exercise  into  an  aesthetic  activity  is  seen  in 
the  experience  of  symmetrical  or  balanced  form ; 
any  moderate,  smooth  exercise  of  the  eye  is  plea 
surable,  but  this  alone  induces  a  state  of  the  whole 
organism  combining  repose  with  stimulation. 

The  theories  of  Kiilpe  and  Santayana,  while 
they  definitely  mark  out  the  ground,  seem  to  me  in 
need  of  addition.  "Absorption  in  the  object  in 


54        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

respect  to  its  bare  quality  and  conformation  "  does 
not,  of  course,  give  the  needed  information,  for 
objective  beauty,  of  the  character  of  this  conforma 
tion  or  form.  But  yet,  it  might  be  said  that  the 
content  of  beauty  might  conceivably  be  deduced 
from  the  psychological  conditions  of  absorption. 
In  the  same  way,  Santayana's  "  Beauty  as  objec 
tified  pleasure,"  or  pleasure  as  the  quality  of  a 
thing,  is  neither  a  determination  of  objective  beauty 
nor  a  sufficient  description  of  the  psychological 
state.  Yet  analysis  of  those  qualities  in  the  thing 
that  cause  us  to  make  our  pleasure  a  quality  of  it 
would  supplement  the  definition  sufficiently  and 
completely  in  the  sense  of  ou1*  own  formula.  Why 
do  we  regard  pleasure  as  the  quality  of  a  thing  ? 
Because  there  is  something  in  the  thing  that 
makes  us  spread,  as  it  were,  our  pleasure  upon  it. 
This  is  that  which  fixates  us,  arrests  us,  upon  it, 
—  which  can  be  only  the  elements  that  make  for 
repose. 

Guyau,  however,  comes  nearest  to  our  point  of 
view.  "  The  beautiful  is  a  perception  or  an  action 
which  stimulates  life  within  us  under  its  three  forms 
simultaneously  (i.  e.,  sensibility,  intelligence,  and 
will)  and  produces  pleasure  by  the  swift  conscious 
ness  of  this  general  stimulation." 1  It  is  from 
this  general  stimulation  that  Guyau  explains  the 
a3sthetic  effect  of  his  famous  drink  of  milk  among 
mountain  scenes.  But  such  general  stimulation 

1  Problemes  de  VEstMtique  Contemporaine,  1902,  p.  77. 


THE  NATURE  OF  BEAUTY  55 

might  accompany  successful  action  of  any  kind, 
and  thus  the  moral  and  the  aesthetic  would  fall 
together.  That  M.  Guyau  is  so  successful  in  his 
analysis  is  due  rather  to  the  fact  that  just  this  dif 
fused  stimulation  is  likely  to  come  from  such  exer 
cise  as  is  characterized  by  the  mutual  checking  of 
antagonistic  impulses  producing  an  equilibrium. 
The  diffusion  of  stimulation  would  be  our  formula 
for  the  aesthetic  state  only  if  interpreted  as  stimu 
lation  arresting  action. 

The  diffusion  of  stimulation,  the  equilibrium  of 
impulses,  life-enhancement  through  repose !  —  this 
is  the  aesthetic  experience.  But  how,  then,  it  will 
be  asked,  are  we  to  interpret  the  temporal  arts? 
A  picture  or  a  statue  may  be  understood  through 
this  formula,  but  hardly  a  drama  or  a  symphony. 
If  the  form  of  the  one  is  symmetry,  hidden  or  not, 
would  not  the  form  of  the  other  be  represented  by 
a  straight  line  ?  That  which  has  beginning,  middle, 
and  end  is  not  static  but  dynamic. 

Let  us  consider  once  more  the  concept  of  equi 
librium.  Inhibition  of  action  through  antagonistic 
impulses,  or  action  returning  upon  itself,  we  have 
denned  it ;  and  the  line  cannot  be  drawn  sharply 
between  these  types.  The  visual  analogue  for  equi 
librium  may  be  either  symmetrical  figure  or  circle ; 
the  excursion  from  the  centre  may  be  either  the 
swing  of  the  pendulum  or  the  sweep  of  the  planet. 
The  return  is  the  essential.  Now  it  is  a  common 
place  of  criticism — though  the  significance  of  the 


56        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

dictum  has  never  been  sufficiently  seen  —  that  the 
great  drama,  novel,  or  symphony  does  return  upon 
itself.  The  excursion  is  merely  longer,  of  a  differ 
ent  order  of  impulses  from  that  of  the  picture.  The 
last  note  is  the  only  possible  answer  to  the  first ;  it 
contains  the  first.  The  last  scene  has  meaning  only 
as  the  satisfaction  of  the  first.  The  measure  of  the 
perfection  of  a  work  of  temporal  art  is  thus  its  im 
plicit  character.  The  end  is  contained  in  the  begin 
ning  —  that  is  the  meaning  of  "  inevitableness." 

That  the  constraining  power  of  drama  or  sym 
phony  is  just  this  sense  of  urgency,  of  compulsion, 
from  one  point  to  another,  is  but  confirmation  of 
this  view.  The  temporal  art  tries  ever  to  pass  from 
first  to  last,  which  is  first.  It  yearns  for  unity. 
The  dynamic  movement  of  the  temporal  arts  is 
cyclic,  which  is  ultimately  static,  of  the  nature  of 
equilibrium.  It  is  only  in  the  wideness  of  the  sweep 
that  the  dynamic  repose  of  poetry  and  music  differs 
from  the  static  activity  of  picture  and  statue. 

Thus  the  Nature  of  Beauty  is  in  the  relation  of 
means  to  an  end ;  the  means,  the  possibilities  of 
stimulation  in  the  motor,  visual,  auditory,  and 
purely  ideal  fields ;  the  end,  a  moment  of  perfection, 
of  self-complete  unity  of  experience,  of  favorable 
stimulation  with  repose.  Beauty  is  not  perfection ; 
but  the  beauty  of  an  object  lies  in  its  permanent 
possibility  of  creating  the  perfect  moment.  The 
experience  of  this  moment,  the  union  of  stimulation 
and  repose,  constitutes  the  unique  aesthetic  emotion. 


Ill 

THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE 


Ill 

THE  JESTHETIC  REPOSE 

popular  interest  in  scientific  truth  has 
always  had  its  hidden  spring  in  a  desire  for 
the  marvelous.  The  search  for  the  philosopher's 
stone  has  done  as  much  for  chemistry  as  the  legend 
of  the  elixir  of  life  for  exploration  and  geograph 
ical  discovery.  From  the  excitements  of  these  sug 
gestions  of  the  occult,  the  world  settled  down  into 
a  reasonable  understanding  of  the  facts  of  which 
they  were  but  the  enlarged  and  grotesque  shadows. 
So  it  has  been  with  physics  and  physiology,  and 
so  also,  preeminently,  with  the  science  of  mental 
life.  Mesmerism,  hypnotism,  the  facts  of  the 
alteration,  the  multiplicity,  and  the  annihilation  of 
personality  have  each  brought  us  their  moments  of 
pleasurable  terror,  and  passed  thus  into  the  field 
of  general  interest.  But  science  can  accept  no 
broken  chains.  For  all  the  thrill  of  mystery,  we 
may  not  forget  that  the  hypnotic  state  is  but 
highly  strung  attention,  —  at  the  last  turn  of  the 
screw,  —  and  that  the  alternation  of  personality  is 
after  all  no  more  than  the  highest  power  of  vari 
ability  of  mood.  In  regard  to  the  annihilation  of 
the  sense  of  personality,  it  may  be  said  that  no 


60        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

connection  with  daily  experience  is  at  first  appar 
ent.  Scientists,  as  well  as  the  world  at  large,  have 
been  inclined  to  look  on  the  loss  of  the  sense  of 
personality  as  pathological;  and  yet  it  may  be 
maintained  that  it  is  nevertheless  the  typical  form 
of  those  experiences  we  ourselves  regard  as  the 
most  valuable. 

The  loss  of  personality !  In  that  dread  thought 
there  lies,  to  most  of  us,  all  the  sting  of  death  and 
the  victory  of  the  grave.  It  seems,  with  such  a 
fate  in  store,  that  immortality  were  futile,  and  life 
itself  a  mockery.  Yet  the  idea,  when  dwelt  upon, 
assumes  an  aspect  of  strange  familiarity ;  it  is  an 
old  friend,  after  all.  Can  we  deny  that  all  our 
sweetest  hours  are  those  of  self-forgetf ulness  ?  The 
language  of  emotion,  religious,  aesthetic,  intellectu 
ally  creative,  testifies  clearly  to  the  fading  of  the 
consciousness  of  self  as  feeling  nears  the  white 
heat.  Not  only  in  the  speechless,  stark  immobility 
of  the  pathological  "  case,"  but  in  all  the  stages  of 
religious  ecstasy,  aesthetic  pleasure,  and  creative 
inspiration,  is  to  be  traced  what  we  know  as  the 
loss  of  the  feeling  of  self.  Bernard  of  Clairvaux 
dwells  on  "  that  ecstasy  of  deification  in  which  the 
individual  disappears  in  the  eternal  essence  as  the 
drop  of  water  in  a  cask  of  wine."  Says  Meister 
Eckhart,  "Thou  shalt  sink  away  from  thy  self 
hood,  thou  shalt  flow  into  His  self-possession,  the 
very  thought  of  Thine  shall  melt  into  His  Mine ; " 
and  St.  Teresa,  "  The  soul,  in  thus  searching  for 


THE  AESTHETIC   REPOSE  61 

its  God,  feels  with  a  very  lively  and  very  sweet 
pleasure  that  it  is  fainting  almost  quite  away." 

Still  more  striking  is  the  language  of  aesthetic 
emotion.  Philosopher  and  poet  have  but  one  ex 
pression  for  the  universal  experience.  Says  Keats 
in  the  "  Ode  to  a  Nightingale  : "  — 

"  My  heart  aches,  and  a  drowsy  numbness  pains 
My  sense  as  though  of  hemlock  I  had  drunk, 

Or  emptied  some  dull  opiate  to  the  drains 
One  minute  past,  and  Lethewards  had  sunk  : 

*T  is  not  through  envy  of  thy  happy  lot, 
But  being  too  happy  in  thy  happiness." 

And  in  Schopenhauer  we  read  that  he  who  con 
templates  the  beautiful  "  forgets  even  his  individu 
ality,  his  will,  and  only  continues  to  exist  as  the 
pure  subject,  the  clear  mirror  of  the  object." 

But  not  only  the  religious  enthusiast  and  the 
worshiper  of  beauty  "  lose  themselves  "  in  ecstasy. 
The  "  fine  frenzy  "  of  the  thinker  is  typical.  From 
Archimedes,  whose  life  paid  the  forfeit  of  his  im 
personal  absorption  ;  from  Socrates,  musing  in  one 
spot  from  dawn  to  dawn,  to  Newton  and  Goethe, 
there  is  but  one  form  of  the  highest  effort  to  pene 
trate  and  to  create.  Emerson  is  right  in  saying  of 
the  genius,  "  His  greatness  consists  in  the  fullness 
in  which  an  ecstatic  state  is  realized  in  him.'* 

The  temporary  evaporation  of  the  consciousness 
of  one's  own  personality  is  then  decidedly  not  a 
pathological  experience.  It  seems  the  condition, 
indeed,  and  recognized  as  such  in  popular  judg- 


62        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

ment,  of  the  deepest  feeling  and  the  highest  achieve 
ment.  Perhaps  it  is  the  very  assumption  of  this 
condition  in  our  daily  thoughts  that  has  veiled  the 
psychological  problem  it  presents.  We  opine,  easily 
enough,  that  great  deeds  are  done  in  forgetf ulness 
of  self.  But  why  should  we  forget  ourselves  in 
doing  great  deeds  ?  Why  not  as  well  feel  in  every 
act  its  reverberation  on  the  self,  —  the  renewed 
assurance  that  it  is  /  who  can  ?  Why  not,  in  each 
aesthetic  thrill,  awake  anew  to  the  consciousness  of 
myself  as  ruler  in  a  realm  of  beauty  ?  Why  not, 
in  the  rush  of  intellectual  production,  glory  that 
"  my  mind  to  me  a  kingdom  is  "  ?  And  yet  the 
facts  are  otherwise :  in  proportion  to  the  intensity 
and  value  of  the  experience  is  its  approach  to  the 
objective,  the  impersonal,  the  ecstatic  state.  Then 
how  explain  this  anomaly  ?  Why  should  religious, 
aesthetic,  and  intellectual  emotion  be  accompanied 
in  varying  degrees  by  the  loss  of  self -consciousness  ? 
Why  should  the  sense  of  personality  play  us  so 
strange  a  trick  as  to  vanish,  at  the  moment  of 
seemingly  greatest  power,  in  the  very  shadow  of  its 
own  glory  ? 

If  now  we  put  the  most  obvious  question,  and 
ask,  in  explanation  of  its  escapades,  what  the  true 
nature  of  this  personality  is,  we  shall  find  ourselves 
quite  out  of  our  reckoning  on  the  vast  sea  of  meta 
physics.  To  know  what  personality  is,  "  root  and 
all,  and  all  in  all,"  is  to  "  know  what  God  and  man 
is."  Fortunately,  our  problem  is  much  more  simple. 


THE  ESTHETIC  REPOSE  63 

It  is  not  the  personality  itself,  its  reality,  its  mean 
ing,  that  vanishes ;  no,  nor  even  the  psychological 
system  of  dispositions.  We  remain,  in  such  a  mo 
ment  of  ecstasy,  as  persons,  what  we  were  before. 
It  is  the  feeling  of  personality  that  has  faded ; 
and  to  find  out  in  what  this  will-o'-the-wisp  feeling 
of  personality  resides  is  a  task  wholly  within  the 
powers  of  psychological  analysis.  Let  no  one  object 
that  the  depth  and  value  of  experience  seem  to  dis 
integrate  under  the  psychologist's  microscope.  The 
place  of  the  full-orbed  personality  in  a  world  of 
noble  ends  is  not  affected  by  the  possibility  that 
the  centre  of  its  conscious  crystallization  may  be 
found  in  a  single  sensation. 

The  explanation,  then,  of  this  apparent  incon 
sistency  —  the  fading  away  of  self  in  the  midst  of 
certain  most  important  experiences  —  must  lie  in 
the  nature  of  the  feeling  of  personality.  What 
is  that  feeling  ?  On  what  is  it  based  ?  How  can 
it  be  described?  The  difficulties  of  introspection 
have  led  many  to  deny  the  possibility  of  such  self- 
fixation.  The  fleeting  moment  passes,  and  we 
grasp  only  an  idea  or  a  feeling ;  the  Ego  has  slipped 
away  like  a  drop  of  mercury  under  the  fingers. 
Like  the  hero  of  the  German  poet,  who  wanted 
his  queue  in  front, 

"  Then  round  and  round,  and  out  and  in, 
All  day  that  puzzled  sage  did  spin; 
In  vain ;  it  mattered  not  a  pin ; 
The  pigtail  hung  behind  him," 


64        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

when  I  turn  round  upon  myself  to  catch  myself  in 
the  act  of  thinking,  I  can  never  lay  hold  on  any 
thing  but  a  sensation.  I  may  peel  off,  like  the 
leaves  of  an  artichoke,  my  social  self,  —  my  pos 
sessions  and  positions,  my  friends,  my  relatives ; 
my  active  self,  —  my  books  and  implements  of 
work ;  my  clothes ;  even  my  flesh,  and  sit  in  my 
bones,  like  Sydney  Smith,  —  the  /  in  me  retreat 
ing  ever  to  an  inner  citadel ;  but  I  must  stop  with 
the  feeling  that  something  moves  in  there.  That  is 
not  what  my  self  is,  but  what  the  elusive  sprite 
feels  like  when  I  have  got  my  finger  on  him.  In 
daily  experience,  however,  it  is  unnecessary  to  pro 
ceed  to  such  extremities.  The  self,  at  a  given 
moment  of  consciousness,  is  felt  as  one  group  of 
elements  which  form  a  background  of  conscious 
ness  as  over  against  another  group  of  elements 
which  form  a  foreground.  The  second  group  is,  we 
say,  before  the  attention,  and  is  not  at  that  moment 
felt  as  self ;  while  the  first  group  is  vague,  undif- 
f erentiated,  not  attended  to,  but  felt.  Any  element 
in  this  background  can  detach  itself  and  come  into 
the  foreground  of  attention.  I  become  conscious 
at  this  moment,  for  instance,  of  the  weight  of  my 
shoulders  as  they  rest  on  the  back  of  my  chair : 
that  sensation,  however,  belongs  to  my  self  no  more 
than  does  the  sensation  of  the  smoothness  of  the 
paper  on  which  my  hand  rests.  I  know  I  am  a 
self,  because  I  can  pass,  so  to  speak,  between  the 
foreground  and  the  background  of  my  conscious- 


THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE  65 

ness.  It  is  the  feeling  of  transition  that  gives  me 
the  negative  and  positive  of  my  circuit ;  and  this 
feeling  of  transition,  hunted  to  its  lair,  reveals  itself 
as  nothing  more  nor  less  than  a  motor  sensation 
felt  in  the  sense  organs  which  adapt  themselves  to 
the  new  conditions.  I  look  on  that  picture  and  on 
this,  and  know  that  they  are  two,  because  the 
change  in  the  adaptation  of  my  sense  organs  to 
their  objects  has  been  felt.  I  close  rny  eyes  and 
think  of  near  and  far,  and  it  is  the  change  in  the 
sensations  from  my  eye  muscles  that  tells  me  I  have 
passed  between  the  two  ;  or,  to  express  it  otherwise, 
that  it  is  in  me  the  two  have  succeeded  each  other. 
While  the  self  in  its  widest  sense,  therefore,  is  co 
extensive  with  consciousness,  the  distinctive  feeling 
of  self  as  opposed  to  the  elements  in  consciousness 
which  represent  the  outer  world  is  based  on  those 
bodily  sensations  which  are  connected  with  the  rela 
tions  of  objects.  My  world  —  the  foreground  of 
my  consciousness  —  would  fall  in  on  me  and  crush 
me,  if  I  could  not  hold  it  off  by  just  this  power  to 
feel  it  different  from  my  background ;  and  it  is  felt 
as  different  through  the  motor  sensations  involved 
in  the  change  of  my  sense  organs  in  passing  from 
one  to  the  other.  The  condition  of  the  feeling  of 
transition,  and  hence  of  the  feeling  of  personality, 
is  then  the  presence  in  consciousness  of  at  least  two 
possible  objects  of  attention ;  and  the  formal  con 
sciousness  of  self  might  be  schematized  as  a  straight 
line  connecting  two  points,  in  which  one  point  repre- 


66        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

sents  the  foreground,  and  the  other  the  background, 
of  consciousness. 

If  we  now  accept  this  view,  and  ask  under  what 
conditions  the  sense  of  self  may  be  lost,  the  answer 
is  at  once  suggested.  It  will  happen  when  the  "  two- 
ness  "  disappears,  so  that  the  line  connecting  and 
separating  the  two  objects  in  our  scheme  drops  out 
or  is  indefinitely  decreased.  When  background  or 
foreground  tends  to  disappear  or  to  merge  either 
into  the  other,  or  when  background  or  foreground 
makes  an  indissoluble  unity  or  unbreakable  circle, 
the  content  of  consciousness  approaches  absolute 
unity.  There  is  no  "  relating "  to  be  done,  no 
"  transition  "  to  be  made.  The  condition,  then,  for 
the  feeling  of  personality  is  no  longer  present,  and 
there  results  a  feeling  of  complete  unity  with  the 
object  of  attention ;  and  if  this  object  of  attention 
is  itself  without  parts  or  differences,  there  results 
an  empty  void,  Nirvana. 

Suppose  that  I  gaze,  motionless,  at  a  single  bright 
light  until  all  my  bodily  sensations  have  faded. 
Then  one  of  the  "points"  in  our  scheme  has  dropped 
out.  In  my  mind  there  reigns  but  one  thought. 
The  transition  feeling  goes,  for  there  is  nothing  to 
be  "related."  Now  "it  is  one  blaze,  about  me 
and  within  me ;  "  I  am  that  light,  and  myself  no 
longer.  My  consciousness  is  a  unit  or  a  blank,  as 
you  please.  If  you  say  that  I  am  self-hypnotized, 
I  may  reply  that  I  have  simply  ceased  to  feel 
myself  different  from  the  content  of  my  conscious- 


THE  AESTHETIC   REPOSE  67 

ness,  because  that  content  has  ceased  to  allow  a 
transition  between  its  terms. 

This  is,  however,  not  the  only  possible  form  of 
the  disappearance  of  our  "  twoness,"  and  the  result 
ing  loss  of  the  self-feeling.  When  the  sequence  of 
objects  in  consciousness  is  so  rapid  that  the  feeling 
of  transition,  expressed  in  motor  terms,  drops  be 
low  the  threshold  of  sensation,  the  feeling  of  self 
again  fades.  Think,  for  instance,  of  the  Bacchanal 
orgies.  The  votary  of  Dionysus,  dancing,  shriek 
ing,  tearing  at  his  hair  and  at  his  garments,  lost  in 
the  lightning  change  of  his  sensations  all  power  of 
relating  them.  His  mind  was  ringed  in  a  whirling 
circle,  every  point  of  which  merged  into  the  next 
without  possibility  of  differentiation.  And  since  he 
could  feel  no  transition  periods,  he  could  feel  him 
self  no  longer ;  he  was  one  with  the  content  of  his 
consciousness,  which  consciousness  was  no  less  a 
unit  than  our  bright  light  aforesaid,  just  as  a  circle 
is  as  truly  a  unit  as  a  point.  The  priest  of  Diony 
sus  must  have  felt  himself  only  a  dancing,  shouting 
thing,  one  with  the  world  without,  "  whirled  round 
in  earth's  diurnal  course  with  rocks  and  stones  and 
trees."  And  how  perfectly  the  ancient  belief  fits 
our  psychophysical  analysis !  The  Bacchic  enthu 
siast  believed  himself  possessed  with  the  very  ecstasy 
of  the  spirit  of  nature.  His  inspired  madness  was 
the  presence  of  the  god  who  descended  upon  him, 
—  the  god  of  the  vine,  of  spring ;  the  rising  sap, 
the  rushing  stream,  the  bursting  leaf,  the  rippling 


68        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

song,  all  the  life  of  flowing  things,  they  were  he ! 

"  avTLKa  ya  Trcura  xopeiwrei,"  was  the  cry, "  soon  the 

whole  earth  will  dance  and  sing!  " 

Yes,  this  breaking  down  of  barriers,  this  melt 
ing  of  the  personality  into  its  surroundings,  this 
strange  and  sweet  self-abandonment  must  have  its 
source  in  just  the  disappearance  of  the  sensation  of 
adjustment,  on  which  the  feeling  of  personality  is 
based.  But  how  can  it  be,  we  have  to  ask,  that 
a  principle  so  barren  of  emotional  significance 
should  account  for  the  ecstasy  of  religious  emotion, 
of  aesthetic  delight,  of  creative  inspiration  ?  It  is 
not,  however,  religion  or  beauty  or  genius  that  is  the 
object  of  our  inquiry  at  this  moment,  but  simply 
the  common  element  in  the  experience  of  each  of 
these  which  we  know  as  the  disappearance  of  self- 
feeling.  How  the  circumstances  peculiar  to  reli 
gious  worship,  aesthetic  appreciation,  and  intellect 
ual  creation  bring  about  the  formal  conditions  of 
the  loss  of  personal  feeling  must  be  sought  in  a 
more  detailed  analysis,  and  we  shall  then  be  able 
to  trace  the  source  of  the  intensity  of  emotion  in 
these  experiences.  What,  then,  first  of  all,  are  the 
steps  by  which  priest  and  poet  and  thinker  have 
passed  into  the  exaltation  of  selfless  emotion  ?  For 
tunately,  the  passionate  pilgrims  to  all  three  realms 
of  deep  experience  have  been  ever  prodigal  of 
their  confessions.  The  religious  ecstasy,  however, 
embodies  the  most  complete  case,  and  allows 
the  clearest  insight  into  the  nature  of  the  experi* 


THE  AESTHETIC   REPOSE  69 

ence ;  and  will  therefore  be  dealt  with  at  greatest 
length. 

The  typical  religious  enthusiast  is  the  mystic. 
From  Plotinus  to  Buddha,  from  Meister  Eckhart 
to  Emerson,  the  same  doctrine  has  brought  the 
same  fruits  of  religious  rapture.  There  is  one  God, 
and  in  contemplation  of  Him  the  soul  becomes  of 
his  essence.  Whether  it  is  held,  as  by  the  Neopla- 
tonists,  that  Being  and  Knowledge  are  one,  that 
the  procedure  of  the  world  out  of  God  is  a  process 
of  self-revelation,  and  the  return  of  things  into 
God  a  process  of  higher  and  higher  intuition,  and 
so  the  mystic  experience  an  apprehension  of  the 
highest  rather  than  a  form  of  worship  ;  or  whether 
it  is  expressed  as  by  the  humble  Beguine,  Mech- 
thild,  —  "  My  soul  swims  in  the  Being  of  God  as  a 
fish  in  water,"-  — the  kernel  of  the  mystic's  creed  is 
the  same.  In  ecstatic  contemplation  of  God,  and, 
in  the  higher  states,  in  ecstatic  union  with  Him, 
in  sinking  the  individuality  in  the  divine  Being,  is 
the  only  true  life.  Not  all,  it  is  true,  who  hold  the 
doctrine  have  had  the  experience  ;  not  all  can  say 
with  Eckhart  or  with  Madame  Guyon,  "  I  have  seen 
God  in  my  own  soul,"  or  "  I  have  become  one  with 
God."  It  is  from  the  narratives  and  the  counsels  of 
perfection  of  these,  the  chosen,  the  initiate,  who  have 
passed  beyond  the  veil,  that  light  may  be  thrown 
on  the  psychological  conditions  of  mystic  ecstasy. 

The  most  illuminating  account  of   her  actual 
mystical  experiences  is  given  by  Madame  Guyon, 


70        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

the  first  of  the  sect  or  school  of  the  Quietists.  This 
gentle  Frenchwoman  had  a  gift  for  psychological 
observation,  and  though  her  style  is  neither  poetic 
nor  philosophical,  I  may  be  pardoned  for  quoting 
at  some  length  her  naive  and  lucid  revelations. 
The  following  passages,  beginning  with  an  early 
religious  experience,  are  taken  almost  at  random 
from  the  pages  of  her  autobiography :  — 

"  These  sermons  made  such  an  impression  on 
my  mind,  and  absorbed  me  so  strongly  in  God, 
that  I  could  not  open  my  eyes  nor  hear  what  was 
said."  "  To  hear  Thy  name,  O  my  God,  could  put 
me  into  a  profound  prayer.  ...  I  could  not  see 
any  longer  the  saints  nor  the  Holy  Virgin  outside 
of  God ;  but  I  saw  them  all  in  Him,  scarcely  be 
ing  able  to  distinguish  them  from  Him.  ...  I 
could  not  hear  God  nor  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ 
spoken  of  without  being,  as  it  were,  outside  of 
myself  [hors  de  moi~\.  .  .  .  Love  seized  me  so 
strongly  that  I  remained  absorbed,  in  a  profound 
silence  and  a  peace  that  I  cannot  describe.  I  made 
ever  new  efforts,  and  I  passed  my  life  in  beginning 
my  prayers  without  being  able  to  carry  them 
through.  ...  I  could  ask  nothing  for  myself  nor 
for  another,  nor  wish  anything  but  this  divine 
will.  ...  I  do  not  believe  that  there  could  be  in 
the  world  anything  more  simple  and  more  unified. 
...  It  is  a  state  of  which  one  can  say  nothing 
more,  because  it  evades  all  expression,  —  a  state 
in  which  the  creature  is  lost,  engulfed.  All  is  God, 


THE  ESTHETIC   REPOSE  71 

and  the  soul  perceives  only  God.  It  has  to  strive 
no  more  for  perfection,  for  growth,  for  approach  to 
Him,  for  union.  All  is  consummated  in  the  unity, 
but  in  a  manner  so  free,  so  natural,  so  easy,  that 
the  soid  lives  in  and  from  God,  as  easily  as  the 
body  lives  from  the  air  which  it  breathes.  .  .  .  The 
spirit  is  empty,  no  more  traversed  by  thoughts; 
nothing  fills  the  void,  which  is  no  longer  painful, 
and  the  soul  finds  in  itself  an  immense  capacity 
that  nothing  can  either  limit  or  destroy." 

Can  we  fail  to  trace  in  these  simple  words  the 
shadow  of  all  religious  exaltation  that  is  based  on 
faith  alone  ?  Madame  Guyon  is  strung  to  a  higher 
key  than  most  of  this  dull  and  relaxed  world  ;  but 
she  has  struck  the  eternal  note  of  contemplative 
worship.  Such  is  the  sense  of  union  with  the  divine 
Spirit.  Such  are  the  thoughts  and  even  the  words 
of  Dante,  Eckhart,  St.  Teresa,  the  countless  mystics 
of  the  Middle  Age,  and  of  the  followers  of  Bud 
dhism  in  its  various  shades,  from  the  Ganges  to  the 
Charles.  Two  characteristics  disengage  themselves 
to  view :  the  insistence  on  the  unity  of  God  —  in 
whom  alone  the  Holy  Virgin  and  the  saints  are 
seen  —  from  a  psychological  point  of  view  only ; 
and  the  mind's  emptiness  of  thought  in  a  state  of 
religious  ecstasy.  But  without  further  analysis,  we 
may  ask,  as  the  disciples  of  the  mystics  have  always 
done,  how  this  state  of  blissful  union  is  to  be 
reached.  They  have  always  been  minute  in  their 
prescriptions,  and  it  is  possible  to  derive  therefrom 


72        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

what  may  be  called  the  technique  of  the  mystic 
procedure. 

"The  word  mystic,"  to  quote  Walter  Pater,  "has 
been  derived  from  a  Greek  word  which  signifies  to 
shut,  as  if  one  shut  ones  lips,  brooding  on  what 
cannot  be  uttered ;  but  the  Platonists  themselves 
derive  it  rather  from  the  act  of  shutting  the  eyes, 
that  one  may  see  the  more,  inwardly."  Of  such  is 
the  counsel  of  St.  Luis  de  Granada,  "  Imitate  the 
sportsman  who  hoods  the  falcon  that  it  be  made 
subservient  to  his  rule ;  "  and  of  another  Spanish 
mystic,  Pedro  de  Alcantara :  "  In  meditation,  let 
the  person  rouse  himself  from  things  temporal,  and 
let  him  collect  himself  within  himself.  .  .  .  Here 
let  him  hearken  to  the  voice  of  God  ...  as  though 
there  were  no  other  in  the  world  save  God  and  him 
self."  St.  Teresa  found  happiness  only  in  "  shutting 
herself  up  within  herself."  Vocal  prayer  could  not 
satisfy  her,  and  she  adopted  mental  prayer.  The 
four  stages  of  her  experience  —  which  she  named 
"  recollectedness,"  "  quietude  "  (listening  rather 
than  speaking),  "union"  (blissful  sleep  with  the 
faculties  of  the  mind  still),  "ecstasy  or  rapture" 
—  are  but  progressive  steps  in  the  sealing  of  the 
senses.  The  yoga  of  the  Brahmins,  which  is  the 
same  as  the  "  union  "  of  the  Cabalists,  is  made  to 
depend  upon  the  same  conditions,  —  passivity,  per 
severance,  solitude.  The  novice  must  arrest  his 
breathing,  and  may  meditate  on  mystic  symbols 
alone,  by  way  of  reaching  the  formless,  ineffable 


THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE  73 

Buddha.  But  it  is  useless  to  heap  up  evidence  ;  the 
inference  is  sufficiently  clear. 

The  body  is  first  brought  into  a  state  either  of 
nervous  instability  or  irritability  by  ascetic  prac 
tices,  or  of  nervous  insensibility  by  the  persistent 
withdrawal  of  all  outer  disturbance  ;  and  the  mind 
is  fixed  upon  a  single  object,  —  the  one  God,  the 
God  eternal,  absolute,  indivisible.  Recalling  our 
former  scheme  for  the  conditions  of  the  sense  of 
personality,  we  shall  see  that  we  have  here  the  two 
poles  of  consciousness.  Then,  as  the  tension  is 
sharpened,  what  happens  ?  Under  the  artificial  con 
ditions  of  weakened  nerves,  of  blank  surroundings, 
the  self-background  drops.  The  feeling  of  transi 
tion  disappears  with  the  absence  of  related  terms ; 
and  the  remaining,  the  positive  pole  of  conscious 
ness,  is  an  undifferentiated  Unity,  with  which  the 
person  must  feel  himself  one.  The  feeling  of  per 
sonality  is  gone  with  that  on  which  it  rests,  and  its 
loss  is  joined  with  an  overwhelming  sense  of  union 
with  the  One,  the  Absolute,  God  I 

The  object  of  mystic  contemplation  is  the  One 
indivisible.  But  we  can  also  think  the  One  as  the 
unity  of  all  differences,  the  Circle  of  the  Universe. 
Those  natures  also  which,  like  Amiel's,  are  "  bedaz 
zled  with  the  Infinite  "  and  thirst  for  "  totality  "  at 
tain  in  their  reveries  to  the  same  impersonal  ecstasy. 
Amiel  writes  of  a  "  night  on  the  sandy  shore  of 
the  North  Sea,  stretched  at  full  length  upon  the 
beach,  my  eyes  wandering  over  the  Milky  Way. 


74        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Will  they  ever  return  to  me,  those  grandiose,  im 
mortal,  cosmogonic  dreams,  in  which  one  seems  to 
carry  the  world  in  one's  breast,  to  touch  the  stars, 
to  possess  the  Infinite  !  "  The  reverie  of  Senan- 
cour,  on  the  bank  of  the  Lake  of  Bienne,  quoted  by 
Matthew  Arnold,  reveals  the  same  emotion  :  "  Vast 
consciousness  of  a  nature  everywhere  greater  than 
we  are,  and  everywhere  impenetrable  ;  all-embrac 
ing  passion,  ripened  wisdom,  delicious  self-abandon 
ment."  In  the  coincidence  of  outer  circumstance 
—  the  lake,  the  North  Sea,  night,  the  attitude 
of  repose  —  may  we  not  trace  a  dissolution  of  the 
self-background,  similar  to  that  of  the  mystic  wor 
shiper?  And  in  the  Infinite,  no  less  than  in  the 
One,  must  the  soul  sink  and  melt  into  union  with 
it,  because  within  it  there  is  no  determination,  no 
pause,  and  no  change. 

The  contemplation  of  the  One,  however,  is  not 
the  only  type  of  mystic  ecstasy.  That  intoxication 
of  emotion  which  seizes  upon  the  negro  camp  meet 
ing  of  to-day,  as  it  did  upon  the  Delphic  priestesses 
two  thousand  years  ago,  seems  at  first  glance  to 
have  nothing  in  common  psychologically  with  the 
blessed  nothingness  of  Gautama  and  Meister  Eck- 
hart.  But  the  loss  of  the  feeling  of  personality 
and  the  sense  of  possession  by  a  divine  spirit  are 
the  same.  How,  then,  is  this  state  reached?  By 
means,  I  believe,  which  recall  the  general  formula 
for  the  disappearance  of  self-feeling.  To  repeat 
the  monosyllable  om  (Brahm)  ten  thousand  times ; 


THE  ESTHETIC   REPOSE  75 

to  circle  interminably,  chanting  the  while,  about 
a  sacred  fire ;  to  listen  to  the  monotonous  magic 
drum ;  to  whirl  the  body  about ;  to  rock  to  and 
fro  on  the  knees,  vociferating  prayers,  are  methods 
which  enable  the  members  of  the  respective  sects 
in  which  they  are  practiced  either  to  enter,  as  they 
say,  into  the  Eternal  Being,  or  to  become  informed 
with  it  through  the  negation  of  the  self.  The  sense 
of  personality,  at  any  rate,  is  more  or  less  completely 
lost,  and  the  ecstasy  takes  a  form  more  or  less  pas 
sionate,  according  as  the  worshiper  depends  on  the 
rapidity  rather  than  on  the  monotony  of  his  exci 
tations.  Here,  again,  the  self-background  drops, 
inasmuch  as  every  rhythmical  movement  tends  to 
become  automatic,  and  then  unconscious.  Thus 
what  we  are  wont  to  call  the  inspired  madness  of 
the  Delphic  priestesses  was  less  the  expression  of 
ecstasy  than  the  means  of  its  excitation.  Perpetual 
motion,  as  well  as  eternal  rest,  may  bring  about 
the  engulf ment  of  the  self  in  the  object.  The  most 
diverse  types  of  religious  emotions,  in  so  far  as 
they  present  variations  in  the  degree  of  self-con 
sciousness,  are  thus  seen  to  be  reducible  to  the 
same  psychological  basis.  The  circle,  no  less  than 
the  point,  is  the  symbol  of  the  One,  and  the  "  de 
vouring  unity"  that  lays  hold  on  consciousness 
from  the  loss  of  the  feeling  of  transition  comes 
in  the  unrest  of  enthusiasm  no  less  than  in  the 
blissful  nothing  of  Nirvana. 

At  this  point,  I  am  sure,  the  reader  will  interpose 


76        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

a  protest.  Is,  then,  the  mystery  of  self-abandon 
ment  to  the  highest  to  be  shared  with  the  meanest 
of  fanatics?  Are  the  rapture  of  Dante  and  the 
trance  of  the  Omphalopsychi  sprung  from  the  same 
root  ?  There  is  no  occasion,  however,  for  the  revolt 
of  sentiment  because  we  fail  to  emphasize  here  the 
important  differences  in  the  emotional  character 
and  value  of  the  states  in  question.  What  interests 
us  is  only  one  aspect  which  they  have  in  common, 
the  surrender  of  the  sense  of  personality.  That  is 
based  on  formal  relations  of  the  elements  of  con 
sciousness,  and  the  explanation  of  its  disappearance 
applies  as  well  to  the  whirling  dervish  as  to  the 
converts  of  a  revivalist  preacher. 

The  mystic,  then,  need  only  shut  his  senses  to  the 
world,  and  contemplate  the  One.  Subject  fuses 
with  object,  and  he  feels  himself  melt  into  the  In 
finite.  But  such  experience  is  not  the  exclusive 
property  of  the  religious  enthusiast.  The  worshiper 
of  beauty  has  given  evidence  of  the  same  feel 
ings.  And  yet,  in  his  a3sthetic  rapture,  the  latter 
dwells  with  deliberation  on  his  delights,  and  while 
luxuriating  in  the  infinite  labyrinths  of  beauty  can 
scarcely  be  described  as  musing  on  an  undifferenti- 
ated  Unity.  So  far,  at  least,  it  does  not  appear 
that  our  formula  applies  to  a3sthetic  feeling. 

^Esthetic  feeling  arises  in  the  contemplation  of  a 
beautiful  object.  But  what  makes  an  object  beau 
tiful  ?  To  go  still  further  back,  just  what,  psycho 
logically,  does  contemplation  mean?  To  contem- 


THE  ESTHETIC   REPOSE  77 

plate  an  object  is  to  dwell  on  the  idea  or  image  of 
it,  and  to  dwell  upon  an  idea  means  to  carry  it  out 
incipiently.  We  may  go  even  further,  and  say  it 
is  the  carrying  out  by  virtue  of  which  we  grasp  the 
idea.  How  do  we  think  of  a  tall  pine-tree  ?  By 
sweeping  our  eyes  up  and  down  its  length,  and 
out  to  the  ends  of  its  branches  ;  and  if  we  are  for 
bidden  to  use  our  eye  muscles  even  infinitesimally, 
then  we  cannot  think  of  the  visual  image.  In  short, 
we  perceive  an  object  in  space  by  carrying  out  its 
motor  suggestions ;  more  technically  expressed,  by 
virtue  of  a  complex  of  motor  impulses  aroused  by 
it ;  more  briefly,  by  incipiently  imitating  it.  Con 
templation  is  inner  imitation. 

Now  a  beautiful  object  is  first  of  all  a  unified 
object ;  why  this  must  be  so  has  been  considered  in 
the  preceding  chapter.  In  it  all  impulses  of  soul 
and  sense  are  bound  to  react  upon  one  another, 
and  to  lead  back  to  one  another.  And  all  the  ele 
ments,  which  in  contemplation  we  reproduce  in  the 
form  of  motor  impulses,  are  bound  to  make  a 
closed  circle  of  these  suggested  energies.  The  sym 
metrical  picture  calls  out  a  set  of  motor  impulses 
which  "  balance,"  —  a  system  of  energies  reacting 
on  one  centre  ;  the  sonnet  takes  us  out  on  one  wave 
of  rhythm  and  of  thought,  to  bring  us  back  on  an 
other  to  the  same  point ;  the  sonata  does  the  same 
in  melody.  In  the  "  whirling  circle  "  of  the  drama, 
not  a  word  or  an  act  that  is  not  indissolubly  linked 
with  before  and  after.  Thus  the  unity  of  a  work 


78        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

of  art  makes  of  the  system  of  suggested  energies 
which  form  the  foreground  of  attention  an  impreg 
nable,  an  invulnerable  circle. 

Not  only,  however,  are  we  held  in  equilibrium 
in  the  object  of  attention  ;  we  cannot  connect  with 
it  our  self-background,  for  the  will  cannot  act  on 
the  object  of  aesthetic  feeling.  We  cannot  eat  the 
grapes  of  Apelles  or  embrace  the  Galatea  of  Pyg 
malion  ;  we  cannot  rescue  Ophelia  or  enlighten 
Juliet ;  and  of  impulse  to  interfere,  to  connect  the 
scene  with  ourselves,  we  have  none.  But  this  is  a  less 
important  factor  in  the  situation.  That  the  house 
is  dark,  the  audience  silent,  and  all  motor  impulses 
outside  of  the  aesthetic  circle  stifled,  is,  too,  only  a 
superficial,  and,  so  to  speak,  a  negative  condition. 
The  real  ground  of  the  possibility  of  a  momentary 
self-annihilation  lies  in  the  fact  that  all  incitements 
to  motor  impulse  —  except  those  which  belong  to  the 
indissoluble  ring  of  the  object  itself  —  have  been 
shut  out  by  the  perfection  of  unity  to  which  the 
aesthetic  object  (here  the  drama)  has  been  brought. 
The  background  fades ;  the  foreground  satisfies, 
incites  no  movement ;  and  with  the  disappearance 
of  the  possibility  of  action  which  would  connect 
the  two,  fades  also  that  which  dwells  in  this  feel 
ing  of  transition, — the  sense  of  personality.  The 
depth  of  aesthetic  feeling  lies  not  in  the  worthy 
countryman  who  interrupts  the  play  with  cries  for 
justice  on  the  villain,  but  in  him  who  creates  the 
drama  again  with  the  poet,  who  lives  over  again  in 


THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE  79 

himself  each  of  the  thrills  of  emotion  passing  before 
him,  and  loses  himself  in  their  web.  The  object  is 
a  unity  or  our  whirling  circle  of  impulses,  as  you 
like  to  phrase  it.  At  any  rate,  out  of  that  unity  the 
soul  does  not  return  upon  itself ;  it  remains  one 
with  it  in  the  truest  sense. 

The  loss  of  the  sense  of  personality  is  an  integral 
part  of  the  aesthetic  experience  ;  and  we  have  seen 
how  it  is  a  necessary  psychological  effect  of  the  unity 
of  the  object.  From  another  point  of  view  it  may 
be  said  that  the  unity  of  the  object  is  constituted 
just  by  the  inhibition  of  all  tendency  to  movement 
through  the  balance  or  centrality  of  impulses  sug 
gested  by  it.  In  other  words,  the  balance  of  im 
pulses  makes  us  feel  the  object  a  unity.  And  this 
balance  of  impulses,  this  inhibition  of  movement, 
corresponding  to  unity,  is  what  we  know  as  aesthetic 
repose.  Thus  the  conditions  of  aesthetic  repose  and 
of  the  loss  of  self -feeling  are  the  same.  In  fact,  it 
might  be  said  that,  within  this  realm,  the  two  con 
ceptions  are  identical.  The  true  aesthetic  repose  is 
just  that  perfect  rest  in  the  beautiful  object  which 
is  the  essence  of  the  loss  of  the  sense  of  personality. 

Subtler  and  rarer,  again,  than  the  raptures  of 
mysticism  and  of  beauty  worship  is  the  ecstasy 
of  intellectual  production ;  yet  the  "  clean,  clear 
joy  of  creation,"  as  Kipling  names  it,  is  not  less 
to  be  grouped  with  those  precious  experiences  in 
which  the  self  is  sloughed  away,  and  the  soul  at 
one  with  its  content.  I  speak,  of  course,  of  intel- 


80        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

lectual  production  in  full  swing,  in  the  momentum  of 
success.  The  travail  of  soul  over  apparently  hope 
less  difficulties  or  in  the  working  out  of  indifferent 
details  takes  place  not  only  in  full  self -conscious 
ness,  but  in  self -disgust ;  there  we  can  take  Carlyle 
to  witness.  But  in  the  higher  stages  the  fixation  of 
truth  and  the  appreciation  of  beauty  are  accompa 
nied  by  the  same  extinction  of  the  feeling  of  indi 
viduality.  Of  testimony  we  have  enough  and  to 
spare.  I  need  not  fill  these  pages  with  confessions 
and  anecdotes  of  the  ecstatical  state  in  which  all  great 
deeds  of  art  and  science  are  done.  The  question 
is  rather  to  understand  and  explain  it  on  the  basis 
of  the  formal  scheme  to  which  we  have  found  the 
religious  and  the  a3sthetic  attitudes  to  conform. 

Jean  Paul  says  somewhere  that,  however  labori 
ous  the  completion  of  a  great  work,  its  conception 
came  as  a  whole,  —  in  one  flash.  We  remember 
the  dreams  of  Schiller  in  front  of  his  red  curtain 
and  the  resulting  musikalische  Stimmung,  —  form 
less,  undirected,  out  of  which  his  poem  shaped  it 
self  ;  the  half-somnambulic  state  of  Goethe  and  his 
frantic  haste  in  fixation  of  the  vision,  in  which  he 
dared  not  even  stop  to  put  his  paper  straight,  but 
wrote  over  the  corners  quite  ruthlessly.  Henner 
once  said  to  a  painter  who  mourned  that  he  had 
done  nothing  on  his  picture  for  the  Salon,  though 
he  saw  it  before  him,  "  What !  You  see  your  pic 
ture!  Then  it  is  done.  You  can  paint  it  in  an 
hour."  If  all  these  traditions  be  true,  they  are 


THE  AESTHETIC   REPOSE  81 

significant ;  and  the  necessary  conditions  of  such 
composition  seem  to  be  highly  analogous  to  those 
of  the  aesthetic  emotion.  We  have,  first  of  all,  a 
lack  of  outward  stimulation,  and  therefore  possible 
disappearance  of  the  background.  How  much  bet 
ter  have  most  poets  written  in  a  garret  than  in  a 
boudoir !  Goethe's  bare  little  room  in  the  garden 
house  at  Weimar  testifies  to  the  severe  conditions 
his  genius  found  necessary.  Tranquillity  of  the 
background  is  the  condition  of  self -absorption,  or 
—  and  this  point  seems  to  me  worth  emphasizing  — 
a  closed  circle  of  outer  activities.  I  have  never 
believed,  for  instance,  in  the  case  of  the  old  tale  of 
Walter  Scott  and  the  button,  that  it  was  the  sur 
prise  of  his  loss  that  tied  the  tongue  of  the  future 
author's  rival.  The  poor  head  scholar  had  simply 
made  for  himself  a  transitionless  experience  with 
that  twirling  button,  and  could  then  sink  his  con 
sciousness  in  its  object,  —  at  that  moment  the  mas 
ter's  questions.  It  is  with  many  of  us  a  familiar 
experience,  that  of  not  being  able  to  think  unless 
in  constant  motion.  Translated  into  our  psycho 
logical  scheme,  the  efficiency  of  these  movements 
would  be  explained  thus:  Given  the  "whirling 
circles,"  —  the  background  of  continuous  move 
ment  sensations,  which  finally  dropped  out  of 
consciousness,  and  the  foreground  of  continuous 
thought,  —  the  first  protected,  so  to  speak,  the 
second,  since  they  were  mutually  exclusive,  and 
what  broke  the  one  destroyed  the  other. 


82        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

But  to  return  from  this  digression,  a  background 
fading  into  nothingness,  either  as  rest  or  as  a  closed 
circle  of  automatic  movements,  is  the  first  condition 
of  the  ecstasy  of  mental  production.  The  second  is 
given  in  the  character  of  its  object.  The  object  of 
high  intellectual  creation  is  a  unity,  —  a  perfect 
whole,  revealed,  as  Jean  Paul  says,  in  a  single 
movement  of  genius.  Within  the  enchanted  circle 
of  his  creation,  the  thinker  is  absorbed,  because 
here  too  all  his  impulses  are  turned  to  one  end,  in 
relation  to  which  nothing  else  exists. 

I  am  aware  that  many  will  see  a  sharp  distinc 
tion  here  between  the  work  of  the  creator  or 
discoverer  hi  science  and  the  artist.  They  may 
maintain,  in  Schopenhauer's  phrase,  that  the  aim 
and  end  of  science  is  just  the  connection  of  objects 
in  the  service  of  the  will  of  the  individual,  and 
hence  transition  between  the  various  terms  is  con 
stant  ;  while  art,  on  the  other  hand,  indeed  isolates 
its  object,  and  so  drops  transitions.  But  I  think 
where  we  speak  of  "  connection  "  thus,  we  mean 
the  larger  sweep  of  law.  If  the  thinker  looks  be 
yond  his  special  problem  at  all,  it  is,  like  Buddha, 
to  "  fix  his  eyes  upon  the  chain  of  causation."  The 
scientist  of  imagination  sees  his  work  under  the 
form  of  eternity,  as  one  link  of  that  endless  chain, 
one  atom  in  that  vortex  of  almighty  purposes,  which 
science  will  need  all  time  to  reveal.  For  him  it  is 
either  one  question,  closed  within  itself  by  its  own 
answer,  or  it  is  the  Infinite  Law  of  the  Universe, 


THE  ESTHETIC  REPOSE  83 

—  the  point  or  the  circle.  From  all  points  of  view, 
then,  the  object  of  creation  in  art  or  science  is  a 
girdle  of  impulses  from  which  the  mind  may  not 
stray.  The  two  conditions  of  our  formal  scheme 
are  given  :  a  term  which  disappears,  and  one  which 
is  a  perfect  whole.  Transition  between  background 
and  foreground  of  attention  is  no  longer  possible, 
because  the  background  has  dropped.  Between  the 
objects  of  attention  in  the  foreground  it  has  no 
meaning,  because  the  foreground  is  an  indissoluble 
unity.  With  that  object  the  self  must  feel  itself 
one,  since  the  distinctive  self -feeling  has  disappeared 
with  the  opportunity  for  transition. 

We  have  thus  swung  around  the  circle  of  mysti 
cal,  aBsthetic,  and  creative  emotion,  and  we  have 
found  a  single  formula  to  apply,  and  a  single  ex 
planation  to  avail  for  the  loss  of  personality.  The 
conditions  of  such  experiences  bring  about  the  dis 
appearance  of  one  term,  and  the  impregnable  unity 
of  the  other.  Without  transition  between  two  terms 
in  consciousness,  two  objects  of  attention,  the  loss 
of  the  feeling  of  personality  takes  place  according 
to  natural  psychological  laws.  It  is  no  longer  a 
mystery  that  in  intense  experience  the  feeling  of 
personality  dissolves. 

One  point,  however,  does  remain  still  unex 
plained,  —  the  bliss  of  self-abandonment.  Whence 
are  the  definiteness  and  intensity  of  the  religious 
and  aBsthetic  emotions?  The  surrender  of  the 
sense  of  personality,  it  seems,  is  based  on  purely 


84        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

formal  relations  of  the  elements  of  consciousness, 
common  to  all  three  groups  of  the  analyzed  emo 
tions.  Yet  it  is  precisely  with  a  fading  of  self- 
feeling  that  intensity  and  definiteness  deepen.  But 
how  can  different  and  emotionally  significant  feel 
ings  arise  from  a  single  formal  process?  How  can 
the  worship  of  God  become  ecstatic  joy  through 
the  loss  of  personality  ?  The  solution  of  this  ap 
parent  paradox  is  demanded  not  only  in  logic,  but 
also  by  those  who  would  wish  to  see  the  religious 
trance  distinguished  also  in  its  origin  from  those 
of  baser  content. 

But  it  is,  after  all,  the  formal  nature  of  the  phe 
nomenon  that  gives  us  light.  If  variation  in  the 
degree  of  self-feeling  is  the  common  factor,  and 
the  disappearance  of  the  transition-feeling  its  cause, 
then  the  lowest  member  of  the  scale,  in  which  the 
loss  of  self-feeling  takes  place  with  mathematical 
completeness,  must  be  included.  That  is  the  hyp 
notic  trance.  It  is  not  necessary  at  this  place  to 
emphasize  the  fact  that  our  theory,  if  accepted, 
would  constitute  a  theory  and  a  definition  also  of 
hypnotism.  Of  interest  to  our  inquiry  is  merely  a 
characteristic  mark  of  the  hypnotic  state,  —  its  tre 
mendous  suggestibility.  Why  is  this  ?  Our  theory 
would  answer  that  all  impulses  are  held  in  equi 
librium,  and  that  an  external  suggestion  has  thus 
no  rivals.  Whatever  the  cause,  this  last  is  at  any 
rate  the  fact.  All  suggestions  seem  to  double  in 
emotional  value.  Tell  the  hypnotic  subject  that  he 


THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE  85 

is  sailing  up  the  Rhine,  and  the  most  vivid  admira 
tion  is  in  his  aspect ;  he  gazes  in  heart-felt  devotion 
if  it  is  a  pretty  girl  he  is  bid  to  look  at ;  he  quaffs 
a  glass  of  water  with  livelier  delight  than  he  would 
show  for  the  draught  of  Chateau  Yquem  of  which 
he  is  led  to  think. 

Now  in  religious  and  aesthetic  experience  there 
is  brought  about  the  same  equilibrium  or  unity  of 
impulses,  resulting  in  analogous  loss  of  self-feeling. 
But  it  is  a  most  interesting  fact  that  the  form  of 
the  contemplated  object  is  the  cause  of  this  arrest 
and  repose.  God,  the  circle  of  the  Infinite,  the 
Eternal  One,  enter  into  play  as  "  unity "  alone. 
What,  then,  of  the  content  ?  After  the  analogy  of 
the  extreme  case,  the  content  —  that  is,  emotional 
value  and  definite  emotional  tone — takes  the  place 
of  the  external  suggestion.  Under  just  the  con 
ditions  of  the  religious  trance,  the  element  of  re 
verence,  of  joyous  sentiment,  is  able  suddenly  to 
take  on  a  more  vivid  aspect.  It  may  not  be  that 
the  emotion  itself  is  greater,  but  it  now  holds  the 
field.  It  may  not  be  that  it  is  more  intense,  but 
the  intensity  of  concentration  which  takes  on  its 
color  makes  it  seem  so.  The  "  rapture  "  is  just  the 
sense  of  being  caught  up  into  union  with  the  high 
est;  the  joy  of  the  rapture  is  the  joy  of  every 
thought  of  God,  here  left  free  to  brighten  into 
ecstasy ;  and  its  "  revelation- value  "  is  again  the 
sense  of  immediate  union  with  a  Being  the  intel 
lectual  concept  of  whom  is  immensely  vivified. 


86        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BI1AUTY 

So  may  be  analyzed  the  aesthetic  ecstasy.  The 
tension  of  those  mutually  antagonistic  impulses 
which  make  balance,  and  so  unity,  and  so  the  con 
ditions  for  loss  of  sense  of  self,  clears  the  way 
for  tasting  the  full  savor  of  pleasure  in  bright 
color,  flowing  line,  exquisite  tone-sequence,  mov 
ing  thought.  Many  a  commonplace  experience, 
says  M.  Souriau,  suddenly  takes  on  a  charm  when 
seen  in  the  arrested  aesthetic  vision.  "  Every  one 
can  have  observed  that  an  object  in  itself  agreeable 
to  look  on,  like  a  bouquet  of  flowers,  or  the  fresh 
face  of  a  young  girl,  takes  on  a  sort  of  magic  and 
supernatural  beauty  if  we  regard  it  mechanically 
while  listening  to  music."  :  The  intensity  of  con 
centration  caused  by  the  unity  of  form  fuses  with 
this  suggested  vividness  of  feeling  from  content 
and  material,  and  the  whole  is  felt  as  intensity  of 
aesthetic  emotion.  The  Sistine  Madonna  would 
not  strike  so  deep  in  feeling  were  it  less  crystal 
line  in  its  unity,  less  trance-like  in  its  repose,  and 
so  less  enchanting  in  its  suggestion. 

So  it  is  not  only  the  man  of  achievement  who 
sees  but  one  thing  at  a  time.  To  enter  intensely 
into  any  ideal  experience  means  to  be  blind  to  all 
others.  One  must  lose  one's  own  soul  to  gain  the 
world,  and  none  who  enter  and  return  from  the 
paradise  of  selfless  ecstasy  will  question  that  it  is 
gained.  It  may  be  that  personality  is  a  hindrance 
and  a  barrier,  and  that  we  are  only  truly  in  har- 
*  P.  Souriau,  La  Suggestion  en  VArt. 


THE  AESTHETIC  REPOSE  87 

mony  with  the  secret  of  our  own  existence  when 
we  cease  to  set  ourselves  over  against  the  world. 
Nevertheless,  the  sense  of  individuality  is  a  posses 
sion  for  which  the  most  of  mankind  would  pay  the 
price,  if  it  must  be  paid,  even  of  eternal  suffering. 
The  delicious  hour  of  fusion  with  the  universe  is 
precious,  so  it  seems  to  us  now,  just  because  we 
can  return  from  it  to  our  own  nest,  and,  close  and 
warm  there,  count  up  our  happiness.  The  fragmen- 
tariness  and  multiplicity  of  life  are,  then,  the  sav 
ing  of  the  sense  of  selfhood,  and  we  must  indeed 

"  Rejoice  that  man  is  hurled 
From  change  to  change  unceasingly, 
His  soul's  wings  never  furled." 


IV 
THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART 


IV 

A.    THE  BEAUTY  OF  VISUAL  FORM 


IN  what  consists  the  Beauty  of  Visual  Form? 
The  older  writers  on  what  we  now  know  as  the 
science  of  art  did  not  ask  themselves  this  question. 
Although  we  are  accustomed  to  hear  that  order, 
symmetry,  unity  in  variety,  was  the  Greek,  and  in 
particular  the  Platonic,  formula  for  beauty,  we 
observe,  on  examining  the  passages  cited  in  evi 
dence,  that  it  is  rather  the  moral  quality  appertain 
ing  to  these  characteristics  that  determines  them 
as  beautiful ;  symmetry  is  beautiful,  because  har 
monious,  and  inducing  order  and  self-restraint. 
Aristotle's  single  pronouncement  in  the  sense  of 
our  question  is  the  dictum :  there  is  no  beauty  with 
out  a  certain  magnitude.  Lessing,  in  his  "  Laocoon," 
really  the  first  modern  treatise  in  aesthetics,  dis 
cusses  the  excellences  of  painting  and  poetry,  but 
deals  with  visible  beauty  as  if  it  were  a  fixed  qual 
ity,  understood  when  referred  to,  like  color.  This 
is  undoubtedly  due  to  his  unconscious  reference  of 
beauty  to  the  human  form  alone  ;  a  reference  which 
he  would  have  denied,  but  which  influences  his 
whole  aesthetic  theory.  In  speaking  of  a  beautiful 


92        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

picture,  for  instance,  he  would  have  meant  first  of 
all  the  representation  of  beautiful  persons  in  it, 
hardly  at  all  that  essential  beauty  of  the  picture  as 
painting,  to  which  every  inch  of  the  canvas  is  alike 
precious.  It  is  clear  to  us  now,  however,  that  the 
beauty  of  the  human  form  is  the  most  obscure  of  all 
possible  cases,  complex  in  itself,  and  overlaid  and 
involved  as  it  is  with  innumerable  interests  and 
motives  of  extra-aesthetic  character.  Beauty  in  sim 
ple  forms  must  be  our  first  study  ;  and  great  credit 
is  due  to  Hogarth  for  having  propounded  in  his 
"  Analysis  of  Beauty  "  the  simple  question,  —  what 
makes  the  quality  of  beauty  to  the  eye  ? 

But  in  visible  beauty,  the  aesthetic  value  of  pure 
form  is  not  the  only  element  involved  :  or  at  least 
it  must  be  settled  whether  or  not  it  is  the  only 
element  involved.  If  in  a  work  of  art,  as  we  be 
lieve,  what  belongs  to  its  excellence  belongs  to  its 
beauty,  we  may  not  applaud  one  painter,  for  in 
stance,  for  his  marvelous  color-schemes,  another 
for  his  expression  of  emotion,  another  for  his  delin 
eation  of  character,  without  acknowledging  that  ex 
pression  of  character  and  emotion  come  within  our 
concept  of  visible  beauty.  Franz  von  Lenbach  was 
once  asked  what  he  thought  likely  to  be  the  fate  of 
his  own  work.  "  As  for  that,"  he  replied,  "  I  think 
I  may  possibly  have  a  chance  of  living ;  but  only 
if  Individualization  or  Characterization  be  deemed 
to  constitute  a  quality  of  permanent  value  in  a 
picture.  This,  however,  I  shall  never  know,  for  it 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE   ART  93 

can  only  be  adjudged  by  posterity.  If  that  verdict 
should  prove  unfavorable,  then  my  work,  too,  will 
perish  with  the  rest, — for  it  cannot  compare  on 
their  lines  with  the  great  masters  of  the  past." 
That  this  is  indeed  an  issue  is  shown  by  the  con 
trasting  opinion  of  the  critic  who  exclaimed  before 
a  portrait,  "  Think  away  the  head  and  face,  and 
you  will  have  a  wonderful  effect  of  color ! "  The 
analysis  of  visible  beauty  accordingly  resolves  itself 
into  the  explanation  of  the  beauty  of  form  (includ 
ing  shape  and  color)  and  the  fixing  in  relation 
thereto  of  other  factors. 

The  most  difficult  part  of  our  task  is  indeed 
behind  us.  We  have  already  defined  Beauty  in 
general :  we  have  outlined  in  a  preceding  essay  the 
abstract  aesthetic  demands,  and  we  have  now  only 
to  ask  through  what  psychological  means  these  de 
mands  can  be  and  are  in  fact  met.  In  other  words 
we  have  to  show  that  what  we  intensely  feel  as 
Beauty  can  and  does  exemplify  these  principles, 
and  through  them  is  explained  and  accounted  for. 
Beauty  has  been  defined  as  that  combination  of 
qualities  in  the  object  which  brings  about  a  union 
of  stimulation  and  repose  in  the  enjoyer.  How 
must  this  be  interpreted  with  reference  to  the  par 
ticular  facts  of  visual  form  ? 

The  most  immediate  reference  is  naturally  to  the 
sense  organ  itself ;  and  the  first  question  is  there 
fore  as  to  the  favorable  stimulations  of  the  eye. 
What,  in  general,  does  the  eye  demand  o£  its  object  ? 


94   THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 


II 

The  simplest  element  of  visual  experience  is  of 
course  found  in  light  and  color,  the  sensation  of  the 
eye  as  such.  Yet  there  is  no  branch  of  aesthetic 
which  is  so  incomplete.  We  know  that  the  sensa 
tion  of  light  or  color,  if  not  too  weak  or  too  vio 
lent,  is  in  itself  pleasing.  The  bright,  the  glitter 
ing,  shining  object,  so  long  as  it  is  not  painful, 
is  pleasantly  stimulating.  Gems,  tinsel,  lacquer, 
polish,  testify  to  this  taste,  from  the  most  primitive 
to  the  most  civilized  man.  Color,  too,  if  distinct, 
not  over-bright,  nor  too  much  extended  in  field,  is 
in  itself  pleasing.  The  single  colors  have  been  the 
object  of  comparatively  little  study.  Experiment 
seems  to  show  that  the  colors  containing  most 
brightness  —  white,  red,  and  yellow  —  are  pre 
ferred.  Baldwin,  in  his  "  dynamogenic "  experi 
ments,  1  based  on  "  the  view  that  the  infant's  hand 
movements  in  reaching  or  grasping  are  the  best 
index  of  the  kind  and  intensity  of  its  sensory  ex 
periences,"  finds  that  the  colors  range  themselves 
in  order  of  attractiveness,  blue,  white,  red,  green, 
brown.  Further  corrections  lay  more  emphasis  upon 
the  white.  Yellow  was  not  included  in  the  experi 
ments.  Cohn's  results,  which  show  a  relative  dislike 
of  yellow,  are  contradicted  by  other  observers,  nota- 

1  Mental  Development  in  the  Child  and  the  Race,  1895,  pp.  3$ 
50,  ff. 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE   ART  95 

bly  Major  and  Baker,1  and  (unpublished)  experi 
ments  of  my  own,  including  the  aesthetic  preferences 
of  seven  or  eight  different  sets  of  students  at  Rad- 
cliffe  and  Wellesley  colleges.  Experiments  of  this 
kind  are  particularly  difficult,  inasmuch  as  the 
material,  usually  colored  paper,  varies  considerably 
from  the  spectral  color,  and  differences  in  satura 
tion,  hue,  and  brightness  make  great  differences  in 
the  results,  while  the  feeling-tone  of  association,  in 
dividual  or  racial,  very  often  intrudes.  But  other 
things  being  equal,  the  bright,  the  clear,  the  satu 
rated  color  is  relatively  more  pleasing,  and  white, 
red,  and  yellow  seem  especially  preferred. 

Now,  according  to  the  Hering  theory  of  color, 
white,  red,  and  yellow  are  the  so-called  "  dissimi- 
lating  "  colors  in  the  three  pairs,  white-black,  red- 
green,  and  yellow-blue,  corresponding  to  three  hy 
pothetical  visual  substances  in  the  retina.  These 
substances,  that  is,  in  undergoing  a  kind  of  chemi 
cal  disintegration  under  the  action  of  light-rays, 
are  supposed  to  give  the  sensations  white,  red,  or 
yellow  respectively,  and  in  renewing  themselves 
again  to  give  the  sensations  of  black,  green,  and 
blue.  The  dissimilating  process  seems  to  bring 
about  stronger  reactions  on  the  physiological  side, 
as  if  it  were  a  more  exciting  process.  Thus  it  is 
found  2  that  as  measured  by  the  increase  in  strength 

1  E.  S.  Baker,  Univ.  of  Toronto  Studies,  Psychol.  Series,  No.  4 ; 
J.  Cohn,  Philos.  Studien,  vol.  x  ;  Major,  Amer.  Journ.  of  Psychol., 
vol.  vii. 

2  Ch.  F<5r<5,  Sensation  et  Mouvement,  1887,  p.  80. 


96         THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

of  the  hand  grip  under  the  stimulation  of  the 
respective  colors,  red  has  particularly  exciting 
qualities,  but  the  other  colors  have  an  analogous 
effect,  lessening,  however,  with  the  descent  from 
red  to  violet.  The  pleasure  in  bright  red,  or  yel 
low,  for  instance,  may  thus  well  be  the  feeling-tone 
arising  in  the  purely  physiological  effect  of  the 
color.  If  red  works  like  a  trumpet  call,  while 
blue  calms  and  cools,  and  if  red  is  preferred  to 
blue,  it  is  because  a  sharp  stimulation  is  so  felt, 
and  so  preferred. 

The  question  of  the  demands  of  the  eye  in  color 
combination  is  still  more  complicated.  It  has  been 
traditional  to  consider  the  complementaries  black- 
white,  red-green,  blue-yellow,  and  the  other  pairs 
resulting  from  the  mixtures  of  these  as  the  best 
combinations.  The  physiological  explanation  is  of 
course  found  in  the  relief  and  refreshment  to  the 
organs  in  successive  alternation  of  the  processes  of 
assimilation  and  dissimilation,  and  objectively  in 
the  reinforcement,  through  this  stronger  function 
ing  of  the  retina,  of  the  complementary  colors 
themselves.  This  tendency  to  mutual  aid  is  shown 
in  the  familiar  experiment  of  fixating  for  some 
moments  a  colored  object,  say  red,  and  then  trans 
ferring  the  gaze  to  a  white  or  gray  expanse.  The 
image  of  the  object  appears  thereon  in  the  comple 
mentary  green.  Per  contra,  the  most  complete 
lack  of  contrast  makes  the  most  unpleasing  combi 
nation,  because  instead  of  a  refreshing  alternation 


THE   BEAUTY  OF   FINE   ART  97 

of  processes  in  the  retina,  a  fatiguing  repetition 
results.  Red  and  orange  (red-yellow),  or  red  and 
purple  (red-blue),  successively  stimulate  the  red' 
process  with  most  evil  effect. 

This  contrast  theory  should,  however,  not  be 
interpreted  too  narrowly.  There  are  pairs  of  so- 
called  complementaries  which  make  a  very  crude, 
harsh,  even  painful  impression.  The  theory  is 
happily  supplemented  by  showing  *  that  the  ideal 
combination  involves  all  three  contrast  factors, 
hue,  saturation,  and  brightness.  Contrast  of  satu 
ration  or  brightness  within  the  same  hue  is  also 
pleasant.  For  any  two  qualities  of  the  color  circle, 
in  fact,  there  can  be  found  degrees  of  saturation 
and  brightness  in  which  they  will  form  an  agree 
able  combination,  and  this  pleasing  effect  will  be 
based  on  some  form  of  contrast.  But  the  abso 
lute  and  relative  extension  and  the  space-form  of 
the  components  have  also  a  great  influence  on  the 
pleasurableness  of  combinations. 

Further  rules  can  hardly  be  given ;  but  the  re 
sults  of  various  observers  2  seem  to  show  that  the 
best  combinations  lie,  as  already  said,  among  the 
complementaries,  or  among  those  pairs  nearer  to 
gether  in  the  color  circle  than  complementaries, 
which  are  "  warmer."  The  reason  for  this  last  is 


1  A.  Kirschmann,  "Die  psychol.-sesthet.  Bedeutung  des  Licht 
nnd  Farbencontrastes,"  Philos.  Studien,  vol.  vii. 

2  Chevreul,  De  la  Lot   du  Contraste  Simultant  des  Couleurs. 
E.  S.  Baker,  op,  cit. 


98        THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

that,  in  Chevreul's  phraseology,  combinations  of 
cold  colors  change  each  other's  peculiar  hue  the 
most,  and  of  warm  colors  the  least ;  because  the 
complementaries  of  these  cold  colors  are  "  warm," 
i.  e.  bright,  and  each,  appearing  on  the  field  of  the 
neighboring  cold  color,  seems  to  fade  it  out ;  while 
the  complementaries  of  the  juxtaposed  warm  colors 
are  not  bright,  and  do  not  have  sufficient  strength 
to  affect  their  neighbors  at  all.  With  a  combination 
of  blue  and  green  for  instance,  a  yellow  shade  would 
appear  in  the  green  and  a  red  in  the  blue.  Such  a 
result  fails  to  satisfy  the  demand,  already  touched 
on,  for  purity  and  homogeneity  of  color,  — that  is, 
for  unimpeded  seeing  of  color. 

What  significance  have  these  abstract  principles 
of  beauty  in  the  combination  of  colors  for  repre 
sentative  art  ?  In  the  choice  of  objects  with  a  defi 
nite  local  color,  of  course,  these  laws  will  be  found 
operative.  A  scheme  of  blues  and  yellows  is  likely 
to  be  more  effective  than  one  of  reds  and  violets. 
If  we  analyze  the  masterpieces  of  coloring,  we  shall 
find  that  what  we  at  first  supposed  to  be  the  won 
derful  single  effects  of  color  is  really  the  result 
of  juxtapositions  which  bring  out  each  color  to  its 
highest  power. 

m 

While  all  this  may  be  true,  however,  the  most 
important  question  has  not  yet  been  asked.  Is 
truth  of  color  in  representative  art  the  same  thing 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   FINE   ART          99 

as  beauty  of  color?  It  might  be  said  that  the 
whole  procedure  of  the  so-called  Impressionist 
school,  in  fact  the  whole  trend  of  the  modern 
treatment  of  color,  took  their  identity  for  granted. 
Yet  we  must  discriminate.  Truth  of  color  may 
be  truth  to  the  local  color  of  the  given  objects, 
alone  or  together ;  in  this  case  we  should  have  to 
say  that  beauty  did  or  did  not  exist  in  the  picture, 
according  as  it  did  or  did  not  exist  in  the  original 
combination.  A  red  hat  on  a  purple  chair  would 
set  one's  teeth  on  edge,  in  model  or  picture.  Sec 
ondly,  truth  of  color  may  be  truth  to  the  modifi 
cations  of  the  enveloping  light,  and  in  this  case 
truth  would  make  for  beauty.  For  the  colors  of 
any  given  scene  are  in  general  not  colors  which 
the  objects  themselves,  if  isolated,  would  have,  but 
the  colors  which  the  eye  itself  is  forced  to  see. 
The  bluish  shadow  of  an  object  in  bright  sunlight 
(yellowish  light)  is  only  an  expression  of  the  law 
that  in  the  neighborhood  of  a  colored  object  we 
see  its  complementary  color.  If  such  an  effect  is 
reproduced  in  a  picture,  it  gives  the  same  relief  to 
the  eye  which  the  original  effect  showed  the  need 
of.  The  eye  fatigued  with  yellow  sees  blue ;  so  if 
the  blue  is  really  supplied  in  the  picture,  it  is  not 
only  true,  but  on  the  road  to  beauty,  because  meet 
ing  the  eye's  demand.  The  older  methods  of  paint 
ing  gave  the  local  color  of  an  object,  with  an 
admixture  of  white  for  the  lights,  and  a  warm 
dark  for  the  shadows;  the  modern  —  which  had 


100      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

been  touched  on,  indeed,  sporadically,  by  Perugino 
and  Vermeer,  for  instance,  —  gives  in  the  shadow 
the  complementary  color  of  the  object  combined 
with  that  of  the  light  falling  upon  it  —  all  condi 
tions  of  favorable  stimulation. 

Further  favorable  stimulation  of  the  eye  is 
given  in  the  method  of  the  Impressionists  in  treat 
ing  "  values,"  that  is,  comparative  relations  of  light 
and  shade.  The  real  tones  of  objects  including  the 
sky,  light,  etc.,  can  never  be  reproduced.  The  older 
schools,  conscious  of  this,  were  satisfied  to  paint 
in  a  scale  of  correspondence,  in  which  the  relative 
values  were  fairly  kept.  But  even  by  that  means, 
the  great  differences  of  intensity  could  not  be  given, 
for  the  brightest  spot  of  any  painting  is  never  more 
than  sixty-six  times  brighter  than  the  darkest,  while 
the  gray  sky  on  a  dull  rainy  day  is  four  hundred  and 
twenty  times  brighter  than  a  white  painted  cross-bar 
of  a  window  seen  against  the  sky  as  background.1 
There  were  various  ways  of  combating  this  difficulty, 
Rembrandt,  for  instance,  as  Kirschmann  tells  us, 
chose  the  sombre  brown  tone,  "  not  out  of  caprice 
or  an  inclination  for  mystic  dreaming  (Fromentin), 
but  because  the  yellow  and  orange  side  of  the 
color-manifold  admits  of  the  greatest  number  of 
intervals  between  full  saturation  and  the  darkest 
shade."  The  precursors  of  the  Impressionists,  on 
the  other  hand,  succeeded  in  painting  absolute 

1  Kirschmann,  Univ.  of  Toronto  Studies,  Pyschol.  Series,  Na 
4,  p.  20. 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   FINE   ART          101 

values,  confining  themselves  to  a  very  limited 
gamut ;  for  this  reason  the  first  landscapes  of  the 
school  were  all  gray-green,  dull,  cloudy.  But 
Monet  did  not  stop  there.  He  painted  the  abso 
lute  values  of  objects  in  shade  on  a  sunny  day. 
which  of  course  demands  the  brightest  possibilities 
of  the  palette,  and  got  the  lighted  objects  them 
selves  as  nearly  as  he  could,  —  thus  destroying  the 
relative  values,  but  getting  an  extraordinarily  joy 
ous  and  glowing  effect;  and  one,  too,  of  unex 
pected  verisimilitude,  for  it  would  seem  that  in 
a  sunlit  scene  we  are  really  attentive  to  the  shaded 
objects  alone,  and  what  becomes  of  the  others  does 
not  so  much  matter.  This  effect  was  made  still 
more  possible  by  the  so-called  dissociation  of  col 
ors,  —  i.  e.  the  juxtaposing  of  tints,  the  blending 
of  which  by  the  eye  gives  the  desired  color,  with 
out  the  loss  of  brightness  which  a  mixing  of  pig 
ments  would  involve.  Thus  by  putting  touches  of 
black  and  white  side  by  side,  for  instance,  a  gray 
results  much  brighter  than  could  have  been  other 
wise  reached  by  mixing ;  or  blue  and  red  spots  are 
blended  by  the  eye  to  an  extraordinarily  vivid  pur 
ple.  Thus,  by  these  methods,  using  the  truth  of 
color  in  the  sense  of  following  the  nature  of  retinal 
functioning,  Monet  and  his  followers  raised  the 
color  scale  many  degrees  in  brightness.  Now  we 
have  seen  that  the  eye  loves  light,  warmth,  strong 
color-effects,  related  to  each  other  in  the  way  that 
the  eye  must  see  them.  Impressionism,  as  the 


102      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

name  of  the  method  just  described,  makes  it  more 
possible  than  it  had  been  before  to  meet  the  de 
mands  of  the  eye  for  light  and  color,  to  recover 
"  the  innocence  of  the  eye,"  in  Ruskin's  phrase. 
Truth  to  the  local  color  of  objects  is  relatively 
indifferent,  unless  that  color  is  beautiful  in  itself ; 
truth  to  the  reciprocal  relations  and  changes  of  hue 
is  beauty,  because  it  allows  for  the  eye's  own  adap 
tations  of  its  surroundings  in  the  interest  of  its 
own  functioning.  Thus  in  this  case,  and  to  sum 
up,  truth  is  synonymous  with  beauty,  in  so  far  as 
beauty  is  constituted  by  favorable  stimulation  of 
an  organ.  The  further  question,  how  far  this  vivid 
treatment  of  light  is  of  importance  for  the  realiza 
tion  of  depth  and  distance,  is  not  here  entered  on. 


IV 

The  moment  we  touch  upon  line-form  we  are 
already,  in  strictness,  beyond  the  elements.  For 
with  form  enters  the  motor  factor,  which  cannot 
be  separated  from  the  motor  innervations  of  the 
whole  body.  It  is  possible,  however,  to  abstract  for 
the  moment  from  the  form  as  a  unit,  and  to  con 
sider  here  only  what  may  be  called  the  quality 
of  line.  A  line  may  be  straight  or  broken,  and 
if  curved,  curving  continuously  or  brokenly,  etc. 
That  this  quality  of  line  is  distinct  from  form  may 
be  shown  by  the  simple  experiment  of  turning  a 
spiral  —  a  logarithmic  spiral,  let  us  say  —  in  differ- 


THE   BEAUTY  OF   FINE  ART          103 

ent  ways  about  its  focus.  The  aesthetic  effect  of  the 
figure  is  absolutely  different  in  the  different  posi 
tions,  and  yet  the  feeling  about  the  character  of 
the  line  itself  seems  to  remain  the  same.  In  what 
sense,  and  for  what  reasons,  does  this  curved  line 
satisfy  the  demands  of  the  eye  ?  The  discussion  of 
this  question  precipitates  us  at  once  into  one  of  the 
burning  controversies  of  aesthetics,  which  may  per 
haps  best  be  dealt  with  at  this  point. 

An  early  answer  to  the  question  would  have 
been,  that  the  eye  is  so  hung  in  its  muscles  as  to 
move  most  easily  in  curved  lines,  and  this  easy 
action  in  following  the  curve  is  felt  as  favorable 
stimulation.  But  recent  experiment 1  has  shown 
that  the  eye  in  fact  moves  by  most  irregular, 
angular  leaps  from  point  to  point  of  the  figure. 
The  theory  is  therefore  remodeled  by  substituting 
for  the  movement  sensations  of  the  eye,  the  ten 
dencies  corresponding  to  those  early  movements 
of  touching  imitative  of  the  form,  by  which  we 
learned  to  know  a  form  for  what  it  is,  and  the 
reproduction  of  feeling-tones  belonging  to  the  char 
acter  of  such  movement.  The  movements  of  touch 
ing  and  feeling  for  a  smooth  continuous  curved 
object  are  themselves  pleasant.  This  complex  of 
psychical  factors  makes  a  pleasurably  stimulating 
experience.  The  greater  the  tendency  to  complete 
reproduction  of  these  movements,  that  is,  the 
stronger  the  "  bodily  resonance,"  the  more  vivid 

1  Q.  M.  Stratton,  Philos.  Studien,  xx. 


104      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

the  pleasure.  Whether  we  (with  Groos)  desig 
nate  this  as  sympathetic  reproduction,  or  (with 
Lipps)  attribute  to  the  figure  the  movements  and 
the  feelings  which  resound  in  us  after  this  fashion, 
or  even  (with  Witasek)  insist  on  the  purely  ideal 
character  of  the  reproduction,  seems  to  me  not  es 
sential  to  the  explanation  of  the  pleasing  charac 
ter  of  the  experience,  and  hence  of  the  beauty  of 
the  object.  Not  that  we  sympathetically  reproduce 
("  Miterleben  "  ),  or  "  feel  ourselves  into  "  a  form 
(  "  Einfiihlen  "  ),  but  how  we  do  so,  is  the  question. 

All  that  Hogarth  says  of  the  beauty  of  the  ser 
pentine  line,  as  "  leading  the  eye  a  kind  of  chase," 
is  fully  in  harmony  with  this  view,  if  we  add  to  the 
exploiting  movements  of  the  eye  those  other  more 
important  motor  innervations  of  the  body.  But  we 
should  still  have  to  ask,  what  kind  of  chase? 
Sharp,  broken,  starting  lines  might  be  the  basis 
of  a  much  more  vivid  experience,  —  but  it  would 
be  aesthetically  negative.  "  The  complete  sensuous 
experience  of  the  spatial"  is  not  enough,  unless 
that  experience  is  positively,  that  is,  favorably 
toned.  Clear  or  vivid  seeing  made  possible  by  the 
form  of  the  object  is  not  enough.  Only  as  favor- 
ably  stimulating,  that  is,  only  as  calling  up  ideal 
reproductions,  or  physical  imitations,  of  movements 
which  in  themselves  were  suited  to  the  functions 
of  the  organs  involved,  can  forms  be  found  posi* 
tively  aesthetic,  that  is,  beautiful. 

Moreover,  we  have  to  note  here,  and  to  emphasize, 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   FINE   ART          105 

that  the  organs  involved  are  more  than  the  eye,  as 
has  already  been  made  plain.  We  cannot  sepa 
rate  eye  innervations  from  bodily  innervations  in 
general.  And  therefore  "  the  demands  of  the  eye  " 
can  never  alone  decide  the  question  of  the  beauty 
of  visual  form.  If  it  were  not  so,  the  favorable 
stimulation  combined  with  repose  of  the  eye  would 
alone  make  the  conditions  of  beauty.  The  "de 
mands  of  the  eye"  must  be  interpreted  as  the 
demands  of  the  eye  plus  the  demands  of  the  motor 
system,  — the  whole  psychophysical  personality,  in 
short. 

It  is  in  these  two  principles, — "  bodily  resonance," 
and  favorable  as  opposed  to  energetic  functioning,  — 
and  these  alone,  that  we  have  a  complete  refutation 
of  the  claim  made  by  many  artists  to-day,  that  the 
phrase  "  demands  of  the  eye"  embodies  a  complete 
aesthetic  theory.  The  sculptor  Adolph  Hildebrand, 
in  his  "Problem  of  Form  in  the  Plastic  Art" 
first  set  it  forth  as  the  task  of  the  artist  "  to  find  a 
form  which  appears  to  have  arisen  only  from  the 
demands  of  the  eye  ; "  l  and  this  doctrine  is  to-day 
so  widely  held,  that  it  must  here  be  considered  at 
some  length. 

It  is  the  space-form,  all  that  is  seen,  and  not  the 
object  itself,  that  is  the  object  of  vision.  Now  in 
viewing  a  plastic  object  near  at  hand,  the  focus  of 
the  eye  must  be  constantly  changed  between  the 
nearer  and  further  points.  In  a  more  distant  view, 
1  Das  Problem  der  Form  in  d.  bildenden  Kunst,  1897. 


106      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

on  the  other  hand  (Hildebrand's  "  Fernbild "), 
the  contour  is  denoted  by  differences  of  light  and 
shadow,  but  it  is  nevertheless  perceived  in  a  single 
act  of  accommodation.  Moreover,  being  distant,  the 
muscles  of  accommodation  are  relaxed  ;  the  eye 
acts  at  rest.  The  "  Fernbild  "  thus  gives  the  only 
unified  picture  of  the  three-dimensional  complex, 
and  hence  the  only  unity  of  space-values.  In  the 
perception  of  this  unity,  the  author  holds,  consists 
the  essential  pleasure  which  the  work  of  art  gives 
us.  Hildebrand's  treatment  is  difficult,  and  lends 
itself  to  varying  interpretations,  which  have  laid 
stress  now  on  unity  as  the  essential  of  art,1  now  on 
"  the  joy  in  the  complete  sensuous  experience  of 
the  spatial."  2  The  latter  seems  in  harmony  with 
the  passage  in  which  Hildebrand  says  "  all  plea 
sure  in  Form  is  pleasure  in  our  not  being  obliged 
to  create  this  clearness  for  ourselves,  in  its  being 
created  for  us,  nay,  even  forced  upon  us,  by  the 
form  itself." 

But  supposing  the  first  interpretation  correct: 
supposing  space-unity,  conditioned  by  the  unified 
and  reposeful  act  of  seeing,  to  be  the  beauty  we 
seek  — it  is  at  once  clear  that  the  reduction  of  three 
dimensions  to  two  does  not  constitute  unity  even 
for  the  eye  alone  ;  how  much  less  for  the  motor  sys 
tem  of  the  whole  body,  which  we  have  seen  must  be 
involved.  Hildebrand's  "  demands  of  the  eye  "  re- 

1  A.  Kiehl,  Vierteljahrschr.f.  wissensch.  Philos.,  xxi,  xxii. 

2  K.  Groos,  Der  JSsthetische  Genuss,  1902,  p.  17. 


THE  BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART         107 

solves  itself  into  the  stimulation  plus  repose  of  the 
ciliary  muscle,  —  the  organ  of  accommodation.  A 
real  unity  even  for  the  eye  alone  would  have  to  in 
clude  not  only  space  relations  in  the  third  dimen 
sion,  but  relations  of  line  and  mass  and  color  in 
the  flat.  As  for  the  "  complete  sensuous  experience 
of  the  spatial  "  (which  would  seem  to  be  equivalent 
to  Berenson's  "  tactile  values  "),  the  "  clearness  " 
of  Hildebrand's  sentence  above  quoted,  it  is  evi 
dent  that  completeness  of  the  experience  does  not 
necessarily  involve  the  positive  or  pleasurable  ton 
ing  of  the  experience.  The  distinction  is  that  be 
tween  a  beautiful  and  a  completely  realistic  pic 
ture. 

A  further  extension  or  restatement  of  this  theory, 
in  a  recent  article,1  seems  to  me  to  express  it  in  the 
most  favorable  way.  Beauty  is  again  connected 
with  the  functioning  of  our  organs  of  perception 
(Auffassungsorgane).  "  We  wish  to  be  put  into 
a  fresh,  lively,  energetic  and  yet  at  the  same  time 
effortless  activity.  .  .  .  The  pleasure  in  form  is  a 
pleasure  in  this,  that  the  conformation  of  the  ob 
ject  makes  possible  or  rather  compels  a  natural 
purposeful  functioning  of  our  apprehending  or 
gans."  But  purposeful  for  what  ?  For  visual  form, 
evidently  to  the  end  of  seeing  clearly.  The  element 
of  repose,  of  unity,  hinted  at  in  the  "  effortless  " 
of  the  first  sentence,  disappears  in  the  second.  The 

1  Th.  A.  Meyer,  "Das  Formprinzip  des  Schonen,"  Archiv.  f. 
Phil.,  Ed.  x. 


108      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

organs  of  apprehension  are  evidently  limited  to  the 
eye  alone.  It  is  not  the  perfect  moment  of  stimu 
lation  and  repose  for  the  whole  organism  which  is 
aimed  at,  but  the  complete  sensuous  experience  of 
the  spatial,  again. 

Hildebrand,  to  return  to  the  more  famous  theo 
rist,  was  writing  primarily  of  sculpture,  and  would 
naturally  confine  himself  to  consideration  of  the 
plastic,  which  is  an  additional  reason  against  mak 
ing  this  interesting  brochure,  as  some  have  done, 
the  foundation  of  an  aesthetics.  It  is  rather  the 
foundation  of  the  sculptor's,  perhaps  even  of  the 
painter's  technique,  with  reference  to  plastic  ele 
ments  alone.  What  it  contains  of  universal  sig 
nificance,  the  demand  for  space-unity,  based  on  the 
state  of  the  eye  in  a  union  of  rest  and  action,  ignores 
all  but  one  of  the  possible  sources  of  rest  and  ac 
tion  for  the  eye,  that  of  accommodation,  and  all  the 
allied  activities  completely. 

On  the  basis  of  the  favorable  stimulations  of 
all  these  activities  taken  together,  must  we  judge 
as  pleasing  the  so-called  quality  of  line.  But  it  is 
clear  that  we  cannot  really  separate  the  question 
of  quality  of  line  from  that  of  form,  figure,  and  ar 
rangement  in  space.  The  motor  innervations  enter 
with  the  first,  and  the  moment  we  have  form  at 
all,  we  have  space-composition  also.  But  space- 
composition  means  unity,  and  unity  is  the  objective 
quality  which  must  be  translated,  in  our  investiga 
tions,  into  esthetic  repose.  It  is  thus  with  the  study 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   FINE   ART          109 

of  composition  that  we  pass  from  the  study  of  the 
elements  as  favorably  stimulating,  to  the  study  of 
the  beauty  of  visual  form. 


We  may  begin  by  asking  what,  as  a  matter  of 
fact,  has  been  the  arrangement  of  spaces  to  give 
aesthetic  pleasure.  The  primitive  art  of  all  nations 
shows  that  it  has  taken  the  direction  of  symmetry 
about  a  vertical  line.  It  might  be  said  that  this  is 
the  result  of  non-a3sthetic  influences,  such  as  con 
venience  of  construction,  technique,  etc.  1  It  is 
clear  that  much  of  the  symmetry  appearing  in 
primitive  art  is  due  (1)  to  the  conditions  of  con 
struction,  as  in  the  form  of  dwellings,  binding 
patterns,  weaving  and  textile  patterns  generally ; 
(2)  to  convenience  in  use,  as  in  the  shapes  of  spears, 
arrows,  knives,  two-handled  baskets  or  jars ;  (3) 
to  the  imitation  of  animal  forms,  as  in  the  shapes 
of  pottery,  etc.  On  the  other  hand,  (1)  a  very 
great  deal  of  symmetrical  ornament  maintains  itself 
against  the  suggestions  of  the  shape  to  which  it  is 
applied,  as  the  ornaments  of  baskets,  pottery,  and 
all  rounded  objects  ;  and  (2)  all  distortion,  disin 
tegration,  degradation  of  pattern-motives,  often  so 
marked  as  all  but  to  destroy  their  meaning,  is  in 
the  direction  of  geometrical  symmetry.  The  early 

1  The  following  is  adapted  from  the  author's  Studies  in  Symme 
try,  Harvard  Psychol  Studies,  vol.  i,  1902. 


110      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

art  of  all  civilized  nations  shows  the  same  charac 
teristic.  Now  it  might  be  said  that,  as  there  exists 
an  instinctive  tendency  to  imitate  visual  forms  by 
motor  impulses,  the  impulses  suggested  by  the 
symmetrical  form  are  in  harmony  with  the  system 
of  energies  of  our  bilateral  organism,  which  is  a 
system  of  double  motor  innervations,  and  thus  ful 
fill  our  demand  for  a  set  of  reactions  correspond 
ing  to  the  organism  as  a  whole.  But  we  should 
then  expect  that  all  space  arrangements  which  devi 
ate  from  complete  symmetry,  and  thus  suggest  motor 
impulses  which  do  not  correspond  to  the  natural 
bilateral  type,  would  fail  to  give  aesthetic  pleasure. 
Such,  however,  is  not  the  case.  Non-symmetrical 
arrangements  of  space  are  often  extremely  pleasing. 

This  contradiction  disappears  if  we  are  able  to 
show  that  the  apparently  non-symmetrical  arrange 
ment  contains  a  hidden  symmetry,  and  that  all  the 
elements  of  that  arrangement  contribute  to  bring 
about  just  that  bilateral  type  of  motor  impulses 
which  is  characteristic  of  geometrical  symmetry. 

A  series  of  experiments  was  arranged,  in  which 
one  of  two  unequal  lines  of  white  on  a  black  back 
ground  being  fixed  in  an  upright  position  a  cer 
tain  distance  from  the  centre,  the  other  was  shifted 
until  the  arrangement  was  felt  to  be  pleasing. 
It  was  found  that  when  two  lines  of  different 
sizes  were  opposed,  their  relative  positions  corre 
sponded  to  the  relation  of  the  arms  of  a  balance, 
that  is,  a  small  line  far  from  the  centre  was  opposed 


THE  BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART         111 

by  a  large  one  near  the  centre.  A  line  pointing 
out  from  the  centre  fitted  this  formula  if  taken 
as  "  heavy,"  and  pointing  in,  if  taken  as  "  light." 
Similarly,  objects  of  intrinsic  interest  and  objects 
suggesting  depth  in  the  third  dimension  were 
"  heavy "  in  the  same  interpretation.  All  this, 
however,  did  not  go  beyond  the  proof  that  all 
pleasing  space-arrangements  can  be  described  in 
terms  of  mechanical  balance.  But  what  was  this 
mechanical  balance  ?  A  metaphor  explains  nothing, 
and  no  one  will  maintain  that  the  visual  represen 
tation  of  a  long  line  weighs  more  than  a  short  one. 
Moreover,  the  elements  in  the  balance  were  so  far 
heterogeneous.  The  movement  suggested  by  an 
idea  had  been  treated  as  if  equivalent  to  the  move 
ment  actually  made  by  the  eye  in  following  a  long 
line ;  the  intrinsic  interest  —  that  is,  the  ideal  in 
terest  —  of  an  object  insignificant  in  form  was 
equated  to  the  attractive  power  of  a  perspective, 
which  has,  presumably,  a  merely  physiological  ef 
fect  on  the  visual  mechanism. 

I  believe,  however,  that  the  justification  of  this 
apparent  heterogeneity,  and  the  basis  for  explana 
tion,  is  given  in  the  reduction  of  all  elements  to 
their  lowest  term,  —  as  objects  for  the  expenditure 
of  attention.  A  large  object  and  an  "  interesting  " 
object  are  "  heavy  "  for  the  same  reason,  because 
they  call  out  the  attention.  And  expenditure  of 
effort  is  expenditure  of  attention  ;  thus,  if  an  ob 
ject  on  the  outskirts  of  the  field  of  vision  requires 


112      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

a  wide  sweep  of  the  eye  to  take  it  in,  it  demands 
the  expenditure  of  attention,  and  so  is  felt  as 
"  heavy."  But  what  is  "  the  expenditure  of  atten 
tion  "  in  physiological  terms  ?  It  is  nothing  more 
than  the  measure  of  the  motor  impulses  directed  to 
the  object  of  attention.  And  whether  the  motor 
impulse  appears  as  the  tendency  to  fixate  an  object 
or  as  the  tendency  to  follow  out  the  suggestions 
of  motion  in  the  object,  all  reduces  to  the  same 
physiological  basis. 

It  may  here  be  objected  that  our  motor  impulses 
are,  nevertheless,  still  heterogeneous,  inasmuch  as 
some  are  toward  the  object  of  interest,  and  some 
along  the  line  of  movement.  But  it  must  be  said, 
first,  that  these  are  not  felt  in  the  body,  but  trans 
ferred  as  values  of  weight  to  points  in  the  picture,  — 
it  is  the  amount  and  not  the  direction  of  excitement 
that  is  counted ;  and  secondly,  that  even  if  it  were 
not  so,  the  suggested  movement  along  a  line  is  felt 
as  "  weight "  at  a  particular  point. 

From  this  point  of  view  the  justification  of  the 
metaphor  of  mechanical  balance  is  quite  clear. 
Given  two  lines,  the  most  pleasing  arrangement 
makes  the  larger  nearer  the  centre,  and  the  smaller 
far  from  it.  This  is  balanced  because  the  spon 
taneous  impulse  of  attention  to  the  near,  large 
line  equals  in  amount  the  involuntary  expendi 
ture  of  attention  to  apprehend  the  small,  farther 
one. 

We  may  thus  think  of  a  space  to  be  composed 


THE  BEAUTY   OF  FINE   ART         113 

as  a  kind  of  target,  in  which  certain  spots  or  terri 
tories  count  more  or  less,  both  according  to  their 
distance  from  the  centre  and  according  to  what  fills 
them.  Every  element  of  a  picture,  in  whatever  way 
it  gains  power  to  excite  motor  impulses,  is  felt  as 
expressing  that  power  in  the  flat  pattern.  A  noble 
vista  is  understood  and  enjoyed  as  a  vista,  but  it  is 
counted  in  the  motor  equation,  our  "  balance,"  as  a 
spot  of  so  much  intrinsic  value  at  such  and  such 
a  distance  from  the  centre.  The  skillful  artist  will 
fill  his  target  in  the  way  to  give  the  maximum 
of  motor  impulses  with  the  perfection  of  balance 
between  them. 

It  is  thus  in  a  kind  of  substitutional  symmetry, 
or  balance,  that  we  have  the  objective  condition  or 
counterpart  of  aBsthetic  repose,  or  unity.  From  this 
point  of  view  it  is  clearly  seen  in  what  respect  the 
unity  of  Hildebrand  fails.  He  demands  in  the  statue, 
especially,  but  also  in  the  picture,  the  flat  surface 
as  a  unity  for  the  three  dimensions.  But  it  is  only 
with  the  flat  space,  won,  if  you  will,  by  Hildebrand's 
method,  that  the  problem  begins.  Every  point  in 
the  third  dimension  counts,  as  has  been  said,  in  the 
flat.  The  Fernbild  is  the  beginning  of  beauty,  but 
within  the  Fernbild  favorable  stimulation  and  re 
pose  must  still  be  sought.  And  repose  or  unity 
is  given  by  symmetry,  subjectively  the  balance  of 
attention,  inasmuch  as  this .  balance  is  a  tension  of 
antagonistic  impulses,  an  equilibrium,  and  thus  an. 
inhibition  of  movement. 


114      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

From  this  point  of  view,  we  are  in  a  position  to  re 
fute  Souriau's  interesting  analysis l  of  form  as  the 
condition  for  the  appreciation  of  content.  He  says 
that  form,  in  a  picture  for  instance,  has  its  value  in 
its  power  to  produce  (through  its  fixation  and  con 
centration  of  the  eye)  a  mild  hypnosis,  in  which, 
as  is  well  known,  all  suggestions  come  to  us  with 
bewildering  vividness.  This  is,  then,  just  the  state 
in  which  the  contents  of  the  picture  can  most  viv 
idly  impress  themselves.  Form,  then,  as  the  means 
to  content,  by  giving  the  conditions  for  suggestion,  is 
Souriau's  account  of  it.  In  so  far  as  form  —  in  the 
sense  of  unity  —  gives,  through  balance  and  equi 
librium  of  impulses,  the  arrest  of  the  personality,  it 
may  indeed  be  compared  with  hypnotism.  But  this 
arrest  is  not  only  a  means,  but  an  end  hi  itself ; 
that  aesthetic  repose,  which,  as  the  unity  of  the 
personality,  is  an  essential  element  of  the  aesthetic 
emotion  as  we  have  described  it. 


VI 

There  is  no  point  of  light  or  color,  no  contour,  no 
line,  no  depth,  that  does  not  contribute  to  the  infi 
nite  complex  which  gives  the  maximum  of  experience 
with  the  minimum  of  effort  and  which  we  call  beauty 
of  form.  But  yet  there  is  another  way  of  viewing 
the  beautiful  object,  on  which  we  touched  in  the 
introduction  to  this  chapter.  So  far,  what  we  see  is 

1  La  Suggestion  en  V  Art, 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART          115 

only  another  name  for  how  we  see  ;  and  the  way  of 
seeing  has  proved  to  contain  enough  to  bring  to 
stimulation  and  repose  the  psychophysical  mech 
anism.  But  now  we  must  ask,  what  relation  has 
meaning  to  beauty  ?  Is  it  an  element,  coordinate 
with  others,  or  something  superposed  ?  or  is  it  an 
end  in  itself,  the  supreme  end  ?  What  relation  to 
the  beauty  of  form  has  that  quality  of  their  works 
by  virtue  of  which  Rembrandt  is  called  a  dreamer, 
and  Rodin  a  poet  in  stone?  What  do  we  mean 
when  we  speak  of  Sargent  as  a  psychologist  ?  Is  it 
a  virtue  to  be  a  poet  in  stone  ?  If  it  is,  we  must 
somehow  include  in  our  concept  of  Beauty  the 
element  of  expression,  by  showing  how  it  serves  the 
infinite  complex.  Or  is  it  not  an  aesthetic  virtue, 
and  Rodin  is  great  artist  and  poet  combined,  and 
not  great  artist  because  poet,  as  some  would  say  ? 
What  is  the  relation  of  the  objective  content  to 
beauty  of  form  ?  In  short,  what  place  has  the  idea 
in  Beauty? 

In  the  preceding  the  place  of  separate  objects 
which  have  only  an  ideal  importance  has  been  made 
clear.  The  gold-embroidered  gauntlet  in  a  pic 
ture  counts  as  a  patch  of  light,  a  trend  of  line,  in  a 
certain  spot ;  but  it  counts  more  there,  because  it 
is  of  interest  for  itself,  and  by  thus  counting  more, 
the  idea  has  entered  into  the  spatial  balance,  —  the 
idea  has  become  itself  form.  Now  it  is  the  question 
whether  all  "  idea,"  which  seems  so  heterogeneous 
in  its  relation  to  form,  does  not  undergo  this  trans- 


116      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

mutation.  It  is  at  least  of  interest  to  see  whether 
the  facts  can  be  so  interpreted. 

We  have  spoken  of  ideas  as  parts  of  an  aesthetic 
whole.  What  of  the  idea  of  the  whole  ?  Corot  used 
to  say  he  painted  a  dream,  and  it  is  the  dream  of 
an  autumn  morning  we  see  in  his  pictures.  Millet 
portrays  the  sad  majesty  and  sweetness  of  the  life 
near  the  soil.  How  must  we  relate  these  facts  to 
the  views  already  won  ? 

It  has  often  been  said  that  the  view  which  makes 
the  element  of  form  for  the  eye  alone,  in  the  strict 
est  sense,  is  erroneous,  because  there  is  no  form  for 
the  eye  alone.  The  very  process  of  apprehending 
a  line  involves  not  only  motor  memories  and  im 
pulses,  but  numberless  ideal  associations,  and  these 
associations  constitute  the  line  as  truly  as  do  the 
others.  The  impression  of  the  line  involves  ex 
pression,  a  meaning  which  we  cannot  escape.  The 
forms  of  things  constitute  a  kind  of  dialect  of  life, 
—  and  thus  it  is  that  the  theory  of  Einfuhlung  in 
its  deepest  sense  is  grounded.  The  Doric  column 
causes  in  us,  no  doubt,  motor  impulses,  but  it 
means,  and  must  mean,  to  us,  the  expression  of  in 
ternal  energy  through  those  very  impulses  it  causes. 
"  We  ourselves  are  contracting  our  muscles,  but  we 
feel  as  if  the  lines  were  pulling  and  piercing,  bend 
ing  and  lifting,  pressing  down  and  pushing  up ; 
in  short,  as  soon  as  the  visual  impression  is  really 
isolated,  and  all  other  ideas  really  excluded,  then 
the  motor  impulses  do  not  awake  actions  which  are 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  FINE   ART          117 

taken  as  actions  of  ourselves,  but  feelings  of  energy 
which  are  taken  as  energies  of  the  visual  forms  and 
lines." 1  So  the  idea  belonging  to  the  object,  and  the 
psychophysical  effect  of  the  object  are  only  obverse 
and  inverse  of  the  same  phenomenon.  And  our 
pleasure  in  the  form  of  the  column  is  rather  our 
appreciation  of  energy  than  our  feeling  of  favorable 
stimulation.  Admitting  this  reasoning,  the  meaning 
of  a  picture  would  be  the  same  as  its  beauty,  it  is 
said.  The  heroic  art  of  J.-F.  Millet,  for  example, 
would  be  beautiful  because  it  is  the  perfect  expres 
sion  of  the  simplicity  and  suffering  of  labor. 

Let  us  examine  this  apparently  reasonable  theory. 
It  is  true  that  every  visual  element  is  understood 
as  expression  too.  It  is  not  true,  however,  that  ex 
pression  and  impression  are  parallel  and  mutually 
corresponding  beyond  the  elements.  Suppose  a  con 
course  of  columns  covered  by  a  roof,  —  the  Par 
thenon.  Those  psychophysical  changes  induced 
by  the  sight  now  mutually  check  and  modify  each 
other.  Can  we  say  that  there  is  a  "  meaning,"  like 
the  energy  of  the  column,  corresponding  to  that 
complex  ?  It  is  at  least  not  energy  itself.  Ask  the 
same  as  regards  the  lines  and  masses  of  a  picture 
by  Corot.  In  the  sense  in  which  we  have  taken 
"  meaning,"  the  only  psychologically  possible  one, 
our  reactions  could  be  interpreted  only  by  some 
mood.  If  the  column  means  energy  because  it 
makes  us  tower,  then  the  picture  must  mean  what 

1  H.  Munsterberg,  The  Principles  of  Art  Education,  p.  87. 


118      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

it  makes  us  do.  That  is,  a  combination  of  feathery 
fronds  and  horizontal  lines  of  water,  bathed  in 
a  gray-green  silvery  mist,  can  "  mean "  only  a 
repose  lightened  by  a  grave  yet  cheerful  spirit. 
In  short,  this  theory  of  expressiveness  cannot  go 
beyond  the  mood  or  moral  quality.  In  the  sense  of 
information,  the  theory  of  Einfuhlung  contributes 
nothing.  Now,  in  this  limited  sense,  we  have  indeed 
no  reason  to  contradict  it,  but  simply  to  point  out 
that  it  holds  only  in  this  extremely  limited  sense. 
When  we  see  broad  sweeping  lines  we  interpret 
them  by  sympathetic  reproduction  as  strength,  en 
ergy.  When  those  sweeping  lines  are  made  part 
of  a  Titan's  frame,  we  get  the  same  effect  plus  the 
associations  which  belong  to  distinctively  muscular 
energy.  Those  same  lines  might  define  the  sweep  of 
a  drapery,  or  the  curve  of  an  infant's  limbs.  Now 
all  that  part  of  the  meaning  which  belongs  to  the 
lines  themselves  remains  constant  under  whatever 
circumstances  ;  and  it  is  quite  true  that  a  certain 
feeling-tone,  a  certain  moral  quality,  as  it  were, 
belongs,  say,  to  Raphael's  pictures,  in  which  this 
kind  of  outline  is  to  be  found.  But  as  belonging  to 
a  Titan,  the  additional  elements  of  understanding 
are  not  due  to  sympathetic  reproduction.  They  are 
not  parallel  with  the  motor  suggestions ;  they  are 
simply  an  associational  addition,  due  to  our  infor 
mation  about  the  power  of  men  with  muscles  like 
that.  That  there  are  secondary  motor  elements  as 
a  reverberation  of  these  ideal  elements  need  not  be 


THE  BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART         119 

denied.  But  they  are  not  directly  due  to  the  form. 
Now  such  part  of  our  response  to  a  picture  as  is 
directly  induced  by  the  form,  we  have  a  right  to 
include  in  the  aesthetic  experience.  It  will,  how 
ever,  in  every  work  of  art  of  even  the  least  com 
plexity,  be  expressible  only  as  a  mood,  very  indefi 
nite,  often  indescribable.  To  make  this  "  meaning," 
then,  the  essential  aim  of  a  picture  seems  unreason 
able. 

It  is  evident  that  hi  experience  we  do  not,  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  separate  the  mood  which  is  due  to 
sympathy  from  the  ideal  content  of  the  picture. 
Corot  paints  a  summer  dawn.  We  cannot  separate 
our  pleasure  in  the  sight  from  our  pleasure  in  the 
understanding ;  yet  it  is  the  visual  complex  that 
gives  us  the  mood,  and  the  meaning  of  the  scene  is 
due  to  factors  of  association.  The  "  serene  and  happy 
dream,"  the  "  conviction  of  a  solemn  and  radiant 
Arcadia,"  are  not  "  expression  "  in  that  inevitable 
sense  in  which  we  agreed  to  take  it,  but  the  result 
of  a  most  extended  upbuilding  of  ideal  (that  is,  as- 
sociational)  elements. 

The  "  idea,"  then,  as  we  have  propounded  it,  is 
not,  as  was  thought  possible,  an  integral  and  essen 
tial  part,  but  an  addition  to  the  visual  form,  and 
we  have  still  to  ask  what  is  its  value.  But  in  so 
far  as  it  is  an  addition,  its  effect  may  be  in  con 
flict  with  what  we  may  call  the  feeling-tone  pro 
duced  by  sympathetic  reproduction.  In  that  case,  one 
must  yield  to  the  other.  Now  it  is  not  probable  that 


120      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

even  the  most  convinced  adherents  of  the  expression 
theory  would  hold  that  if  expression  or  beauty  must 
go,  expression  should  be  kept.  They  only  say  that 
expression  is  beauty.  But  the  moment  it  is  admit 
ted  that  there  is  a  beauty  of  form  independent  of 
the  ideal  element,  this  theory  can  no  longer  stand. 
If  there  is  a  conflict,  the  palm  must  be  given  to  the 
direct,  rather  than  the  indirect,  factor.  Indeed, 
when  there  is  such  a  conflict,  the  primacy  must  al 
ways  be  with  the  medium  suited  to  the  organ,  the 
sensuous  factor.  For  if  it  were  not  so,  and  expres 
sion  were  beauty,  then  that  would  have  to  be  most 
beautiful  which  was  most  expressive.  Arid  even  if 
we  disregard  the  extraordinary  conclusions  to  which 
this  would  lead,  —  the  story  pictures  preferred  to 
those  without  a  story,  the  photographic  reproductions 
preferred  to  the  symphonies  of  color  and  form, — we 
should  be  obliged  to  admit  something  still  more  in 
cendiary.  Expression  is  always  of  an  ideal  content, 
is  of  something  to  express  ;  and  it  is  unquestioned 
that  in  words,  and  in  words  alone,  can  we  get  near 
est  to  the  inexpressible.  Then  literature,  as  being 
the  most  expressive,  would  be  the  highest  art,  and 
we  should  be  confronted  with  a  hierarchy  of  arts, 
from  that  down. 

Now,  in  truth,  the  real  lover  of  beauty  knows 
that  no  one  art  is  superior  to  another.  "  Each  in 
his  separate  star,"  they  reign  alone.  In  order  to  be 
equal,  they  must  depend  on  their  material,  not  on 
that  common  quality  of  imaginative  thought  which 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         121 

each  has  in  a  differing  degree,  and  all  less  than 
literature. 

The  idea,  we  conclude,  is  then  indeed  subordi 
nate,  —  a  by-product,  unless  by  chance  it  can  enter 
into,  melt  into,  the  form.  This  case  we  have  clearest 
in  the  example,  already  referred  to,  of  the  gold- 
embroidered  gauntlet,  or  the  jeweled  chalice,  —  say 
the  Holy  Grail  in  Abbey's  pictures,  —  which  counts 
more  or  less,  in  the  spatial  balance,  according  to 
its  intrinsic  interest. 

We  have  seen  that  through  sympathetic  repro 
duction  a  certain  mood  is  produced,  which  becomes 
a  kind  of  emotional  envelope  for  the  picture,  —  a 
favorable  stimulation  of  the  whole,  a  raising  of  the 
whole  harmony  one  tone,  as  it  were.  Now  the  fur 
ther  ideal  content  of  the  picture  may  so  closely  be 
long  to  this  basis  that  it  helps  it  along.  Thus  all  that 
we  know  about  dawn  —  not  only  of  a  summer  morn 
ing — helps  us  to  see,  and  seeing  to  rejoice,  in  Corot's 
silvery  mist  or  Monet's  iridescent  shimmers.  All 
that  we  know  and  feel  about  the  patient  majesty  of 
labor  in  the  fields,  next  the  earth,  helps  us  to  get 
the  slow,  large  rhythm,  the  rich  gloom  of  Millet's 
pictures.  But  it  is  the  rhythm  and  the  gloom  that 
are  the  beauty,  and  the  idea  reinforces  our  conscious 
ness  thereof.  The  idea  is  a  sounding-board  for  the 
beauty,  and  so  can  be  truly  said  to  enter  into  the 
form. 

But  there  are  still  some  lions  in  the  path  of  our 
theory.  The  greatest  of  modern  sculptors  is  re- 


122      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

puted  to  have  reached  his  present  altitude  by  the 
passionate  pursuance  of  Nature,  and  of  the  ex 
pressions  of  Nature.  And  few  can  see  Rodin's 
work  without  being  at  once  in  the  grip  of  the  emo 
tion  or  fact  he  has  chosen  to  depict.  A  great  deal 
of  contemporary  criticism  on  modern  tendencies  in 
art  rests  on  the  intention  of  expression,  and  expres 
sion  alone,  attributed  to  him.  It  is  said  of  him : 
"  The  solicitude  for  ardent  expression  overmasters 
every  aesthetic  consideration.  .  .  .  He  is  a  poet 
with  stone  as  his  instrument  of  expression.  He 
makes  it  express  emotions  that  are  never  found 
save  in  music  or  in  psychological  and  lyric  litera 
ture."  i 

Now  while  the  last  is  undoubtedly  true,  I  believe 
that  the  first  is  not  only  not  true,  but  that  it  is 
proved  to  be  so  by  Rodin's  own  procedure  and 
utterances,  and  that,  if  we  understand  his  case 
aright,  it  is  for  beauty  alone  that  he  lives.  He 
has  related  his  search  for  the  secret  of  Michael 
Angelo's  design,  and  how  he  found  it  in  the 
rhythm  of  two  planes  rather  than  four,  the  Greek 
composition.  This  system  of  tormented  form  is 
one  way  of  referring  the  body  to  the  geometry 
of  an  imagined  rectangular  block  inclosing  the 
whole. 

2  "  The  ordinary  Greek  composition  of  the  body, 

1  C.  Mauclair, "  The  Decorative  Sculpture  of  August  Rodin,'1 
International  Monthly,  vol.  iii. 

2  D.  S.  MacColl,  Nineteenth  Century  Art,  1902,  p.  101. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         123 

he  puts  it,  depends  on  a  rhythm  of  four  lines,  four 
volumes,  four  planes.  If  the  line  of  the  shoulders 
and  pectorals  slopes  from  right  to  left  (the  man 
resting  on  his  right  leg)  the  line  across  the  hips 
takes  the  reverse  slope,  and  is  followed  by  that  of 
the  knees,  while  the  line  of  the  first  echoes  that  of 
the  shoulders.  Thus  we  get  the  rhythm  ABBA, 
and  the  balancing  volumes  set  up  a  corresponding 
play  of  planes.  Michael  Angelo  so  turns  the  body 
on  itself  that  he  reduces  the  four  to  two  big  planes, 
one  facing,  the  other  swept  round  to  the  side  of 
the  block."  That  is,  he  gets  geometrical  envelop 
ing  lines  for  his  design.  And,  in  fact,  there  is  no 
sculpture  which  is  more  wonderf  ul  in  design  than 
Rodin's.  I  quote  Mr.  MacColl  again.  "  It  has  been 
said  that  the  '  Bourgeois  de  Calais '  is  a  group  of 
single  figures,  possessing  no  unity  of  design,  or  at 
best  affording  only  a  single  point  of  view.  Those 
who  say  so  have  never  examined  it  with  attention. 
The  way  in  which  these  figures  move  among  them 
selves,  as  the  spectator  walks  round,  so  as  to  pro 
duce  from  every  fresh  angle  sweeping  commanding 
lines,  each  of  them  thus  playing  a  dozen  parts  at 
once,  is  surely  one  of  the  most  astounding  feats  of 
the  genius  of  design.  Nothing  in  the  history  of  art 
is  exactly  comparable  with  it." 

In  short,  it  is  the  design,  for  all  his  words,  that 
Rodin  cares  for.  He  calls  it  Nature,  because  he 
sees,  and  can  see  Nature  only  that  way.  But  as  he 
said  to  some  one  who  suggested  that  there  might  be 


124      THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

a  danger  in  too  close  devotion  to  Nature,  "  Yes, 
for  a  mediocre  artist !  "  It  is  for  the  sake  of  the 
strange  new  beauty,  "  the  unedited  poses,"  "  the  odd 
beautiful  huddle 1  of  lines,"  in  a  stooping  or  squat 
ting  form,  that  all  these  wild  and  subtle  moments 
are  portrayed.  The  limbs  must  be  adjusted  or  sur 
prised  in  some  pattern  beyond  their  own.  The 
ideas  are  the  occasion  and  the  excuse  for  new  out 
lines,  —  that  is  all. 

This  is  all  scarcely  less  true  of  Millet,  whom  we 
have  known  above  all  as  the  painter  who  has  shown 
the  simple  common  lot  of  labor  as  divine.  But  he, 
too,  is  artist  for  the  sake  of  beauty  first.  He  sees 
two  peasant  women,  one  laden  with  grass,  the  other 
with  fagots.  "  From  far  off,  they  are  superb,  they 
balance  their  shoulders  under  the  weight  of  fatigue, 
the  twilight  swallows  their  forms.  It  is  beautiful, 
it  is  great  as  a  mastery."  2 

The  idea  is,  as  I  said,  from  this  point  of  view,  a 
means  to  new  beauty ;  and  the  stranger  and  subtler 
the  idea,  the  more  original  the  forms.  The  more 
unrestrained  the  expression  of  emotion  in  the  fig 
ures,  the  more  chance  to  surprise  them  in  some  new 
lovely  pattern.  It  is  thus,  I  believe,  that  we  may 
interpret  the  seeming  trend  of  modern  sculpture, 
and  so  much,  indeed,  of  all  modern  art,  to  the  "  ex 
pressive  beauty  "  path.  "  The  mediocre  artist " 
will  lose  beauty  in  seeking  expression,  the  great 

1  Said  of  Degas.   MacColl. 

8  Sensier,  Vie  et  CEuvre  de  J.-F.  Millet. 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART          125 

artist  will  pursue  his  idea  for  the  sake  of  the  new 
beauty  it  will  yield. 

Thus  it  seems  that  the  stumbling  blocks  in  the 
way  of  our  theory  are  not  insurmountable  after 
all.  From  every  point  of  view,  it  is  seen  to  be  pos 
sible  to  transmute  the  idea  into  a  helpmeet  to  the 
form.  Visual  beauty  is  first  beauty  to  the  eye  and 
to  the  frame,  and  the  mind  cherishes  and  enriches 
this  beauty  with  all  its  own  stored  treasures.  The 
stimulation  and  repose  of  the  psychophysical  organ 
ism  alone  can  make  one  thrill  to  visual  form  ;  but  the 
thrill  is  deeper  and  more  satisfying  if  it  engage  the 
whole  man,  and  be  reinforced  from  all  the  sources. 


VII 

But  we  ought  to  note  a  borderland  in  which  the 
concern  is  professedly  not  with  beauty,  but  with 
ideas  of  life.  Aristotle's  lover  of  knowledge,  who 
rejoiced  to  say  of  a  picture  "  This  is  that  man,"  is 
the  inspirer  of  drawing  as  opposed  to  the  art  of 
visual  form. 

It  is  not  beauty  we  seek  from  the  Rembrandt 
and  Diirer  of  the  etchings  and  woodcuts,  from 
Hogarth,  Goya,  Klinger,  down  to  Leech  and  Keene 
and  Du  Maurier  ;  it  is  not  beauty,  but  ideas,  — 
information,  irony,  satire,  life-philosophy.  Where 
there  is  a  conflict,  beauty,  as  we  have  defined  it, 
goes  to  the  wall.  We  may  trace,  perhaps,  the 
ground  of  this  in  the  highly  increased  amount  of 


126      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

symbolic,  associative  power  given,  and  required,  in 
the  black  and  white.  Even  to  understand  such  a 
picture  demands  such  an  enormous  amount  of  un 
conscious  mental  supplementation  that  it  is  natu« 
ral  to  find  the  aesthetic  centre  of  gravity  in  that 
element. 

The  first  conditions  of  the  work,  that  is,  deter 
mine  its  trend  and  aim.  The  part  played  by  imag 
ination  in  our  vision  of  an  etching  is  and  must  be  so 
important,  that  it  is,  after  all,  the  imaginative  part 
which  outweighs  the  given.  Nor  do  we  desire  the 
given  to  infringe  upon  the  ideal  field.  Thus  do  we 
understand  that  for  most  drawings  a  background 
vague  and  formless  is  the  desideratum.  "  Such  a 
tone  is  the  foil  for  psychological  moments,  as 
they  are  handled  by  Goya,  for  instance,  with  bar- 
barically  magnificent  nakedness.  On  a  background 
which  is  scarcely  indicated,  with  few  strokes,  which 
barely  suggest  space,  he  impales  like  a  butterfly  the 
human  type,  mostly  in  a  moment  of  folly  or  wicked 
ness.  .  .  .  The  least  definition  of  surrounding 
would  blunt  his  (the  artist's)  keenness,  and  make 
his  vehemence  absurd."  l 

This  theory  of  the  aim  of  black  and  white  is 
confirmed  by  the  fact  that  while  a  painting  is 
composed  for  the  size  in  which  it  is  painted,  and 
becomes  another  picture  if  reproduced  in  another 
measure,  the  size  of  drawings  is  relatively  indiffer 
ent  ;  reduced  or  enlarged,  the  effect  is  approxi- 
1  Max  Klinger,  Malerei  u.  Zeichnung,  1903,  p.  42. 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         127 

mately  the  same,  because  what  is  given  to  the  eye 
is  such  a  small  proportion  of  the  whole  experience. 
The  picture  is  only  the  cue  for  a  complete  structure 
of  ideas. 

Here  is  a  true  case  of  Anders-streben,  that "  par 
tial  alienation  from  its  own  limitations,  by  which 
the  arts  are  able,  not  indeed  to  supply  the  place  of 
each  other,  but  reciprocally  to  lend  each  other  new 
forces." 1  It  is  by  its  success  as  representation  that 
the  art  of  the  burin  and  needle  —  Griff elkunst,  as 
Klinger  names  it  —  ought  first  to  be  judged.  This 
is  not  saying  that  it  may  not  also  possess  beauty 
of  form  to  a  high  degree, — only  that  this  beauty  of 
form  is  not  its  characteristic  excellence. 

In  what  consists  the  beauty  of  visual  form  ?  If 
this  question  could  be  answered  in  a  sentence  our 
whole  discussion  of  the  abstract  formula  for  beauty 
would  have  been  unnecessary.  But  since  we  know 
what  the  elements  of  visual  form  must  do  to  bring 
about  the  aBsthetic  experience,  it  has  been  the  aim 
of  the  preceding  pages  to  show  how  those  elements 
must  be  determined  and  related.  The  eye,  the 
psychophysical  organism,  must  be  favorably  stim 
ulated  ;  these,  and  such  colors,  combinations,  lines 
as  we  have  described,  are  fitted  to  do  it.  It  must 
be  brought  to  repose ;  these,  and  such  relations 
between  lines  and  colors  as  we  have  set  forth,  are 
fitted  to  do  it,  for  reasons  we  have  given.  It  is  to 
the  eye  and  all  that  waits  upon  it  that  the  first  and 

1  W.  Pater,  The  Renaissance :  Essay  on  Giorgione. 


128      THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

the  last  appeal  of  fine  art  must  be  made ;  and  in 
so  far  as  the  emotion  or  the  idea  belonging  to  a 
picture  or  a  statue  waits  upon  the  eye,  in  so  far 
does  it  enter  into  the  characteristic  excellence,  that 
is,  the  beauty  of  visual  form. 


B.    SPACE  COMPOSITION  AMONG  THE  OLD 
MASTERS 

I 

THE  preceding  pages  have  set  forth  the  concrete 
facts  of  visible  beauty,  and  the  explanation  of  our 
feelings  about  it.  It  is  also  interesting,  however, 
to  see  how  these  principles  are  illustrated  and  con 
firmed  in  the  masterpieces  of  art.  A  statistical 
study,  undertaken  some  years  ago  with  the  purpose 
of  dealing  thus  with  the  hypothesis  of  substitu- 
tional  symmetry  in  pictorial  composition,  has  given 
abundance  of  material,  which  I  shall  set  forth,  at 
otherwise  disproportionate  length,  as  to  a  certain 
extent  illustrative  of  the  methods  of  such  study. 
It  is  clear  that  this  is  but  one  of  many  possible 
investigations  in  which  the  preceding  psychological 
theories  may  be  further  illuminated.  The  text  con 
fines  itself  to  pictures ;  but  the  functions  of  the 
elements  of  visual  form  are  valid  as  well  for  all 
visual  art  destined  to  fill  a  bounded  area.  The  dis 
cussion  will  then  be  seen  to  be  only  ostensibly  lim 
ited  in  its  reference.  For  picture  might  always  be 
read  space  arrangement  within  a  frame. 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART         129 

In  the  original  experimental  study  of  space 
arrangements,  the  results  of  which  were  given  at 
length  on  page  111,  the  elements  of  form  in  a  pic 
ture  were  reduced  to  size  or  mass,  depth  in  the 
third  dimension,  direction,  and  interest.  Direction 
was  further  analyzed  into  direction  of  motion  or 
attention  (of  persons  or  objects  in  the  picture),  an 
ideal  element,  that  is ;  and  direction  of  line.  For 
the  statistical  study,  a  given  picture  was  then  di 
vided  in  half  by  an  imaginary  vertical  line,  and  the 
elements  appearing  on  each  side  of  this  line  were 
set  off  against  each  other  to  see  how  far  they  lent 
themselves  to  description  by  substitutional  symme 
try.  Thus  :  in  B.  van  der  Heist's  "  Portrait  of  Paul 
Potter,"  the  head  of  the  subject  is  entirely  to  left 
of  the  central  line,  as  also  his  full  face  and  frontward 
glance.  His  easel  is  right,  his  body  turned  sharply 
to  right,  and  both  hands,  one  holding  palette  and 
brushes,  are  stretched  down  to  right.  Thus  the 
greater  mass  is  to  the  left,  and  the  general  direction 
of  line  is  to  the  right ;  elements  of  interest  in  the 
head,  left ;  in  implements,  right.  This  may  be 
schematized  in  the  equation  (Lt.)  M.  +  I.  =  (Rt.) 
I.  +  L. 

Pieter  de  Hooch,  "  The  Card-Players,"  in  Buck 
ingham  Palace,  portrays  a  group  completely  on  the 
right  of  the  central  line,  all  facing  in  to  the  table 
between  them.  Directly  behind  them  is  a  high  light 
window,  screened,  and  high  on  the  wall  to  the  ex 
treme  right  are  a  picture  and  hanging  cloaks.  All 


130      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

goes  to  emphasize  the  height,  mass,  and  interest 
of  the  right  side.  On  the  left,  which  is  otherwise 
empty,  is  a  door  half  the  height  of  the  window,  giv 
ing  on  a  brightly  lighted  courtyard,  from  which  is 
entering  a  woman,  also  in  light  clothing.  The  light 
streams  in  diagonally  across  the  floor.  Thus,  with 
all  the  "  weight "  on  the  right,  the  effect  of  this  deep 
vista  on  the  left  and  of  its  brightness  is  to  give  a 
complete  balance,  while  the  suggestion  of  line  from 
doorway  and  light  makes,  together  with  the  central 
figure,  a  roughly  outlined  V,  which  serves  to  bind 
together  all  the  elements.  Equation,  (Lt.)  V.  + 1. 
=  (Rt.)  M.  +  I. 

The  thousand  pictures  on  which  the  study  was 
based 1  were  classified  for  convenience  into  groups, 
—  Religious,  Portrait,  Genre,  and  Landscape. 
It  was  found  on  analysis  that  the  functions  of 
the  elements  came  out  clearly,  somewhat  as  fol 
lows. 

Of  the  religious  pictures,  only  the  "  Madonnas 
Enthroned  "  and  other  altar-pieces  are  considered  at 
this  point  as  presenting  a  simple  type,  in  which  it 
is  easy  to  show  the  variations  from  symmetry.  In 
all  these  pictures  the  balance  comes  in  between  the 
interest  in  the  Infant  Christ,  sometimes  together 
with  direction  of  attention  to  him,  on  one  side,  and 
other  elements  on  the  other.  When  the  first  side 

1  One  thousand  reproductions  of  old  masters  from  F.  Bruck- 
mann's  Classischer  Bilderschatz,  Munich,  omitting  frescoes  and  pic 
tures  of  which  less  than  the  whole  was  given. 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         131 

is  especially  "  heavy  "  the  number  of  opposing  ele 
ments  increases,  and  especially  takes  the  form  of 
vista  and  line,  which  have  been  experimentally 
found  to  be  powerful  in  attracting  attention.  Where 
there  are  no  surrounding  worshipers,  we  notice  re 
markable  frequency  in  the  use  of  vista  and  line,  and, 
in  general,  balance  is  brought  about  through  the 
disposition  of  form  rather  than  of  interests.  The 
reason  for  this  would  appear  to  be  that  the  lack 
of  accessories  in  the  persons  of  saints,  worshipers, 
etc.,  and  the  consequent  increase  in  the  size  of 
Madonna  and  Child  in  the  picture,  heightens  the 
effect  of  any  given  outline,  and  so  makes  the  varia 
tions  from  symmetry  greater.  This  being  the  case, 
the  compensations  would  be  stronger ;  and  as  we 
have  learned  that  vista  and  line  are  of  this  character, 
we  see  why  they  are  needed. 

The  portrait  class  is  an  especially  interesting  ob 
ject  for  study,  inasmuch  as  while  its  general  type 
is  very  simple  and  constant,  for  this  very  reason 
the  slightest  variations  are  sharply  felt,  and  have 
their  very  strongest  characteristic  effect.  The  gen 
eral  type  of  the  portrait  composition  is,  of  course, 
the  triangle  with  the  head  at  the  apex,  and  this 
point  is  also  generally  in  the  central  line ;  never 
theless,  great  richness  of  effect  is  brought  about  by 
emphasizing  variations.  For  instance,  the  body  and 
head  are,  in  the  great  majority  of  cases,  turned  in 
the  same  way,  giving  the  strongest  possible  em 
phasis  to  the  direction  of  attention,  —  especially 


132      THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

powerful,  of  course,  where  all  the  interest  is  in  the 
personality.  But  it  is  to  be  observed  that  the  very 
strongest  suggestion  of  direction  is  given  by  the 
direction  of  the  glance ;  and  in  no  case,  when  most 
of  the  other  elements  are  directed  in  one  way,  does 
the  glance  fail  to  come  backward.  With  the  head 
on  one  side  of  the  central  line,  of  course  the  greatest 
interest  is  removed  to  one  side,  and  the  element  of 
direction  is  brought  in  to  balance.  Again,  with  this 
decrease  in  symmetry,  we  see  a  significant  increase 
in  the  use  of  the  especially  effective  elements,  vista 
and  line.  In  fact,  the  use  of  the  small  deep  vista  is 
almost  confined  to  the  class  with  heads  not  in  the 
middle.  The  direction  of  the  glance  also  plays  an 
important  part.  Very  often  the  direction  of  move 
ment  alone  is  not  sufficient  to  balance  the  powerful 
M.  +  I.  of  the  other  side,  and  the  eye  has  to  be 
attracted  by  a  definite  object  of  interest.  This  is 
usually  the  hand,  with  or  without  an  implement, 
—  like  the  palette,  eta.,  of  our  first  examples,  —  or 
a  jewel,  vase,  or  bit  of  embroidery.  This  is  very 
characteristic  of  the  portraits  of  Rembrandt  and 
Van  Dyck. 

In  general,  it  may  be  said  that  (1)  portraits 
with  the  head  in  the  centre  of  the  frame  show  a 
balance  between  the  direction  of  suggested  move 
ment  on  one  side,  and  mass  or  direction  of  attention, 
or  both  together,  on  the  other ;  while  (2)  portraits 
with  the  head  not  in  the  centre  show  a  balance  be 
tween  mass  and  interest  on  one  side,  and  direction 


THE   BEAUTY  OF   FINE  ART         133 

of  attention,  or  of  line,  or  vista,  or  combinations  of 
these,  on  the  other. 

Still  more  utisymmetrical  in  their  framework 
than  portraits,  in  fact  the  most  unfettered  type  of 
all,  are  the  genre  pictures.  As  these  are  pictures 
with  a  human  interest,  and  full  of  action  and  par 
ticular  points  of  interest,  it  was  to  be  expected 
that  interest  would  be  the  element  most  frequently 
appearing.  In  compositions  showing  great  varia 
tions  from  geometrical  symmetry,  it  was  also  to  be 
expected  that  vista  and  line,  elements  which  have 
been  noted  comparatively  seldom  up  to  this  point, 
should  suddenly  appear  strongly ;  for,  as  being  the 
most  strikingly  "  heavy  "  of  the  elements,  they  serve 
to  compensate  for  other  variations  combined. 

The  landscape  is  another  type  of  unfettered  com 
position.  It  was  of  course  to  be  expected  that  in 
pictures  without  action  there  should  be  little  sug 
gestion  of  attention  or  of  direction  of  movement. 
But  the  most  remarkable  point  is  the  presence  of 
vista  in  practically  every  example.  It  is,  of  course, 
natural  that  somewhere  in  almost  every  picture 
there  should  be  a  break  to  show  the  horizon  line, 
for  the  sake  of  variety,  if  for  nothing  else  ;  but 
what  is  significant  is  the  part  played  by  this  break 
in  the  balancing  of  the  picture.  In  about  two 
thirds  of  the  examples  the  vista  is  inclosed  by  lines, 
or  masses,  and  when  near  the  centre,  as  being  at 
the  same  time  the  "heaviest"  part  of  the  picture, 
it  serves  as  a  fulcrum  or  centre  to  bind  the  parts  — 


134      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

always  harder  to  bring  together  than  in  the  other 
types  of  pictures  —  into  a  close  unity.  The  most 
frequent  form  of  this  arrangement  is  a  diagonal, 
which  just  saves  itself  by  turning  up  at  its  far  end. 
Thus  the  mass,  and  hence  usually  the  special  inter 
est  of  the  picture,  is  on  the  one  side,  on  the  other 
the  vista  and  the  sloping  line  of  the  diagonal.  In 
very  few  cases  is  the  vista  behind  an  attractive  or 
noticeable  part  of  the  picture,  the  fact  showing  that 
it  acts  in  opposition  to  the  latter,  leading  the  eye 
away  from  it,  and  thus  serving  at  once  the  variety 
and  richness  of  the  picture,  and  its  unity.  A  com 
plete  diagonal  would  have  line  and  vista  both  work 
ing  at  the  extreme  outer  edge  of  the  picture,  and 
thus  too  strongly,  —  unless,  indeed,  balanced  by 
very  striking  elements  near  the  other  edge. 

This  function  of  the  vista  as  a  unifying  element 
is  of  interest  in  connection  with  the  theory  of  Hil- 
debrand, l  that  the  landscape  should  have  a  narrow 
foreground  and  wide  background,  since  that  is  most 
in  conformity  with  our  experience.  He  adduces 
Titian's  "  Sacred  and  Profane  Love"  as  an  example. 
But  of  the  general  principle  it  may  be  said  that 
not  the  reproduction  of  nature,  but  the  production 
of  beauty,  is  the  aim  of  composition,  and  that  this 
aim  is  best  reached  by  focusing  the  eye  by  a  nar 
row  background,  i.  e.  vista.  No  matter  how  much 
it  wanders,  it  returns  to  that  central  spot  and  is 
held  there,  keeping  hold  on  all  the  other  elements. 
1  Op.  tit.,  p.  55. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         135 

Of  Hildebrand's  example  it  may  be  said  that  the 
pyramidal  composition,  with  the  dark  and  tall  tree 
in  the  centre,  effectually  accomplishes  the  bind 
ing  together  of  the  two  figures,  so  that  a  vista  is 
not  needed.  A  wide  background  without  that  tree 
would  leave  them  rather  disjointed. 

In  general,  it  may  be  said  that  balance  in  land 
scape  is  effected  between  mass  and  interest  on  one 
side  and  vista  and  line  on  the  other ;  and  that 
union  is  given  especially  by  the  use  of  vista. 


n 

The  experimental  treatment  of  the  isolated 
elements  detected  the  particular  function  of  each 
in  distributing  attention  in  the  field  of  view.  But 
while  all  are  possibly  operative  in  a  given  picture, 
some  are  given,  as  we  have  seen,  much  more  im 
portance  than  others,  and  in  pictures  of  different 
types  different  elements  predominate.  In  those 
classes  with  a  general  symmetrical  framework, 
such  as  the  altar  and  Madonna  pieces,  the  ele- 
ments  of  interest  and  direction  of  attention  deter 
mine  the  balance,  for  they  appear  as  variations  in 
a  symmetry  which  has  already,  so  to  speak,  disposed 
of  mass  and  line.  They  give  what  action  there  is, 
and  where  they  are  very  strongly  operative,  they  are 
opposed  by  salient  lines  and  deep  vistas,  which  act 
more  strongly  on  the  attention  than  does  mass. 
Interest  keeps  its  predominance  throughout  the 


136      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

types,  except  in  the  portraits,  where  the  head  is 
usually  in  the  central  line.  But  even  among  the 
portraits  it  has  a  respectable  representation,  as 
jewels,  embroideries,  beautiful  hands,  etc.,  count 
largely  too  in  composition. 

The  direction  of  attention  is  most  operative 
among  the  portraits.  Since  these  pictures  represent 
no  action,  it  must  be  given  by  those  elements  which 
move  and  distribute  the  attention ;  in  accordance 
with  which  principle  we  find  line  also  unusually 
influential.  As  remarked  above,  altar-pieces  and 
Madonna  pictures,  also  largely  without  action, 
depend  largely  for  it  on  the  direction  of  atten 
tion. 

The  vista,  as  said  above,  rivets  and  confines  the 
attention.  We  can,  therefore,  understand  how  it 
is  that  in  the  genre  pictures  it  appears  very  nu 
merous.  The  active  character  of  these  pictures 
naturally  requires  to  be  modified,  and  the  vista 
introduces  a  powerful  balancing  element,  which  is 
yet  quiet ;  or,  it  might  be  said,  inasmuch  as  energy 
is  certainly  expended  in  plunging  down  the  third 
dimension,  the  vista  introduces  an  element  of  ac 
tion  of  counterbalancing  character.  In  the  land 
scape  it  introduces  the  principal  element  of  variety. 
It  is  always  to  be  found  in  those  parts  of  the  pic 
ture  which  are  opposed  to  other  powerful  elements, 
and  the  "  heavier  "  the  other  side,  the  deeper  the 
vista.  Also  in  pictures  with  two  groups  it  serves 
as  a  kind  of  fulcrum,  or  unifying  element,  mas- 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         137 

much  as  it  rivets  the  attention  between  the  two 
detached  sides. 

The  direction  of  suggestion  by  means  of  the 
indication  of  a  line,  quite  naturally  is  more  fre 
quent  in  the  Madonna  picture  and  portrait  classes. 
Both  these  types  are  of  large  simple  outline,  so 
that  line  would  be  expected  to  tell.  In  a  decided 
majority  of  cases,  combined  with  vista  —  the  shape 
being  more  or  less  a  diagonal  slope  —  it  is  clear 
that  it  acts  as  a  kind  of  bond  between  the  two 
sides,  carrying  the  attention  without  a  break  from 
one  to  the  other. 

The  element  of  mass  requires  less  comment.  It 
appears  in  greatest  number  in  those  pictures  which 
have  little  action,  i.  e.  portraits  and  landscapes, 
and  which  are  yet  not  symmetrical,  —  in  which  last 
case  mass  is,  of  course,  already  balanced.  In  fact, 
it  must  of  necessity  exert  a  certain  influence  in 
every  unsymmetrical  picture,  and  so  its  percentage, 
even  for  genre  pictures,  is  large. 

Thus  we  may  regard  the  elements  as  both  at 
tracting  attention  to  a  certain  spot  and  dispersing 
it  over  a  field.  Those  types  which  are  of  a  static 
character  (landscapes,  altar-pieces)  abound  in  ele 
ments  which  disperse  the  attention  ;  those  which  are 
of  a  dynamic  character  (genre  pictures),  in  those 
which  make  it  stable.  The  ideal  composition  seems 
to  combine  the  dynamic  and  static  elements,  —  to 
animate,  in  short,  the  whole  field  of  view,  but  in  a 
generally  bilateral  fashion.  The  elements,  in  sub- 


138      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

stitutional  symmetry,  are  then  simply  means  of 
introducing  variety  and  action.  As  a  dance  in 
which  there  are  complicated  steps  gives  the  actor 
and  beholder  a  varied  and  thus  vivified  "  balance," 
and  is  thus  more  beautiful  than  the  simple  walk, 
so  a  picture  composed  in  substitutional  symmetry 
is  more  rich  in  its  suggestions  of  motor  impulse, 
and  thus  more  beautiful,  than  an  example  of  geo 
metrical  symmetry. 

Ill 

The  particular  functions  of  the  elements  which 
are  substituted  for  geometrical  symmetry  have  been 
made  clear ;  their  presence  lends  variety  and  rich 
ness  to  the  balance  of  motor  impulses.  But  this 
quality  of  repose,  or  unity,  given  by  balance,  is  also 
enriched  by  a  unity  for  intuition,  —  a  large  out 
line  in  which  all  the  elements  are  held  together. 
Now  this  way  of  holding  together  varies ;  and  I 
believe  that  it  bears  a  very  close  relation  to  the 
subject  and  purpose  of  the  picture. 

Examples  of  these  types  of  composition  may 
best  be  found  by  analyzing  a  few  well-known  pic 
tures.  We  may  begin  with  the  class  first  studied, 
the  Altar-piece,  choosing  a  picture  by  Botticelli,  in 
the  Florence  Academy.  Under  an  arch  is  draped 
a  canopy  held  up  by  angels ;  under  this,  again, 
sits  the  Madonna  with  the  Child  on  her  lap,  on 
a  throne,  at  the  foot  of  which,  on  each  side,  stand 
three  saints.  The  outline  of  the  whole  is  markedly 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   FINE  ART         139 

pyramidal;  in  fact,  there  are,  broadly  speaking, 
three  pyramids,  —  of  the  arch,  the  canopy,  and  the 
grouping.  A  second,  much  less  symmetrical  exam 
ple  of  this  type,  is  given  by  another  Botticelli  in  the 
Academy, —  "Spring."  Here  the  central  female 
figure,  topped  by  the  floating  Cupid,  is  slightly 
raised  above  the  others,  which,  however,  bend 
slightly  inward,  so  that  a  triangle,  or  pyramid  with 
very  obtuse  angle  at  the  apex,  is  suggested ;  and 
the  whole,  which  at  first  glance  seems  a  little  scat 
tered,  is  at  once  felt,  when  this  is  grasped,  as 
closely  bound  together. 

Closely  allied  to  this  is  the  type  of  the  Holbein 
"  Madonna  of  Burgomaster  Meyer,"  in  the  Grand 
Ducal  Castle,  Darmstadt.  It  is  true  that  the  same 
pyramid  is  given  by  the  head  of  the  Madonna 
against  the  shell-like  background,  and  her  spread 
ing  cloak  which  envelops  the  kneeling  donors.  But 
still  more  salient  is  the  diamond  form  given  by 
the  descending  rows  of  these  worshiping  figures, 
especially  against  the  dark  background  of  the 
Madonna's  dress.  A  second  example,  without  the 
pyramid  backing,  is  found  in  Rubens's  "  Rape  of 
the  Daughters  of  Leucippus,"  in  the  Alte  Pinako- 
thek  at  Munich.  Here  the  diamond  shape  formed 
by  the  horses  and  struggling  figures  is  most  re 
markable,  —  an  effect  of  lightness  which  will  be 
discussed  later  in  interpreting  the  types. 

A  third  type,  the  diagonal,  is  given  in  an  "  Even 
ing  Landscape"  by  Cuyp,  in  the  Buckingham 


140      THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Palace,  London.  High  trees  and  cliffs,  horsemen 
and  others,  occupy  one  side,  and  the  mountains 
in  the  background,  the  ground  and  the  clouds,  all 
slope  gradually  down  to  the  other  side. 

It  is  a  natural  transition  from  this  type  to 
the  V-shape  of  the  landscapes  by  Aart  van  der 
Neer,  "  Dutch  Villages,"  in  the  London  National 
Gallery  and  in  the  Rudolphinum  at  Prague,  re 
spectively.  Here  are  trees  and  houses  on  each 
side,  gradually  sloping  to  the  centre  to  show 
an  open  sky  and  deep  vista.  Other  examples, 
of  course,  show  the  opening  not  exactly  in  the 
centre. 

In  the  "  Concert "  by  Giorgione,  in  the  Pitti 
Gallery,  Florence,  is  seen  the  less  frequent  type  of 
the  square.  The  three  figures  turned  toward  each 
other  with  heads  on  the  same  level  make  almost  a 
square  space-shape,  although  it  might  be  said  that 
the  central  player  gives  a  pyramidal  foundation. 
This  last  may  also  be  said  of  Verrocchio's  "  Tobias 
and  the  Archangels  "  in  the  Florence  Academy,  for 
the  square,  or  other  rectangle,  is  again  lengthened 
by  the  pyramidal  shape  of  the  two  central  figures. 
The  unrelieved  square,  it  may  here  be  interpolated, 
is  not  often  found  except  in  somewhat  primitive 
examples.  Still  less  often  observed  is  the  oval  type 
of  "  Samson's  Wedding  Feast,"  Rembrandt,  in  the 
Royal  Gallery,  Dresden.  Here  one  might,  by  press 
ing  the  interpretation,  see  an  obtuse-angled  double- 
pyramid  with  the  figure  of  Delilah  for  an  apex, 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  FINE  ART         141 

but  a  few  very  irregular  pictures  seem  to  fall  best 
under  the  given  classification. 

Last  of  all,  it  must  be  remarked  that  the  great 
majority  of  pictures  show  a  combination  of  two  or 
even  three  types ;  but  these  are  usually  subordi 
nated  to  one  dominant  type.  Such,  for  instance,  is 
the  case  with  many  portraits,  which  are  markedly 
pyramidal,  with  the  double-pyramid  suggested  by 
the  position  of  the  arms,  and  the  inverted  pyramid, 
or  V,  in  the  landscape  background.  The  diagonal 
sometimes  just  passes  over  into  the  V-shape,  or 
into  the  pyramid ;  or  the  square  is  combined  with 
both. 

What  types  are  characteristic  of  the  different 
kinds  of  pictures  ?  In  order  to  answer  this  question 
we  must  ask  first,  What  are  the  different  kinds  of 
pictures  ?  One  answer,  at  least,  is  at  once  suggested 
to  the  student  on  a  comparison  of  the  pictures  with 
their  groupings  according  to  subjects.  All  those 
which  represent  the  Madonna  enthroned,  with  all 
variations,  with  or  without  saints,  shepherds,  or 
Holy  Family,  are  very  quiet  in  their  action ;  that 
is,  it  is  not  really  an  action  at  all  which  they  repre 
sent,  but  an  attitude,  —  the  attitude  of  contempla 
tion.  This  is  no  less  true  of  the  pictures  we  may 
call  "  Adorations,"  in  which,  indeed,  the  contem 
plative  attitude  is  still  more  marked.  On  the  other 
hand,  such  pictures  as  the  "  Descents,"  the  "  An 
nunciations,"  and  very  many  of  the  miscellaneous 
religious,  allegorical,  and  genre  pictures,  portray  a 


142      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

definite  action  or  event.  Now  the  pyramid  type 
is  characteristic  of  the  "  contemplative  "  pictures 
in  a  much  higher  degree.  A  class  which  might  be 
supposed  to  suggest  the  same  treatment  in  compo 
sition  is  that  of  the  portraits,  —  absolute  lack  of 
action  being  the  rule.  And  we  find,  indeed,  that 
no  single  type  is  represented  within  it  except  the 
pyramid  and  double-pyramid,  with  eighty-six  per 
cent,  of  the  former.  Thus  it  is  evident  that  for 
the  type  of  picture  which  expresses  the  highest  de 
gree  of  quietude,  contemplation,  concentration,  the 
pyramid  is  the  characteristic  type  of  composition. 
Among  the  so-called  "  active  "  pictures,  the  diago 
nal  and  V-shaped  types  are  most  numerous. 

The  landscape  picture  presents  a  somewhat  dif 
ferent  problem.  It  cannot  be  described  as  either 
"active"  or  "passive,"  inasmuch  as  it  does  not 
express  either  an  attitude  or  an  event.  There  is 
no  definite  idea  to  be  set  forth,  no  point  of  concen 
tration,  as  with  the  altar-pieces  and  the  portraits, 
for  instance ;  and  yet  a  unity  is  demanded.  An 
examination  of  the  proportions  of  the  types  shows 
at  once  the  characteristic  type  to  be  here  also  the 
diagonal  and  V-shaped. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  ask  what  must  be  the  in 
terpretation  of  the  use  of  these  types  of  composition. 
Must  we  consider  the  pyramid  the  expression  of 
passivity,  the  diagonal  or  V-shape,  of  activity? 
But  the  greatly  predominating  use  of  the  second  for 
landscapes  would  remain  unexplained,  for  at  least 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         143 

nothing  can  be  more  reposeful  than  the  latter.  It 
may  aid  the  solution  of  the  problem  to  remember 
that  the  composition  taken  as  a  whole  has  to  meet  the 
demand  for  unity,  at  the  same  time  that  it  allows 
free  play  to  the  natural  expression  of  the  subject. 
The  altar-piece  has  to  bring  about  a  concentration 
of  attention  to  express  or  induce  a  feeling  of  rever 
ence.  This  is  evidently  accomplished  by  the  sug 
gestion  of  the  converging  lines  to  the  fixation  of 
the  high  point  in  the  picture,  —  the  small  area 
occupied  by  the  Madonna  and  Child,  —  and  by  the 
subordination  of  the  free  play  of  other  elements. 
The  contrast  between  the  broad  base  and  the  apex 
gives  a  feeling  of  solidity,  of  repose ;  and  it  seems 
not  unreasonable  to  suppose  that  the  tendency  to 
rest  the  eyes  above  the  centre  of  the  picture  directly 
induces  the  associated  mood  of  reverence  or  worship. 
Thus  the  pyramidal  form  serves  two  ends ;  prima 
rily  that  of  giving  unity,  and  secondarily,  by  the 
peculiarity  of  its  shape,  that  of  inducing  the  feeling- 
tone  appropriate  to  the  subject  of  the  picture. 

Applying  this  principle  to  the  so-called  "  active  " 
pictures,  we  see  that  the  natural  movement  of  atten 
tion  between  the  different  "  actors  "  in  the  picture 
must  be  allowed  for,  while  yet  unity  is  secured. 
And  it  is  clear  that  the  diagonal  type  is  just  fitted 
for  this.  The  attention  sweeps  down  from  the  high 
side  to  the  low,  from  which  it  returns  through  some 
backward  suggestion  of  lines  or  interest  in  the  ob 
jects  of  the  high  side.  Action  and  reaction  —  move- 


144      THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

ment  and  return  of  attention  —  is  inevitable  under 
the  conditions  of  this  type ;  and  this  it  is  which 
allows  the  free  play,  —  which,  indeed,  constitutes 
and  expresses  the  activity  belonging  to  the  subject, 
just  as  the  fixation  of  the  pyramid  constitutes  the 
quietude  of  the  religious  picture.  Thus  it  is  that 
the  diagonal  composition  is  particularly  suited  to 
portray  scenes  of  grandeur,  and  to  induce  a  feeling 
of  awe  in  the  spectator,  because  only  here  can  the 
eye  rove  in  one  large  sweep  from  side  to  side  of  the 
picture,  recalled  by  the  mass  and  interest  of  the  side 
from  which  it  moves.  Th,e  swing  of  the  pendulum 
is  here  widest,  so  to  speak,  and  all  the  feeling-tones 
which  belong  to  wide,  free  movement  are  called  into 
play.  If,  at  the  same  time,  the  element  of  the  deep 
vista  is  introduced,  we  have  the  extreme  of  concen 
tration  combined  with  the  extreme  of  movement ; 
and  the  result  is  a  picture  in  the  "grand  style" 
—  comparable  to  high  tragedy  —  in  which  all  the 
feeling-tones  which  wait  on  motor  impulses  are,  as 
it  were,  while  yet  in  the  same  reciprocal  relation, 
tuned  to  the  highest  pitch.  Such  a  picture  is 
the  "  Finding  of  the  Ring,"  Paris  Bordone,  in  the 
Venice  Academy.  All  the  mass  and  the  interest 
and  the  suggestion  of  attention  is  toward  the  right, 
the  sweep  of  the  downward  lines  and  of  the  mag 
nificent  perspective  toward  the  left,  and  the  effect 
of  the  whole  space  composition  is  of  superb  large 
ness  of  life  and  feeling.  Compare  Titian's  "  Presen 
tation  of  the  Virgin,"  also  the  two  great  composi- 


THE  BEAUTY   OF   FINE  ART          145 

tions  by  Veronese,  "  Martyrdom  of  St.  Mark,"  etc., 
in  the  Doge's  Palace,  Venice,  and  "  Esther  before 
Ahasuerus,"  in  the  Uffizi,  Florence.  In  these  last 
two,  the  mass,  direction  of  interest,  movement,  and 
attention  are  toward  the  left,  while  all  the  lines  tend 
diagonally  to  the  right,  where  a  vista  is  also  sug 
gested,  —  the  diagonal  making  a  V  just  at  the  end. 
Here,  too,  the  effect  is  of  magnificence  and  vigor. 
If,  then,  the  pyramid  belongs  to  contemplation, 
the  diagonal  to  action,  what  can  be  said  of  land 
scape  ?  It  is  without  action,  it  is  true,  and  yet  does 
not  express  that  positive  quality,  that  will  not  to 
act,  of  the  rapt  contemplation.  The  landscape  un- 
composed  is  negative,  and  it  demands  unity.  Its 
type  of  composition,  then,  must  give  it  something 
positive  besides  unity.  It  lacks  both  concentration 
and  action  ;  but  it  can  gain  them  both  from  a  space 
composition  which  shall  combine  unity  with  a  ten 
dency  to  movement.  And  this  is  given  by  the 
diagonal  and  V-shaped  type.  This  type  merely 
allows  free  play  to  the  natural  tendency  of  the 
"  active  "  picture  ;  but  it  constrains  the  neutral,  in 
animate  landscape.  The  shape  itself  imparts  motion 
to  the  picture :  the  sweep  of  line,  the  concentration 
of  the  vista,  the  unifying  power  of  the  inverted  tri 
angle  between  two  masses,  act,  as  it  were,  exter 
nally  to  the  suggestion  of  the  object  itself.  There 
is  always  enough  quiet  in  a  landscape,  —  the  over 
whelming  suggestion  of  the  horizontal  suffices  for 
that ;  it  is  movement  that  is  needed  for  richness  of 


146      THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

effect,  and,  as  1  have  shown,  no  type  imparts  the 
feeling  of  movement  so  strongly  as  the  diagonal  and 
V-shaped  type  of  composition.  Landscapes  need 
energy  to  produce  "  stimulation,"  not  repression, 
and  so  the  diagonal  type  is  proportionately  more 
numerous. 

The  rigid  square  is  found  only  at  an  early  stage 
in  the  development  of  composition.  Moreover,  all 
the  examples  are  "  story "  pictures,  for  the  most 
part  scenes  from  the  lives  of  the  saints,  etc.  Many 
of  them  are  double-centre,  —  square,  that  is,  with 
a  slight  break  in  the  middle,  the  grouping  purely 
logical,  to  bring  out  the  relations  of  the  characters. 
Thus,  in  the  "  Dream  of  Saint  Martin,"  Simone 
Martini,  a  fresco  at  Assisi,  the  saint  lies  straight 
across  the  picture  with  his  head  in  one  corner.  Be 
hind  him  on  one  side  stand  the  Christ  and  angels, 
grouped  closely  together,  their  heads  on  the  same 
level.  These  are  all,  of  course,  in  one  sense  sym 
metrical,  —  in  the  weight  of  interest,  at  least,  —  but 
they  are  completely  amorphous  from  an  esthetic 
point  of  view.  The  forms,  that  is,  do  not  count  at 
all,  —  only  the  meanings.  The  story  is  told  by  a 
clear  separation  of  the  parts,  and  as,  in  most  stories, 
there  are  two  principal  actors,  it  merely  happens 
that  they  fall  into  the  two  sides  of  the  picture.  On 
the  other  hand,  a  rigid  geometrical  symmetry  is  also 
characteristic  of  early  composition,  and  these  two 
facts  seem  to  contradict  each  other.  But  it  is  to 
be  noted,  first,  that  the  rigid  geometrical  symmetry 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  FINE  ART         147 

belongs  only  to  the  "Madonna  Enthroned,"  and  gen 
eral  "  Adoration  "  pieces ;  and  secondly,  that  this 
very  rigidity  of  symmetry  in  details  can  coexist 
with  variations  which  destroy  balance.  Thus,  in  a 
"  Madonna  Enthroned  "  of  Giotto,  where  absolute 
symmetry  in  detail  is  kept,  the  Child  sits  far  out 
on  the  right  knee  of  the  Madonna. 

It  would  seem  that  the  symmetry  of  these  early 
pictures  was  not  dictated  by  a  conscious  demand 
for  symmetrical  arrangement,  or  rather  for  real 
balance,  else  such  failures  would  hardly  occur.  The 
presence  of  geometrical  symmetry  is  more  easily 
explained  as  the  product,  in  large  part,  of  techni 
cal  conditions  :  of  the  fact  that  these  pictures  were 
painted  as  altar-pieces  to  fill  a  space  definitely 
symmetrical  in  character  —  often,  indeed,  with  ar 
chitectural  elements  intruding  into  it.  We  may 
even  connect  the  Madonna  pictures  with  the  temple 
images  of  the  classic  period,  to  explain  why  it  was 
natural  to  paint  the  object  of  worship  seated  ex 
actly  facing  the  worshiper.  Thus  we  may  separate 
the  two  classes  of  pictures,  the  one  giving  an  object 
of  worship,  and  thus  taking  naturally,  as  has  been 
said,  the  pyramidal,  symmetrical  shape,  and  being 
moulded  to  symmetry  by  all  other  suggestions  of 
technique  ;  the  other  aiming  at  nothing  except  logi 
cal  clearness.  This  antithesis  of  the  symbol  and 
the  story  has  a  most  interesting  parallel  in  the  two 
great  classes  of  primitive  art  —  the  one  symbolic, 
merely  suggestive,  shaped  by  the  space  it  had  to 


148      THE  PSYCHOLOGY   OF  BEAUTY 

fill,  and  so  degenerating  into  the  slavishly  symmet 
rical;  the  other  descriptive,  "story-telling,"  and 
without  a  trace  of  space  composition.  On  neither 
side  is  there  evidence  of  direct  aesthetic  feeling. 
Only  in  the  course  of  artistic  development  do  we 
find  the  rigid,  yet  often  unbalanced,  symmetry  re 
laxing  into  a  free  substitutional  symmetry,  and  the 
formless  narrative  crystallizing  into  a  really  unified 
and  balanced  space-form.  The  two  antitheses  ap 
proach  each  other  in  the  "  balance  "  of  the  master 
pieces  of  civilized  art  —  in  which,  for  the  first  time, 
a  real  feeling  for  space  composition  makes  itself 
felt. 


V 

THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   MUSIC 
I 

Y 1 1HERE  is  a  story,  in  Max  Miiller's  amusing  re- 
1  miniscences,  of  how  Mendelssohn  and  David 
once  played,  in  his  hearing,  Beethoven's  later  sona 
tas  for  piano  and  violin,  and  of  how  they  shrugged 
their  shoulders,  and  opined  the  old  man  had  not 
been  quite  himself  when  he  wrote  them.  In  the 
history  of  music  it  seems  to  be  a  rule  almost 
without  exceptions,  that  the  works  of  genius  are 
greeted  with  contumely.  The  same  is  no  doubt 
true,  though  to  a  much  less  degree,  of  other  arts, 
but  in  music  it  seems  that  the  critics  proposed  also 
excellent  reasons  for  their  vehemence.  And  it  is 
instructive  to  observe  that  the  objections,  and  the 
reasons  for  the  objections,  recur,  after  the  original 
object  of  wrath  has  passed  into  acceptance,  nay, 
into  dominance  of  the  musical  world.  One  may 
also  descry  one  basic  controversy  running  through 
all  these  utterances,  even  when  not  explicitly  set 
forth. 

It  was  made  a  reproach  to  Beethoven,  as  it  has 
been  made  a  reproach  to  Richard  Strauss,  that  he 
sacrificed  the  beauty  of  form  to  expression ;  and  it 


152      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

was  rejoined,  perhaps  less  in  the  old  time  than 
now,  that  expression  was  itself  the  end  and  mean 
ing  of  music.  Now  the  works  of  genius,  as  we 
have  seen,  after  all  take  care  of  themselves.  But 
it  is  of  greatest  significance  for  the  theory  of 
music,  as  of  all  art,  that  in  the  circle  of  the  years, 
the  same  contrasting  views,  grown  to  ever  sharper 
opposition,  still  greet  the  appearance  of  new  work. 
It  was  with  Wagner,  as  all  the  world  knows,  that 
the  question  came  first  to  complete  formulation. 
His  invention  of  the  music-drama  rested  on  his  fa 
mous  theory  of  music  as  the  heightened  medium  of 
expression,  glorified  speech,  which  accordingly  de 
mands  freedom  to  follow  all  the  varying  nuances 
of  feeling  and  emotion.  Music  has  always  been 
called  the  language  of  the  emotions,  but  Wagner 
based  his  views  not  only  on  the  popular  notion,  but 
on  the  metaphysical  theories  of  Schopenhauer ;  in 
particular,  on  the  view  that  music  is  the  objectifi- 
cation  of  the  will.  Herbert  Spencer  followed  with 
the  thesis  that  music  has  its  essential  source  in 
the  cadences  of  emotional  speech.  In  opposition 
primarily  to  Wagner,  the  so-called  formalists  were 
represented  by  Hanslick,  who  wrote  his  well-known 
•'  The  Beautiful  in  Music "  to  show  that  though 
music  has  a  limited  capacity  of  expression,  its  aim 
is  formal  or  logical  perfection  alone.  The  expres 
sionist  school  could  not  contradict  the  undoubted 
fact  that  chords  and  intervals  which  are  harmoni 
ous  show  certain  definite  physical  and  mathemati- 


THE  BEAUTY  OF   MUSIC  153 

cal  relationships,  that,  in  other  words,  our  musical 
preferences  appear  to  be  closely  related  to,  if  not  de 
termined  by,  these  relationships.  Thus  each  school 
seemed  to  be  backed  by  science.  The  emotional- 
speech  theory  has  been  held  in  a  vague  way,  indeed, 
by  most  of  those  theorists  whose  natural  conserva 
tism  would  have  drawn  them  in  the  other  direction, 
and  is  doubtless  responsible  for  the  attempts  at 
mediation,  first  made  by  Ambros,1  and  now  met  in 
almost  all  musical  literature.  Music  may  be,  and 
is,  expressive,  it  is  said,  so  long  as  each  detail 
allows  itself  to  be  entirely  derived  from  and  justi 
fied  by  the  mere  formal  element.  The  "  centre  of 
gravity  "  lies  in  the  formal  relations. 

To  this,  after  all,  Hanslick  himself  might  sub 
scribe.  Other  writers  seek  to  balance  form  and 
expression,  insisting  on  "  the  dual  nature  of  music," 
while  resting  ultimately  on  the  emotional-speech 
theory.  "  The  most  universal  composers,  recogniz 
ing  the  interdependence  of  the  two  elements,  pro 
duce  the  highest  type  of  pure  music,  music  in  which 
beauty  is  based  upon  expression,  and  expression 
transfigured  by  beauty."2 

Tkis  usual  type  of  reconciliation,  however,  is  a 
perfectly  mechanical  binding  together  of  two  pos 
sibly  conflicting  aesthetic  demands.  The  question 
is  of  the  essential  nature  of  music,  not  whether 
music  may  be,  but  whether  it  must  be,  expressive ; 

1  The  Boundaries  of  Music  and  Poetry. 

2  D.  G.  Mason,  From  Grieg  to  Brahms,  1902,  p.  30. 


154      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

not  whether  it  has  expressive  power,  but  whether  it 
is,  in  its  essence,  expression, — a  question  which  is 
only  obscured  by  insisting  on  the  interdependence 
of  the  two  elements.  If  music  has  its  essential 
source  in  the  cadences  of  speech,  if  its  aim  is  to 
be  a  glorified  speech,  then  it  must  develop  and 
must  be  judged  accordingly.  Herbert  Spencer  is 
perfectly  logical  in  saying  "  It  may  be  shown  that 
music  is  but  an  idealization  of  the  natural  language 
of  emotion,  and  that,  consequently,  music  must  be 
good  or  bad  according  as  it  conforms  to  the  laws 
of  this  natural  language."  1  But  what,  then,  of 
music  which,  according  to  Ambros,  is  justified  by 
its  formal  relations  ?  Is  music  good  because  it  is 
very  expressive,  and  bad  because  it  is  too  little 
expressive?  or  is  its  goodness  and  badness  inde 
pendent  of  its  expressiveness  ?  Such  a  question  is 
not  to  be  answered  by  recognizing  two  kinds  of 
goodness.  Only  by  an  attempt  to  decide  the  funda 
mental  nature  of  the  musical  experience,  and  an 
adjustment  of  the  other  factors  in  strict  subordina 
tion  to  it,  can  the  general  principle  be  settled. 

The  excuse  for  this  artificial  yoking  together  of 
two  opposing  principles  is  apparent  when  it  is  seen 
that  form  and  expression  are  taken  as  addressing 
themselves  to  two  different  mental  faculties.  It 
seems  to  be  the  view  of  most  musical  theorists  that 
the  experience  of  musical  form  is  a  perception, 
while  the  experience  of  musical  expression,  disre- 

1  On  Education,  p.  41. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  155 

garding  for  the  moment  the  suggestion  of  facts 
and  ideas,  is  an  emotion.  Thus  Mr.  Mason  :  "  In 
music  we  are  capable  of  learning,  and  knowledge 
of  the  principles  of  musical  effect  can  help  us  to 
learn,  that  the  balance  and  proportion  and  sym 
metry  of  the  whole  is  far  more  essential  than  any 
poignancy,  however  great,  in  the  parts.  He  best 
appreciates  music  .  .  .  who  understands  it  intellect 
ually  as  well  as  feels  it  emotionally ; " l  and  again, 
"  We  feel  in  the  music  of  Haydn  its  lack  of  emo 
tional  depth,  and  its  lack  of  intellectual  subtlety." 

It  is  just  this  contrast  and  parallelism  of  struc 
ture  as  balance,  proportion,  symmetry,  addressed  to 
the  mind,  with  expression  as  emotional  content, 
that  a  true  view  of  the  aBsthetic  experience  would 
lead  us  to  challenge.  If  there  is  one  thing  that  our 
study  of  the  general  nature  of  aBsthetic  experience 
has  shown,  it  is  that  aBsthetic  emotion  is  unique 
—  neither  a  perception  nor  an  intellectual  grasp 
of  relations,  nor  an  emotion  within  the  accepted 
rubric  —  joy,  desire,  triumph,  etc.  Whether  or  not 
music  is  an  exception  to  this  principle,  remains  to 
be  seen ;  but  the  presumption  is  at  least  in  favor 
of  a  direct,  immediate,  unique  emotion  aroused  by 
the  true  beauty  of  music,  whatever  that  may  prove 
to  be. 

With  a  great  literature  in  the  form  of  special 
studies,  we  must  yet,  on  the  whole,  admit  that  we 
possess  no  general  formula  in  the  philosophy  or 
1  Op.  cit.,  p.  6. 


156      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

psychology  of  music  which  covers  the  whole  ground. 
Schopenhauer  has  said  that  music  is  the  objectifi- 
cation  of  the  will  —  not  a  copy  or  a  picture  of  it, 
but  the  will  itself ;  a  doctrine  which  however  illu 
minating  when  it  is  modified  in  various  ways  is  ob 
viously  no  explanation  of  our  experience.  Hanslick 
has  but  shown  what  music  is  not ;  Edmund  Gurney's 
eloquent  book,  "  The  Power  of  Sound,"  is  com 
pletely  agnostic  in  its  conclusion  that  music  is 
a  unique,  indefinable,  indescribable  phenomenon, 
which  possesses,  indeed,  certain  analogues  with 
other  physical  and  psychical  facts,  but  is  coexten 
sive  with  hone.  Spencer's  theory  of  music  as  glo 
rified  speech  is  not  only  in  as  yet  unexplained 
conflict  with  many  facts,  but  has  never  been  formu 
lated  so  that  it  could  apply  to  concrete  cases.  The 
same  is  true  of  Wagner's  "  music  as  the  utterance 
of  feeling." 

But  there  is  a  body  of  scientific  facts  respecting 
the  elements  of  music,  in  which  we  may  well  seek 
for  clues.  As  facts  alone  they  are  of  no  value. 
They  must  be  explained  as  completely  as  possible ; 
and  it  is  probable  that  if  we  are  able  to  reach  the 
ultimate  nature  and  origin  of  these  elements  of 
music  they  will  prove  significant,  and  a  way  will 
be  opened  to  a  theory  of  the  whole  musical  experi 
ence.  The  need  of  such  intensive  understanding 
must  excuse  the  more  or  less  technical  discussions 
in  the  following  pages,  without  which  no  firm 
foundation  for  a  theory  of  music  could  be  attained. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF   MUSIC  157 


II 

The  two  great  factors  of  music  are  rhythm  and 
tone-sensation,  of  which  rhythm  appears  to  be  the 
more  fundamental. 

Rhythm  is  defined  in  general  as  a  repeating  series 
of  time  intervals.  Events  which  occur  in  such  a 
series  are  said  to  have  rhythm.  In  aesthetics,  it  is 
the  periodic  recurrence  of  stress,  emphasis,  or  accent 
in  the  movements  of  dancing,  the  sounds  of  music, 
the  language  of  poetry.  Subjectively  it  is  the 
quality  of  stimulation  due  to  a  succession  of  impres 
sions  (tactual  and  auditory  are  most  favorable) 
which  vary  regularly  in  objective  intensity.  We 
desire  to  understand  the  nature,  and  the  source 
of  the  pleasing  quality,  of  this  phenomenon. 

It  is  only  by  a  complete  psychological  description, 
however,  even  a  physiological  explanation,  that  we 
can  hope  to  fathom  the  tremendous  significance 
of  rhythm  in  music  and  poetry.  Those  treatments 
which  expose  its  development  in  the  dance  and 
song  really  beg  the  question  ;  they  assume  the 
very  fact  for  which  we  have  to  find  the  ground, 
namely,  the  natural  impulse  to  rhythm.  Even  those 
theories  which  explain  it  as  a  helpful  social  phe 
nomenon,  as  regulating  work,  etc.,  fail  to  account 
for  its  peculiar  psychological  character  —  that  com 
pelling,  intimate  force,  the  "  Zwang "  of  which 
Nietszche  speaks,  which  we  all  feel,  and  which  makes 


158      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

it  helpful.  This  compelling  quality  of  rhythm  would 
lead  us  to  look  behind  the  sociological  influences, 
for  the  explanation  in  some  fundamental  condition 
of  consciousness,  some  "  demand  "  of  the  organism. 
For  this  reason  we  must  find  superficial  the  views 
which  connect  rhythm  with  the  symmetry  of  the  body 
as  making  rhythmical  gesture  necessary;  or  more 
particularly  with  the  conditions  of  work,  which,  if 
it  is  skilled  and  well  carried  out,  proceeds  in  equal 
recurring  periods,  like  the  swinging  of  a  hammer 
or  an  axe.  But  it  appears  that  primitive  effort  is 
not  carried  on  in  this  way,  and  proceeds,  not  from 
regularity  to  rhythm,  but  rather,  through,  by  means 
of  rhythm,  which  is  made  a  help,  to  regularity. 
Again,  it  is  said  that  work  can  be  well  carried 
out  by  a  large  number  of  people,  only  in  unison, 
only  by  simultaneous  action,  and  that  rhythm  is 
a  condition  of  this.  The  work  in  the  cotton  fields, 
the  work  of  sailors,  etc.,  requires  something  to 
give  notice  of  the  moment  for  beginning  action. 
Rhythm  would  then  have  arisen  as  a  social  func 
tion.  Against  this  it  may  be  said  that  signals  of  this 
kind  might  assist  common  action  without  recurring 
at  regular  intervals,  while  periodicity  is  the  funda 
mental  quality  of  rhythm.  Thus  this  theory  would 
explain  a  natural  tendency  by  its  effect. 

Looking  then,  in  accordance  with  the  principle 
stated  above,  for  deeper  conditions,  we  find  rhythm 
explained  in  connection  with  such  rhythmical 
events  as  the  heart  beat  and  pulse,  the  double 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  159 

rhythm  of  the  breath ;  but  these  are,  for  the  most 
part,  unfelt ;  and  moreover,  they  would  hardly  ex 
plain  the  predominance  of  rhythms  quite  other  than 
the  physiological  ones.  Another  theory,  closely  al 
lied,  connects  rhythm  with  the  conditions  of  activity 
in  general,  but  attaches  itself  rather  to  the  effect 
of  rhythm  than  to  its  cause.  Thus  we  are  reminded 
of  the  "heightened  sense  of  expansion,  or  life, 
connected  with  the  augmentation  of  muscular 
movements  induced  by  the  more  extensive  nervous 
discharges  following  rhythmic  stimulation." 1  But 
why  should  it  be  just  rhythmic  stimulation  that  pro 
duces  this  effect  ?  We  are  finally  thrown  back  on 
physiology  for  the  answer  that  in  rhythmical  stim 
ulation  there  are  involved  recurrent  activities  of 
organs  refreshed  by  immediately  preceding  periods 
of  repose.  Here  again,  however,  we  must  ask,  why 
on  this  hypothesis  the  periods  themselves  must  be 
exactly  equal.  For  within  the  periods  the  greatest 
variety  obtains.  One  measure  of  a  single  note  may 
be  succeeded  by  another  containing  eight ;  within 
the  periods,  that  is,  the  minor  moments  of  activity 
and  repose  are  quite  unequal. 

Last  of  all,  we  must  note  the  view  of  rhythm  as 
a  phenomenon  of  expectation  (Wundt).  But  while 
we  can  undoubtedly  describe  rhythm  in  terms  of 
expectation  and  its  satisfaction,  rhythm  is  rhythm 
just  through  its  difference  from  other  kinds  of  ex 
pectation. 

1  H.  E.  Marshall,  Pain,  Pleasure,  and  Esthetics. 


160      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

All  these  explanations  seem  either  merely  to 
describe  the  facts  we  seek  to  explain,  or  to  fail 
to  notice  the  peculiar  intimate  nature  of  the 
rhythmical  experience.  But  if  it  could  be  shown 
not  only  that  in  all  stimulation  there  must  be  in 
volved  an  alternation  of  activity  and  repose,  but 
also  that  an  equality  of  such  periods  was  highly 
favorable  to  the  organism,  we  should  have  the  con 
ditions  for  a  physiological  theory  of  rhythm.  Now 
the  important  psychological  facts  of  so-called  sub 
jective  rhythrnizing  seem  to  supply  just  this  need. 

It  has  been  shown l  that  we  can  neither  receive 
objectively  equal  sense-stimuli,  nor  produce  regular 
movements,  without  injecting  into  these  a  rhyth 
mical  element.  A  series  of  objectively  equal  sound- 
stimuli  —  the  ticking  of  a  clock,  for  instance  —  is 
heard  in  groups,  within  each  of  which  one  element 
is  of  greater  intensity.  A  series  of  movements  are 
never  objectively  equal,  but  grouped  in  the  same 
way.  Now  this  subjective  rhythm,  sensory  and 
motor,  is  explained  as  follows  from  the  general 
physiological  basis  of  attention. 

Attention  itself  is  ultimately  a  motor  phenome 
non.  Thus :  the  sensory  aspect  of  attention  is  vivid 
ness,  and  vividness  is  explained  physiologically  as 
a  brain-state  of  readiness  for  motor  discharge ; 2  in 


1  T.  L.  Bolton,  Amer.  Jour,  of  PsychoL,  vol.  vi.   The  classical 
historical  study  of  theories  of  rhythm  remains  that  of  Meumaim, 
Phil.  Studien,  vol.  x. 

2  Miinsterberg,  Grundzuge  d.  Psychologic,  1902,  p.  525. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  161 

the  case  of  a  visual  stimulus,  for  instance,  a  state  of 
readiness  to  carry  out  movements  of  adjustment 
to  the  object ;  in  short,  the  motor  path  is  open. 
Now  attention,  or  vividness,  is  found  to  fluctuate 
periodically,  so  that  in  a  series  of  objectively  equal 
stimuli,  certain  ones,  regularly  recurring,  would  be 
more  vividly  sensed.  This  is  exemplified  in  the 
well-known  facts  of  the  fluctuation  of  the  threshold 
of  sensation,  of  the  so-called  retinal  rivalry,  and 
of  the  subjective  rhythmizing  of  auditory  stimuli, 
already  mentioned.  There  is  a  natural  rhythm  of 
vividness.  Here,  therefore,  in  the  very  conditions 
of  consciousness  itself,  we  have  the  conditions  of 
rhythm  too.  The  case  of  subjective  motor  rhythm 
would  be  still  clearer,  since  vividness  is  only  the 
psychical  side  of  readiness  for  motor  discharge ;  in 
other  words,  increased  readiness  for  motor  dis 
charge  occurs  periodically,  giving  motor  rhythm. 

It  has  been  said1  that  this  periodicity  of  the 
brain-wave  cannot  furnish  the  necessary  condition 
for  rhythm,  inasmuch  as  it  is  itself  a  constant,  and 
could  at  most  be  applied  to  a  series  which  was 
adapted  to  its  own  time.  But  this  objection  does 
not  fit  the  facts.  The  " brain- wave,"  or  "vivid 
ness,"  or  attention  period,  is  not  a  constant,  but 
attaches  itself  to  the  contents  of  consciousness.  In 
other  words,  it  does  not  function  without  material. 
It  is  itself  conditioned  by  its  occasion.  In  the  case 

1  J.  B.  Miner,  "  Motor,  Visual,  and  Applied  Rhythms,"  Psychol 
Rev.,  Mon.  Suppl.,  No.  21. 


162      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

of  a  regularly  repeated  stimulus,  it  is  simply  ad 
justed  to  what  is  there,  and  out  of  the  series 
chooses,  as  it  were,  one  at  regular  periods.1 

Closely  connected  with  these  facts,  perhaps  only 
a  somewhat  different  aspect  of  them,  is  the  phe 
nomenon  of  motor  mechanization.  Any  movement 
repeated  tends  to  become  a  circular  reaction,  as  it 
is  called ;  that  is,  the  end  of  one  repetition  serves 
as  a  cue  for  the  beginning  of  the  next.  Now,  in 
regularly  recurring  stimuli,  giving  rise,  as  will  be 
later  shown,  to  motor  reactions,  which  are  differ 
entiated  through  the  natural  periodicity  of  the 
attention  (physiologically  the  tendency  to  motor 
discharge),  we  have  the  best  condition  for  this 
mechanization.  In  other  words,  a  rhythmical  group 
ing  once  set  up  naturally  tends  to  persist.  The 
organism  prepares  itself  for  shocks  at  definite 
times,  and  shocks  coming  at  those  times  are  plea 
sant  because  they  fulfill  a  need.  Moreover,  every 
further  stimulus  reinforces  the  original  activity ; 
so  that  rhythmical  grouping  tends  not  only  to  per 
sist,  but  to  grow  more  distinct,  —  as,  indeed,  all 
the  facts  of  introspection  show. 

All  this,  however,  is  true  of  the  repetition  of 
objectively  equal  stimuli.  It  shows  how  an  impulse 
to  rhythm  would  arise  and  persist  subjectively,  but 

1  Facts,  too  technical  for  reproduction  here,  quoted  by  R.  H. 
Stetson  (Harvard  Psychol.  Studies,  vol.  i.,  1902)  from  Cleghorn's 
and  Hofbauer's  experiments  seem  to  be  in  harmony  with  this 
view. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  163 

does  not  of  itself  explain  the  pleasure  in  the  ex 
perience  of  objective  rhythm.  It  may  be  said  in 
general,  however,  that  changes  which  would  occur 
naturally  in  an  objectively  undifferentiated  con 
tent  give  direct  pleasure  when  they  are  artificially 
introduced,  —  when,  that  is,  the  natural  disposi 
tion  is  satisfied.  This  we  have  seen  to  be  true  in 
the  case  of  color  contrast ;  and  it  is  perhaps  even 
more  valid  in  the  realm  of  motor  activity.  What 
ever  in  sense  stimulation  gives  the  condition  for, 
helps,  furthers,  enhances  the  natural  function,  is 
felt  both  as  pleasing  and  as  furthering  the  par 
ticular  activity  in  question.  Now,  the  objective 
stress  in  rhythm  is  but  emphasis  on  a  stress  that 
would  be  in  any  case  to  some  degree  subjectively 
supplied.  Rhythm  in  music,  abstracting  from  all 
other  pleasure-giving  factors,  is  then  pleasurable 
because  it  is  in  every  sense  a  favorable  stimulation. 
In  accordance  with  the  principle  that  complete 
explanation  of  psychical  facts  is  possible  only 
through  the  physiological  substrate,  we  have  so  far 
kept  rather  to  that  field  in  dealing  with  the  foun 
dations  of  our  pleasure  in  rhythm.  But  further 
description  of  the  rhythmical  experience  is  most 
natural  in  psychological  terms.  There  seems,  in 
deed,  on  principle  no  ground  for  the  current  anti 
thesis,  so  much  emphasized  of  late,  of  "  psychical  " 
and  "motor"  theories  of  rhythm.  Attention  and 
expectation  are  not  "  psychical "  as  opposed  to 
"  motor."  Granting,  as  no  doubt  most  psychologists 


164      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

would  grant,  that  attention  is  the  psychical  analogue 
of  the  physiological  tendency  to  motor  discharge, 
then  a  motor  automatism  of  which  one  is  fully 
conscious  could  be  described  as  expectation  and  its 
satisfaction.  Indeed,  the  impossibility  of  a  sharp 
distinction  between  ideas  of  movement  and  move 
ment  sensations  confirms  this  view.  When  expec 
tation  has  reference  to  an  experience  with  a  move 
ment  element  in  it,  the  expectation  itself  contains 
movement  sensations  of  the  kind  in  question.1 
To  say,  then,  that  rhythm  is  expectation  based  on 
the  natural  functioning  of  the  attention  period,  is 
simply  to  clothe  our  physiological  explanation  in 
terms  of  psychological  description.  The  usual 
motor  theory  is  merely  one  which  neglects  the 
primary  disposition  to  rhythm  through  attention 
variations,  in  favor  of  the  sensations  of  muscular 
tension  (kinaesthetic  sensations)  which  arise  in 
rhythm,  but  do  not  cause  it.  To  say  that  the  im 
pression  of  rhythm  arises  only  in  kinaesthetic  sen 
sations  begs  the  question  in  the  way  previously 
noted.  Undoubtedly,  the  period  once  established, 
the  rhythmic  group  is  held  together,  felt  as  a  unit, 
by  means  of  the  coordinated  movement  sensations  ; 
but  the  main  problem,  the  possibility  of  this  first 
establishment,  is  not  solved  by  such  a  motor  theory. 
In  other  words,  the  attention  theory  is  the  real 
motor  theory. 

1  C.  M.  Hitchcock,  "  The  Psychol.  of  Expectation,1'  Psychol. 
Rev.,  Mon.  Suppl,  No.  20. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  165 

Expectation  is  the  "  set  "  of  the  attention.  Au 
tomatism  is  the  set  of  the  motor  centres.  Now  as 
attention  is  parallel  to  the  condition  of  the  motor 
centres,  we  are  able  to  equate  expectation  and 
automatic  movement.  Rhythm  is  literally  embodied 
expectation,  fulfilled.  It  is  therefore  easily  to  be 
understood  that  whatever  other  emotions  connect 
themselves  with  satisfied  expectation  are  at  their 
ideal  poignance  in  the  case  of  rhythm. 

It  is  from  this  point  of  view  that  we  must  under 
stand  the  helpfulness  of  rhythm  in  work.  That  all 
definite  stimulus,  and  especially  sound  stimulus, 
rhythmical  or  not,  sets  up  a  diffusive  wave  of 
energy,  increasing  blood  circulation,  dynamogenic 
phenomena,  etc.,  is  another  matter,  which  has  later 
to  be  discussed.  But  the  essential  is  that  this  addi 
tional  stimulus  is  rhythmical,  and  therefore  a  rein 
forcement  of  the  nervous  activity,  and  therefore  a 
lightening  and  favorable  condition  of  work  itself. 
So  it  is,  too,  that  we  can  understand  the  tremen 
dous  influence  of  rhythm  just  among  primitive  peo 
ples,  and  those  of  a  low  degree  of  culture.  Work 
is  hard  for  savages,  not  because  bodily  effort  is 
hard,  but  because  the  necessary  concentration  of 
attention  is  for  them  almost  impossible ;  and  the 
more,  that  in  work  they  are  unskilled,  and  without 
good  tools,  so  that  generally  every  movement  has  to 
be  especially  attended  to.  Now  rhythm  in  work  is 
especially  directed  to  lighten  that  effort  which  they 
feel  as  hardest ;  it  rests,  renews,  and  frees  the  atten- 


166      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

tion.  Rhythm  is  helpful  not  primarily  because  it 
enables  many  to  work  together  by  making  effort 
simultaneous,  but  rhythm  rests  and  encourages  the 
individual,  and  working  together  is  most  naturally 
carried  out  in  rhythm. 

To  this  explanation  all  the  other  factors  of  life- 
enhancement,  etc.,  can  be  attached.  Rhythm  is  un 
doubtedly  favorable  stimulation.  Can  it  be  brought 
under  the  full  esthetic  formula  of  favorable  stim 
ulation  with  repose  ?  A  rhythm  once  established 
has  both  retrospective  and  prospective  reference. 
It  looks  before  and  after,  it  binds  together  the  first 
and  the  last  moments  of  activity,  and  can  therefore 
truly  be  said  to  return  upon  itself,  so  as  to  give  a 
sense  of  equilibrium  and  repose. 

But  when  we  turn  from  the  fundamental  facts  of 
simple  rhythm  to  the  phenomena  of  art  we  find 
straightway  many  other  problems.  It  is  safe  to  say 
that  no  single  phrase  of  music  or  line  of  poetry  is 
without  variation ;  more,  that  a  rhythm  without 
variation  would  be  highly  disagreeable.  How  must 
we  understand  these  facts  ?  It  is  impossible  within 
the  natural  limitations  of  this  chapter  to  do  more 
than  glance  at  a  few  of  them. 

First  of  all,  then,  the  most  striking  thing  about 
the  rhythmical  experience  is  that  the  period,  or 
group,  is  felt  as  a  unit.  "  Of  the  number  and  rela 
tion  of  individual  beats  constituting  a  rhythmical 
sequence  there  is  no  awareness  whatever  on  the  part 
of  the  aesthetic  subject.  .  .  .  Even  the  quality  of 


THE   BEAUTY   OF   MUSIC  167 

the  organic  units  may  lapse  from  distinct  conscious 
ness,  and  only  a  feeling  of  the  form  of  the  whole 
sequence  remains."  1  Yet  the  slightest  deviation 
from  its  form  is  remarked.  Secondly,  every  varia 
tion  creates  not  only  a  change  in  its  own  unit,  but 
a  wave  of  disturbance  all  along  the  line.  Also, 
every  variation  from  the  type  indicates  a  point  of 
accentual  stress;  the  syncopated  measure,  for  in 
stance,  is  always  strongly  accented.  Ail  these  facts 
would  seem  to  be  connected  with  the  view  of  the 
importance  of  movement  sensations  in  building  up 
the  group  feeling.  The  end  of  each  rhythm  period 
gives  the  cue  for  the  beginning  of  the  next,  and 
the  muscle  tensions  are  coordinated  within  each 
group ;  so  that  each  group  is  really  continuous, 
and  would  naturally  be  "  felt  "  as  one,  —  but  be 
ing  automatic,  would  not  be  perceived  in  its  sepa 
rate  elements.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  just  auto 
matic  reaction,  a  deviation  from  which  is  felt  most 
strongly.  The  syncopated  measure  has  to  main 
tain  itself  against  pressure,  as  it  were,  and  thus 
by  making  its  presence  in  consciousness  felt  more 
strongly,  it  emphasizes  the  fundamental  rhythm 
form. 

This  is  well  shown  in  the  following  passage  from 
a  technical  treatise  on  expression  in  the  playing  of 
music.  "  The  efforts  which  feeling  makes  to  hold 
to  ...  the  shape  of  the  first  rhythm,  the  force 

1  R.  MacDougall,  "  The  Structure  of  Simple  Rhythm  Forms," 
Harv.  Psychol.  Studies,  vol.  i.,  p.  o32. 


168      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

which  it  is  necessary  to  use  to  make  it  lose  its  de 
sires  and  its  habits,  and  to  impose  others  on  it,  are 
naturally  expressed  by  an  agitation,  that  is,  by  a 
crescendo  or  greater  intensity  of  sound,  by  an  ac 
celeration  in  movement."  l  If  a  purely  technical 
expression  may  be  pardoned  here,  it  could  be  said 
that  the  motor  image,2  that  is,  the  coordinated  mus 
cular  tensions  which  make  the  group  feeling  of  the 
fundamental  rhythm,  is  always  latent,  and  becomes 
conscious  whenever  anything  conflicts  with  it.  Thus 
it  is  that  we  can  understand  the  tremendous  rhyth 
mical  consciousness  in  that  music  which  seems 
most  to  contradict  the  fundamental  rhythm,  as  in 
negro  melodies,  and  rag-time  generally ;  and  in 
general,  the  livening  effect  of  variation.  The  motor 
tension,  the  "  set "  becomes  felt  the  moment  there 
is  objective  interference  —  just  as  we  feel  the 
rhythm  of  our  going  downstairs  only  when  we  fail 
to  get  the  sensation  we  expect. 

This  principle  of  the  motor  image  is  of  tremen 
dous  significance,  as  we  shall  see,  for  the  whole 
theory  of  music.  Let  it  be  sufficient  to  note  here 
that  expectation,  in  the  form  of  G estaltsqualitat, 
or  motor  image,  is,  as  a  principle,  sufficient  for  the 
explanation  of  the  most  important  factors  in  the 
experience  of  rhythm. 

1  M.  Lussy,  TraitS  de  ?  Expression  Musicale,  Paris,  1874,  p.  7. 

2  Gestaltsqualitat,  literally  form-quality. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  169 


III 

But  we  have  dwelt  too  long  on  the  general  char 
acteristics.  Although  our  examples  have  been 
drawn  mostly  from  the  field  of  music,  the  preced 
ing  principles  apply  to  all  kinds  of  rhythm,  tactual 
and  visual  as  well  as  auditory.  It  is  time  to  show 
why  the  rhythm  out  of  all  comparison  the  strong 
est,  most  compelling,  most  full  of  emotional  quality, 
is  the  rhythm  of  music. 

It  has  long  been  known  that  there  is  especially 
close  connection  between  sounds  and  motor  inner- 
vations.  All  sorts  of  sensorial  stimuli  produce  re 
flex  contractions,  but  the  auditory,  apparently,  to  a 
much  higher  degree.  Animals  are  excited  to  all 
sorts  of  outbreaks  by  noise ;  children  are  less 
alarmed  by  visual  than  by  auditory  impressions. 
The  fact  that  we  dance  to  sound  rather  than  to  the 
waving  of  a  baton,  or  rhythmical  flashes  of  light 
for  instance  —  the  fact  that  this  second  proposition 
is  felt  at  once  to  be  absurd,  shows  how  intimately 
the  two  are  bound  together.  The  irresistible  effects 
of  dance,  martial  music,  etc.,  are  trite  common 
places  ;  and  I  shall  therefore  not  heap  up  instances 
which  can  be  supplied  by  every  reader  from  his 
own  experience.  Now  all  this  is  not  hard  to  under 
stand,  biologically.  The  eye  mediated  the  infor 
mation  of  what  was  far  enough  away  to  be  fled 
from,  or  prepared  for ;  the  ear  what  was  likely  to 


170      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

be  nearer,  unseen,  and  so  more  ominous.  As  more 
ominous,  it  would  have  to  be  responded  to  in  action 
more  quickly.  So  that  if  any  sense  was  to  be  in 
especially  close  connection  with  the  motor  centres, 
it  would  naturally  be  hearing. 

The  development  of  the  auditory  functions 
points  to  the  same  close  connection  of  sound  and 
movement.  Sounds  affect  us  as  tone,  and  as  im 
pulse.  The  primitive  sensation  was  one  of  impulse 
alone,  mediated  by  the  "  shake-organs."  These 
shake-organs  at  first  only  gave  information  about 
the  attitude  and  movements  of  the  body,  and  were 
connected  with  motor  centres  so  as  to  be  able  to 
reestablish  equilibrium  by  means  of  reflexes.  The 
original  "  shake-organ  "  developed  into  the  organs 
of  hearing  and  of  equilibrium  (that  is,  the  cochlea 
and  the  semicircular  canals  respectively),  but  these 
were  still  side  by  side  in  the  inner  ear,  and  the  close 
connection  with  the  motor  centres  was  not  lost. 
Anatomically,  the  auditory  nerve  not  only  goes  to 
those  parts  of  the  brain  whence  the  motor  inner- 
vation  emanates,  and  to  the  reflex  centres  in  the 
cerebellum,  but  passes  close  by  the  vagus  or 
pneumogastric  nerve,  which  rules  the  heart  and  the 
vasomotor  functions.  We  have  then  multiplied 
reasons  for  the  singular  effect  of  sound  on  motor 
reactions,  and  on  the  other  organic  functions  which 
have  so  much  to  do  with  feeling  and  emotion. 

Every  sound-stimulus  is  then  much  more  than 
sound-sensation.  It  causes  reflex  contractions  in 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  MUSIC  171 

the  whole  muscular  system  ;  it  sets  up  some  sort  of 
cardiac  and  vascular  excitation.  This  reaction  is  in 
general  in  the  direction  of  increased  amplitude  of 
respiration,  but  diminution  of  the  pulse,  depending 
on  a  peripheral  vaso-constriction.  Moreover,  this 
vasomotor  reaction  is  given  in  a  melody  or  piece 
of  music,  not  by  its  continuity,  but  for  every  one 
of  the  variations  of  rhythm,  key,  or  intensity,  — 
which  is  of  interest  in  the  light  of  what  has  been 
said  of  the  latent  motor  image.  The  obstacle  in 
syncopated  rhythm  is  physiologically  translated  as 
vaso-constriction.  In  general,  music  induces  car 
diac  acceleration. 

All  this  is  of  value  in  showing  how  completely 
the  attention-motor  theory  of  rhythm  applies  to  the 
rhythm  of  sounds.  Since  sound  is  much  more  than 
sound,  but  sound-sensation,  movement,  and  visceral 
change  together,  we  can  see  that  the  rhythmical 
experience  of  music  is,  even  more  literally  and 
completely  than  at  first  appeared,  an  embodied 
expectation.  No  sensorial  rhythm  could  be  so  com 
pletely  induced  in  the  psychophysical  organism  as 
the  sound-rhythm.  In  listening  to  music,  we  see 
how  it  is  that  we  ourselves,  body  and  soul,  seem 
to  be  in  the  rhythm.  We  make  it,  and  we  wait  to 
make  it.  The  satisfaction  of  our  expectation  is 
like  the  satisfaction  of  a  bodily  desire  or  need  ; 
no,  not  like  it,  it  is  that.  The  conditions  and 
causes  of  rhythm  and  our  pleasure  in  it  are  more 
deeply  seated  than  language,  custom,  even  instinct ; 


172      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

they  are  in  the  most  fundamental  functions  of  life. 
This  element  of  music,  at  least,  seems  not  to  have 
arisen  as  a  "  natural  language." 


IV 

The  facts  of  the  relations  of  tones,  the  elements, 
that  is,  of  melody  and  harmony,  are  as  follows. 
We  cannot  avoid  the  observation  that  certain  tones 
"  go  together,"  as  the  phrase  is,  while  others  do  not. 
This  peculiar  impression  of  belonging  together  is 
known  as  consonance,  or  harmony.  The  intervals 
of  the  octave,  the  fifth,  the  third,  for  instance, 
that  is,  C-C',  C-Gr,  C-E,  in  the  diatonic  scale, 
are  harmonious ;  while  the  interval  of  the  second, 
C-D,  is  said  to  be  dissonant.  Consonance,  how 
ever,  is  not  identical  with  pleasingness,  for  differ 
ent  combinations  are  sometimes  pleasing,  sometimes 
displeasing.  In  the  history  of  music  we  know  that 
the  octave  was  to  the  Greeks  the  most  pleasing 
combination,  to  mediaeval  musicians  the  fifth,  while 
to  us,  the  third,  which  was  once  a  forbidden  chord, 
is  perhaps  most  delightful.  Yet  we  should  never 
doubt  that  the  octave  is  the  most  consonant,  the 
fifth  and  the  third  the  lesser  consonant  of  combi 
nations.  We  see,  thus,  that  consonance,  whatever 
its  nature,  is  independent  of  history  ;  and  we  must 
seek  for  its  explanation  in  the  nature  of  the  audi 
tory  process. 

Various  theories  have  been  proposed.    That  of 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  173 

Helmholtz  has  held  the  field  so  long  that,  although 
weighty  objections  have  been  raised  to  it,  it  must 
still  be  treated  with  respect.  In  introducing  it  a 
short  review  of  the  familiar  facts  of  the  physics  and 
physiology  of  hearing  may  not  be  out  of  place. 

The  vibration  rates  per  second  of  the  vibrating 
bodies,  strings,  steel  rods,  etc.,  which  produce  those 
musical  tones  which  are  consonant,  are  in  definite 
and  small  mathematical  ratios  to  each  other.  Thus 
the  rates  of  C-C'  are  as  1 :  2  ;  of  C-G,  C-E,  as 
2  :  3,  4 : 5.  In  general,  the  simpler  the  fraction, 
the  greater  the  consonance. 

But  no  sonorous  body  vibrates  in  one  single  rate  ; 
a  taut  string  vibrates  as  a  whole,  which  gives  its 
fundamental  tone,  but  also  in  halves,  in  fourths, 
etc.,  each  giving  out  a  weaker  partial  tone,  in  har 
mony  with  the  fundamental.  And  according  to  the 
different  ways  in  which  a  sonorous  body  divides, 
that  is,  according  to  the  different  combination  of 
partial  tones  peculiar  to  it,  is  its  especial  quality 
of  tone,  or  timbre.  The  whole  complex  of  funda 
mental  and  partial  tones  is  what  we  popularly 
speak  of  as  a  tone, . —  more  technically  a  clang. 
These  physical  agitations  or  vibrations  are  trans 
mitted  to  the  air.  Omitting  the  account  of  the 
anatomical  path  by  which  they  reach  the  inner 
ear,  we  find  them  at  last  setting  up  vibrations  in 
a  many-fibred  membrane,  the  basilar  membrane, 
which  is  in  direct  connection  with  the  ends  of  the 
auditory  nerve.  It  is  supposed  that  to  every  pos- 


174      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

sible  rate  of  vibration,  that  is,  every  possible  tone, 
or  partial  tone,  there  corresponds  a  fibre  of  the 
basilar  membrane  fitted  by  its  length  to  vibrate 
synchronously  with  the  original  wave-elements. 
The  complex  wave  is  thus  analyzed  into  its  con 
stituents.  Now  when  two  tones,  which  we  will  for 
clearness  suppose  to  be  simple,  unaccompanied  by 
partial  tones,  sounding  together,  have  vibration 
rates  in  simple  ratios  to  each  other,  the  air-waves 
set  in  motion  do  not  interfere  with  each  other,  but 
combine  into  a  complex  but  homogeneous  wave. 
If  they  have  to  each  other  a  complicated  ratio, 
such  as  500 : 504,  the  air-waves  will  not  only  not 
coalesce,  but  four  times  in  the  second  the  trough 
of  one  wave  will  meet  the  crest  of  the  other,  thus 
making  the  algebraic  sum  zero,  and  producing  the 
sensation  of  a  momentary  stoppage  of  the  sound. 
When  these  stoppages,  or  beats,  as  they  are  called, 
are  too  numerous  to  be  heard  separately,  as  in  the 
interval,  say,  500  : 547,  the  effect  is  of  a  disagree 
able  roughness  of  tone,  and  this  we  call  discord. 
In  other  words,  any  tones  which  do  not  produce 
beats  are  harmonious,  or  harmony  is  the  absence  of 
discord.  In  the  words  of  Helmholtz,1  consonance 
is  a  continuous,  dissonance  an  intermittent,  tone- 
sensation. 

Aside  from  the  fact  that  consonance,  as  a  psy 
chological  fact,  seems  positive,  while  this  determi 
nation  is  negative,  two  very  important  facts  can  be 

1  Lehre  v.  d.  Tonempjindungen,  p.  370,  in  4th  edition. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  175 

set  up  in  opposition.  As  a  result  of  experimental 
investigation,  we  know  that  the  impression  of  con 
sonance  can  accompany  the  intermittent  or  rough 
sound-sensations  we  know  as  beating  tones ;  and, 
conversely,  tones  can  be  dissonant  when  the  possi 
bility  of  beats  is  removed.  Briefly,  it  is  possible 
to  make  beats  without  dissonance,  and  dissonance 
without  beats. 

The  other  explanation  makes  consonance  due  to 
the  identity  of  partial  tones.  When  two  tones 
have  one  or  more  partial  tones  in  common  they  are 
said  to  be  related ;  the  amount  of  identity  gives 
the  degree  of  relationship.  Physiologically,  one  or 
more  basilar  membrane  fibres  are  excited  by  both, 
and  this  fact  gives  the  positive  feeling  of  relation 
ship  or  consonance.  Of  course  the  obvious  objec 
tion  to  this  view  is  that  the  two  tones  should  be 
felt  as  differently  consonant  when  struck  on  instru 
ments  which  give  different  partial  tones,  such  as 
organ  and  piano,  while  in  fact  they  are  not  so 
felt. 

But  it  is  not  after  all  essential  to  the  aesthetics 
of  music  that  the  physiological  basis  of  harmony 
should  be  fully  understood.  The  point  is  that  cer 
tain  tones  do  indeed  seem  to  be  "  preordained  to 
congruity,"  preordained  either  in  their  physical  con 
stitution  or  their  physiological  relations,  and  not 
to  have  achieved  congruity  by  use  or  custom.  Con 
sonance  is  an  immediate  and  fundamental  impres 
sion,  —  psychologically  an  ultimate  fact.  That  it 


176      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

is  ultimate  is  emphasized  by  Stumpf 1  in  his  theory 
of  Fusion.  Consonance  is  fusion,  that  is,  Unitary 
impression.  Fusion  is  not  identical  with  inability 
to  distinguish  two  tones  from  each  other  in  a  chord, 
although  this  may  be  used  as  a  measure  of  fusion. 
Consonance  is  the  feeling  of  unity,  and  fusion  is 
the  mutual  relation  of  tones  which  gives  that  feel 
ing. 

The  striking  fact  of  modern  music  is  the  princi 
ple  of  tonality.  Tonality  is  said  to  be  present  in  a 
piece  of  music  when  every  element  in  it  is  referred 
to,  gets  its  significance  from  its  relation  to,  a  funda 
mental  tone,  the  tonic.  The  tonic  is  the  beginning 
and  lowest  note  in  the  scale  in  question,  and  all 
notes  and  chords  are  understood  according  to  their 
place  in  that  scale.  But  the  conception  of  the  scale 
of  course  does  not  cover  the  ground,  it  merely  fur 
nishes  the  point  of  departure,  —  the  essential  is 
in  the  reference  of  every  element  to  the  fundamen 
tal  tone.  The  tonic  is  the  centre  of  gravity  of  a 
melody. 

The  feeling  of  tonality  grew  up  as  follows. 
Every  tone  was  referred  to  a  fundamental,  whether 
or  not  it  made  with  it  an  harmonious  interval.  The 
fundamental  was  imaged  together  with  every  other 
note,  and  when  a  group  of  such  references  often 
appeared  together,  the  feelings  bound  up  with  the 
single  reference  (interval-feelings)  fused  into  a 

1  Beitrage  zur  Akustik  u.  Musikwissenschaft,  Heft  I,  Konso- 
nanz  u.  DLisoiiciiiz.  1898. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  177 

single  feeling,  —  the  tonality-feeling.  When  this 
point  is  once  reached,  it  is  clear  that  every  tone  is 
heard  not  as  itself  alone,  but  in  its  relations ;  it  is 
not  that  we  judge  of  tonality,  it  is  a  direct  impres 
sion,  based  on  a  psychological  principle  that  we 
have  already  touched  on  in  the  theory  of  rhythm. 
The  tonality-feeling  is  a  feeling  of  form,  or  motor 
image,  just  as  the  shape  of  objects  is  a  motor  image. 
We  do  not  now  need  to  go  through  all  possible 
experiences  in  relation  to  these  objects  ;  we  possess 
their  form  in  a  system  of  motor  images,  which  are 
themselves  only  motor  cues  for  coordinated  move 
ments.  So  every  tone  is  felt  as  something  at  a 
certain  distance  from,  with  a  certain  relation  to, 
another  tone  which  is  dimly  imagined.  In  following 
a  melody,  the  notes  are  able  to  belong  together  for 
us  by  virtue  of  the  background  of  the  tone  to  which 
they  are  related,  and  in  terms  of  which  they  are 
heard.  The  tonality  is  indeed  literally  a  "  funded 
content,"  —  that  is,  a  funded  capital  of  relations. 

These  are  the  general  facts  of  tonality.  But 
what  is  its  meaning  for  the  nature  of  music  ?  Why 
should  all  notes  be  referred  to  one?  Is  this,  too, 
an  ultimate  psychological  fact?  In  answer  there 
may  be  pointed  out  the  original  basic  quality  of 
certain  tones,  and  the  desire  we  have  to  return  to 
them.  Of  two  successive  tones,  it  is  always  the 
one  which  is,  in  the  ratio  of  their  vibration  rates, 
a  power  of  two,  with  which  we  wish  to  end.1  When 
1  Max  Meyer,  A  Psychological  Theory  of  Melody. 


178      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

neither  of  two  successive  tones  contains  a  power  of 
two,  we  have  no  preference  as  to  the  ending.  Thus 
denoting  any  tone  by  1,  it  is  always  to  1  or  2,  or  2n 
that  we  wish  to  return,  from  any  other  possible  tone ; 
while  3  and  5,  5  and  7,  leave  us  indifferent  as  to 
their  succession.  In  general,  when  two  tones  are 
related,  as  2n  :  3,  5,  7,  9,  15  —  in  which  2n  denotes 
every  power  of  two,  including  2°  =  !,  with  the  pro 
gression  from  the  first  to  the  second,  there  is  bound 
up  a  tendency  to  return  to  the  first.  Thus  the  fun 
damental  fact  of  melodic  sequence  may  be  said 
to  be  the  primacy  of  2  in  vibration  rates.  But  2n, 
in  a  scale  containing  3,  5,  etc.,  is  always  what  we 
know  as  the  tonic.  The  tonic,  then,  gives  a  sense 
of  equilibrium,  of  rest,  of  finality,  while  to  end  on 
another  tone  gives  a  feeling  of  restlessness  or 
striving. 

Now  tone-relationship  alone,  it  is  clear,  would 
not  of  itself  involve  this  immediate  impulse  to  end 
a  sequence  of  notes  on  one  rather  than  on  another. 
Nor  is  tonality,  in  the  all-pervasive  sense  in  which 
we  understand  it,  a  characteristic  of  ancient,  or  of 
mediaeval  music,  while  the  tendency  to  end  on  a 
certain  tone,  which  we  should  to-day  call  the  tonic, 
was  always  felt.  Thus,  since  complete  tonality  was 
developed  late  in  the  history  of  music,  while  the 
closing  on  the  tonic  was  certainly  prior  to  it,  the 
finality  of  the  tonic  would  seem  to  be  the  primary 
fact,  out  of  which  the  other  has  been  developed. 

We   speak   to-day,  for   instance,  of   dissonant 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  179 

chords,  which  call  for  a  resolution  —  and  are  in 
clined  to  interpret  them  as  dissonant  just  because 
they  do  so  call.  But  the  desire  for  resolution  is 
historically  much  later  than  the  distinction  between 
consonance  and  dissonance.  .  .  .  "  What  we  call 
resolution  is  not  change  from  dissonant  to  conso 
nant  in  general,  but  the  transition  of  definite  tones 
of  a  dissonant  interval  into  definite  tones  of  a 
consonant." 1  The  dissonance  comes  from  the  de 
vice  of  getting  variety,  in  polyphonic  music,  by 
letting  some  parts  lag  behind,  and  the  discords 
which  arose  while  they  were  catching  up  were  re 
solved  in  the  final  coming  together ;  but  the  steps 
were  all  predetermined. 2  Resolution  was  inevitably 
implied  by  the  very  principle  on  which  the  device 
is  founded.  That  is,  the  understanding  of  a  chord 
as  something  to  be  resolved,  is  indeed  part  of  the 
feeling  of  tonality ;  but  the  ending  on  the  tonic 
was  that  out  of  which  this  resolution-feeling  grew. 

Must  we,  then,  say  that  the  finality  of  the  tonic 
is  a  unique,  inexplicable  phenomenon  ?  giving  up 
the  nature  of  melody  as  a  problem  if  not  insoluble, 
at  least  unsolved  ? 

The  feeling  of  finality  in  the  return  to  2n  is  ex 
plained  by  Lipps  and  his  followers,  from  the  fact 
that  the  two-division  is  most  natural,  and  so  tones 
of  2n  vibrations  would  have  the  character  of  rest 
and  equilibrium.  This  explanation  might  hold  if 

1  Stumpf,  op.  a'*.,  p.  33. 

2  Grove,  Diet,  of  Music  and  Musicians.    Art.  "  Resolution." 


180      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

we  were  ever  conscious  of  the  two-division  as  such, 
in  tones  —  which  we  are  not ;  so  that  it  would 
seem  to  depend  on  the  restful  character  of  a  per 
ception  which  by  hypothesis  is  never  present  to 
the  mind  at  all. 

The  experience  is,  on  the  contrary,  immediate,  — 
an  impression,  not  a  perception  ;  and  this  immediacy 
points  to  the  one  ultimate  fact  in  musical  feeling  we 
have  so  far  discovered.  The  whole  development 
of  the  scale,  and  the  complex  feeling  of  tonality,  is 
an  expression  of  the  desire  for  consonance.  Every 
change  and  correction  in  the  scale  has  gone  to  make 
every  note  more  consonant  with  its  neighbors. 
And  naturally  the  tonic  is  the  tone  with  which  all 
other  tones  have  the  most  unity.  Now  this  "  re 
turn  "  phenomenon  is  a  simpler  case  of  the  desire 
for  the  feeling  of  unity.  The  tonic  is  the  epitome 
of  all  the  most  perfect  feelings  of  consonance  or 
unity  which  are  possible  in  any  particular  sequence 
of  tones,  and  is  therefore  the  goal  or  resting- 
place  after  an  excursion.  The  undoubted  feeling  of 
equilibrium  or  repose  which  we  have  in  ending  on 
the  tonic  is  thus  explained.  Not  that  consonance 
itself,  the  feeling  of  unity,  is  explained.  But  at 
any  rate  consonance  is  the  root  of  the  "  return," 
and  of  its  development  into  complete  tonality. 

The  history  of  music  is  then  the  explicit  develop 
ment  of  acoustic  laws  implicit  in  every  stage  of 
musical  feeling.  That  feeling  covers  an  ever  wider 
field.  When  Mr.  Hadow  says  that  the  terms  con- 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  181 

cord  and  discord  are  wholly  relative  to  the  ear  of 
the  listener,1  and  that  the  distinction  between  them 
is  not  to  be  explained  on  any  mathematical  basis, 
or  by  any  a  priori  law  of  acoustics,  —  that  it  is  not 
because  a  minor  second  is  ugly  that  we  dislike  it,  for 
it  will  be  a  concord  some  day,  —  he  is  only  partly 
right.  The  minor  second  may  be  a  "concord," 
that  is,  we  may  like  it,  some  day ;  but  that  will  be 
because  we  have  extended  our  feeling  of  tonality 
to  include  the  minor  second.  When  that  day 
comes  the  minor  second  will  be  so  closely  linked 
with  other  fully  consonant  combinations  that  we 
shall  hear  it  in  terms  of  them,  just  as  to-day  we 
hear  the  chord  of  the  dominant  seventh  in  terms 
of  its  resolution.  But  the  basis  will  not  be  con 
vention  or  custom,  except  in  so  far  as  custom  is 
the  unfolding  of  natural  law.  The  course  of  music, 
like  that  of  every  other  art,  is  away  from  arbitrary — 
though  simple  —  convention,  to  a  complexity  which 
satisfies  the  natural  demands  of  the  organism.  The 
"  natural  persuasion  "  of  the  ear  is  omnipotent. 


It  has  been  said  above  that  the  feeling  of  tonality 
is  a  motor  image  or  "form-quality"  and  that 
the  image  of  the  tonic  persists  throughout  every 
sequence  of  tones  in  a  melody.  Now  these  are  not 
only  felt  as  having  a  certain  relation  to  the  tonic ; 

1  W.  H.  Hadow,  Studies  in  Modern  Music,  1893. 


182      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

that  relation  is  an  active  one.  It  was  said  that  we 
had  a  positive  desire  to  end  on  a  certain  tone,  and 
that  a  tendency  to  pass  to  that  tone  was  bound  up 
with  the  hearing  of  another  tone.  The  degree  of 
this  tendency  is  determined  by  their  relation.  The 
key,  the  tonality,  is  determined  by  the  consensus  of 
intervals  which  have  been  felt  as  more  or  less  con 
sonant.  Then  steps  in  this  scale  which  come  near 
to  the  great  salient  points  —  that  is,  the  points  of 
greatest  consonance,  which  is  unity,  which  is  rest  — 
are  felt  as  suggesting  them.  This  is  the  reason  why 
a  semitone  progression  is  felt  as  so  compelling.  In 
taking  the  scale  upward,  C  to  C',  that  element  in 
the  tone-space  already  clearly  foreshadowed  by  the 
previous  tones  is  C' ;  B  is  so  near  that  it  is  almost 
C'  —  it  seems  to  cry  aloud  to  be  completed  by  C'. 
Then  the  tendency  to  move  from  B  to  Cr  is  espe 
cially  strong.  In  the  same  way  a  chromatic  note 
suggests  most  strongly  the  salient  point  in  the 
scheme  to  which  it  is  nearest  —  and  "  tends  "to  it 
as  to  a  point  of  comparative  rest.  The  difference 
between  the  major  and  minor  scales  may  be  found 
in  the  lesser  definiteness 1  with  which  the  tendency 
to  progression,  in  the  latter,  is  felt  —  "a  condition 
of  hovering,  a  kind  of  ambiguity,  of  doubt,  to  which 
side  the  movement  shall  proceed."  We  may  then 
understand  a  melody  as  ever  tending  with  various 
degrees  of  urgency,  of  strain,  to  its  centre  of  grav 
ity,  the  tonic. 

1  F.  Weimnann,  Zeitschr.f.  Psyckol,  Bd.  35,  p.  360. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  183 

It  is  from  this  point  of  view  that  we  can  see  the 
cogency  of  Gurney's  remark,  that  when  music 
seems  to  be  yearning  for  unutterable  things,  it  is 
really  yearning  only  for  the  next  note.  "  In  this 
step  from  the  state  of  rest  into  movement  and  re 
turn,  the  coming  again  to  rest ;  on  what  circuitous 
ways,  with  what  reluctances  and  hesitations ;  whether 
quick  and  decisively  or  gradually  and  unnoticed  — 
therein  consists  the  nature  of  melody."  1 

Or  in  Gurney's  more  eloquent  description,  "  The 
melody  may  begin  by  pressing  its  way  through  a 
sweetly  yielding  resistance  to  a  gradually  foreseen 
climax;  whence  again  fresh  expectation  is  bred, 
perhaps  for  another  excursion,  as  it  were,  round 
the  same  centre  but  with  a  bolder  and  freer  sweep, 
.  .  .  to  a  point  where  again  the  motive  is  suspended 
on  another  temporary  goal ;  till  after  a  certain 
number  of  such  involutions  and  evolutions,  and  of 
delicately  poised  leanings  and  reluctances  and  yield- 
ings,  the  forces  so  accurately  measured  just  suffice 
to  bring  it  home,  and  the  sense  of  potential  and 
coming  integration  which  has  underlain  all  our 
provisional  adjustments  of  expectation  is  trium 
phantly  justified."2 

This  should  not  be  taken  as  a  more  or  less  poet 
ical  account  under  the  metaphor  of  motion.  These 
"  leanings  "  are  literal  in  the  sense  that  one  note 
does  imply  another  as  its  natural  complement  and 
satisfaction  and  we  seek  to  reach  or  make  it.  The 

1  Weinmana,  op.  cit.  2  Op.  cit.,  p.  165. 


184      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

striving  is  an  intrinsic  element,  not  a  by-product 
for  our  understanding. 

There  is  another  point  to  note.  The  "  sense  of 
potential  and  coming  integration  "  is  a  strong  factor 
of  melody.  If  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  first  note 
implies  the  last,  it  is  at  least  true  that  from  point 
to  point  the  next  step  is  dimly  foreseen,  and  this 
effect  is  cumulative.  If  melody  is  an  ever-hindered 
striving  for  the  goal,  at  least  the  hindrances  them 
selves  are  stations  on  the  way,  each  one  as  over 
come  adding  to  the  final  momentum  with  which 
the  goal  is  reached.  It  is  like  an  accumulation  of 
evidence,  a  constellation  of  associations.  AB  fore 
tells  C ;  but  ABCDEF  rushes  yet  more  strongly 
upon  G.  So  it  is  that  the  irresistibleness,  the  "  un 
alterable  Tightness  "  of  a  piece  of  music  increases 
from  beginning  to  end. 

The  significance  of  this  essential  internal  neces 
sity  of  progression  cannot  be  overestimated.  The 
unalterable  Tightness  of  music  is  founded  on  nat 
ural  acoustic  laws,  and  this  "  Tightness  "  is  funda 
mental.  A  melody  is  not  right  because  it  is  beauti 
ful,  it  is  beautiful  because  it  is  right.  The  natural 
tendencies  point  out  different  paths  to  the  goal; 
therefore  there  are  different  ways  of  being  right, 
and  thus  different  ways  of  being  beautiful ;  but  the 
nature  of  the  relation  between  point  and  point,  the 
nature  of  the  progression,  that  is,  the  nature  of 
melody,  is  the  same. 

Up  to  this  point  we  have  consistently  abstracted 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  185 

from  the  element  of  rhythm  in  melody.  Strictly 
speaking,  however,  it  is  impossible  to  do  so.  The 
individuality  of  a  melody  is  absolutely  dependent 
on  its  rhythm,  that  is,  on  the  relative  time-value  of 
its  tones.  Gurney  has  devoted  some  amusing  pages 
to  showing  the  trivial,  dragging,  lustreless  tunes 
that  result  from  ever  so  slight  a  change  in  the 
rhythm  of  noble  themes,  or  even  in  the  distribution 
of  rhythmical  elements  within  the  bar.  The  reason 
for  this  is  evident.  The  nature  of  melody  in  the 
sense  of  sequence  consists  in  the  varied  answers  to 
the  demands  of  the  ear  as  felt  at  each  successive 
point.  Now  it  is  clear  that  such  "  answer  "  can  be 
emphasized,  given  indifferently,  held  in  suspense,  in 
short,  subjected  to  all  kinds  of  variation  as  well  by 
the  rhythmical  form  into  which  it  is  cast,  as  by  the 
different  choice  of  possibilities  for  the  tone  itself. 
The  rhythm  helps  out  the  melody  not  only  by  add 
ing  to  it  an  independently  pleasing  element,  but,  and 
this  is  indeed  the  essential,  by  reinforcing  the  in 
trinsic  relations  of  the  notes  themselves.  Thus  it  is 
in  the  highest  degree  true  that  in  melody  and  rhythm 
we  do  not  have  content  and  form,  but  that,  strictly 
speaking^  the  melody  is  tone-sequence  in  rhythm. 

The  intimate  bondage  of  tone-sequence  and 
rhythm  is  grounded  in  the  identity  of  their  inner 
nature ;  both  are  varieties  of  the  objective  condi 
tions  of  embodied  expectation.  It  is  not  of  the 
essence  of  music  to  satisfy  explicit  and  conscious 
expectation  —  to  satisfy  the  understanding.  It 


186      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

meets  on  the  contrary  a  subconscious,  automatic 
need  which  becomes  conscious  only  in  the  moment 
of  its  contenting.  Every  moment  of  progress  in  a 
beautiful  melody  is  hailed  like  an  instinctive  action 
performed  for  the  first  time.  Rhythm  is  the  ideal 
satisfaction  of  attention  in  general  with  all  its  bod 
ily  concomitants  and  expressions.  Tone-sequence  is 
the  satisfaction  of  attention  directed  to  auditory 
demands.  But  the  form-quality  of  rhythm,  the 
form-quality  of  tonality,  is  an  all  but  subconscious 
possession.  Together,  reinforcing  each  other  in 
melody,  they  furnish  the  ideal  arrangement  of  the 
most  poignant  of  sense-stimulations. 


VI 

It  is  strange  that  those  who  would  accept  the 
general  facts  of  musical  logic  as  outlined  above  do 
not  perceive  that  they  have  thereby  cut  away  the 
ground  from  under  the  feet  of  the  "  natural  lan 
guage  "  argument.  If  the  principle  of  choice  in  the 
progress  of  a  melody  is  tone-relationship,  the  prin 
ciple  of  choice  cannot  also  be  the  cadences  of  the 
speaking  voice.  That  musical  intervals  often  recall 
the  speaking  voice  is  another  matter,  as  we  have 
said,  and  to  this  it  may  be  added  that  they  much 
more  often  do  not.  The  question  here  is  only  of  the 
primacy  of  the  principle.  Thus  it  would  seem  that 
the  facts  of  musical  structure  constitute  in  them 
selves  a  refutation  of  the  view  we  have  disputed. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  187 

To  say  that  music  arose  in  "  heightened  speech " 
is  irrelevant ;  for  the  occasion  of  an  aesthetic 
phenomenon  is  never  its  cause.  It  might  as  well 
be  said  that  music  arose  in  economic  conditions, 
—  as  indeed  Grosse,  in  his  "  Anfange  der  Kunst," 
conclusively  shows,  without  attempting  to  make  this 
social  occasion  intrude  into  the  nature  of  the  phe 
nomenon.  Primitive  decorative  art  arose  in  the 
imitation  of  the  totemic  or  clan  symbols,  mostly 
animal  forms ;  but  we  have  seen  that  the  aesthetic 
quality  of  the  decoration  is  due  to  the  demands  of 
the  eye,  and  appears  fully  only  in  the  comparative 
degradation  of  the  representative  form.  In  exactly 
the  same  way  might  we  consider  the  "  degradation  " 
«)f  speech  cadences  into  real  music, —  supposing  this 
were  really  the  origin  of  music.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  however,  the  best  authorities  seem  to  be 
agreed  that  the  primitive  "  dance-song  "  was  rather 
a  monotonous,  meaningless  chant,  and  that  the  ori 
ginal  pitch-elements  were  mechanically  supplied  by 
the  first  musical  instruments ;  these  being  at  first 
merely  for  noise,  and  becoming  truly  vibrating,  so 
norous  bodies  because  they  were  more  easily  struck 
if  they  were  hard  or  taut.  The  musical  tones  which 
these  hard  vibrating  bodies  gave  out  were  the  first 
determinations  of  pitch,  and  of  the  elements  of  the 
scale,  which  correspond  to  the  natural  partial  vibra 
tions  of  such  bodies.  "  The  human  voice,"  Wal- 
laschek 1  tells  us,  "  equally  admits  of  any  pentatonic 

1  Primitive  Music,  1893,  p.  156. 


188      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

or  heptatonic  intervals,  and  very  likely  we  should 
never  have  got  regular  scales  if  we  had  depended 
upon  the  ear  and  voice  only.  The  first  unique  cause 
to  settle  the  type  of  a  regular  scale  is  the  instru 
ment."  To  this  material  we  have  to  apply  only 
that "  natural  persuasion  of  the  ear  "  which  we  have 
already  explained,  to  account  for  the  full  develop 
ment  of  music. 

The  beauty  of  music,  in  so  far  as  beauty  is  iden 
tical  with  pleasantness,  consists  in  its  satisfaction 
of  the  demands  of  the  ear,  and  of  the  whole  psycho- 
physical  organism  as  connected  with  the  ear.  It  is 
now  time  to  return  to  a  thread  dropped  at  the  be 
ginning.  It  was  said  that  a  common  way  of  set 
tling  the  musical  experience  was  to  make  musical 
beauty  the  object  of  perception,  and  musical  ex 
pression  the  object,  or  source,  of  emotion.  This 
view  seems  to  attach  itself  to  all  shades  of  theory. 
Hanslick  always  contrasts  intellectual  activity  as 
attaching  to  the  form,  and  emotion  as  attaching  to 
the  sensuous  material  (that  is,  the  physical  effects  of 
motion,  loud  or  soft  sound,  tempo,  etc.).  He  speaks 
of  the  esthetic  criterion  of  intelligent  gratification. 
"  The  truly  musical  listener  "  has  "  his  attention 
absorbed  by  the  particular  form  and  character  of 
the  composition,"  "  the  unique  position  which  the 
intellectual  element  in  music  occupies  in  relation  to 
forms  and  substance  (subject)."  M.  Dauriac  in  the 
same  way  separates  the  emotion  of  music  *  as  a  pro- 
1  "  Le  Plaisir  et  1'Emotion  Musicale,"  Eev.  Philos.,  Tome  42,  No.  7. 


THE   BEAUTY   OF  MUSIC  189 

duct  of  nervous  excitations,  from  the  appreciation 
of  it  as  beautiful.  "  It  is  probable  that  the  pleasure 
caused  by  rhythm  and  color  prevails  with  a  pretty 
large  number,  with  the  greatest  number,  over  the 
pleasure  in  the  musical  form,  pleasure  too  exclu 
sively  psychological  for  one  to  be  content  with  it 
alone.  .  .  .  The  musical  sense  implies  the  intel 
ligence.  .  .  .  The  theory  .  .  .  applies  to  a  great 
number  of  sonorous  sensations,  and  not  at  all  to  any 
musical  perceptions."  Mr.  W.  H.  Hadow  l  tells  us 
that  it  is  the  duty  of  the  musician  not  to  flatter  the 
sense  with  an  empty  compliment  of  sound,  but  to 
reach  through  sensation  to  the  mental  faculties 
within.  And  again  we  read  "  the  art  of  the  com 
poser  is  in  a  sense  the  discovery  and  exposition  of 
the  intelligible  relations  in  the  multifarious  mate 
rial  at  his  command."  2 

Now  it  is  riot  hard  to  see  how  this  antithesis  has 
come  about.  But  that  the  work  of  a  master  is  always 
capable  of  logical  analysis  does  not  prove  that  our 
apprehension  of  it  is  a  logical  act.  And  the  pre 
ceding  discussion  has  wholly  failed  to  make  its 
point,  if  it  is  not  now  clear  that  the  musical  experi 
ence  is  an  impression  and  not  a  judgment ;  that  the 
feeling  of  tonality  is  not  a  judgment  of  tonality, 
and  that  though  the  aesthetic  enjoyment  of  music 
extends  only  to  those  limits  within  which  the  feel 
ing  of  tonality  is  active,  that  feeling  is  more  likely 
than  not  to  be  quite  unintelligible  to  the  listener. 

1  Qp.  ctf.,  p.  47.  2  Grove's  Diet.     Art.  "  Relationship." 


190      THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Indeed,  if  it  were  not  so,  we  should  have  to  re 
strict,  by  hypothesis,  the  enjoyment  of  music  to 
those  able  to  give  a  technical  report  of  what  they 
hear,  —  which  is  notoriously  at  odds  with  the  facts. 
That  psychologist  is  quite  right  who  holds  1  that 
psychology,  in  laying  down  a  principle  explaining 
the  actual  effect  of  a  musical  piece,  is  not  justified 
in  confining  itself  to  skilled  musicians  and  taking 
no  notice  of  more  than  nine  tenths  of  those  who 
listen  to  the  piece.  But  on  the  understanding  that 
the  tonality-feeling  acts  subconsciously,  that  our 
satisfaction  with  the  progression  of  notes  is  unex 
plained  to  ourselves,  though  explicable  by  the  laws 
of  acoustics  and  association,  we  are  enabled  to  bring 
within  the  circle  of  those  who  have  the  musical  ex 
perience  even  those  nine  tenths  whose  intellects  are 
not  actively  participant. 

The  fact  is  that  musical  form,  in  the  sense  of 
structure,  balance,  symmetry,  and  proportion  in  the 
arrangement  of  phrases,  and  in  the  contrasting  of 
harmonies  and  keys,  is  different  from  the  musical 
form  which  is  felt  intimately,  intrinsically,  as  the 
desired,  the  demanded  progress  from  one  note  to 
another.  Structure  is  indeed  perceived,  understood, 
enjoyed  as  an  orderly  unified  arrangement.  Form 
is  felt  as  an  immediate  joy.  Structure  it  is  which 
many  critics  have  in  mind  when  they  speak  of  form, 
and  it  is  the  confusion  between  the  two  which  makes 
such  an  antithesis  of  musical  beauty  and  sensuous 
i  Lazarus,  Das  Leben  der  Stele,  ii,  p.  323. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  191 

material  possible.  The  real  musical  beauty,  it  is 
clear,  is  in  the  melodic  idea ;  in  the  sequence  of 
tones  which  are  indissolubly  one,  which  are  felt 
together,  one  of  which  cannot  exist  without  the 
other.  Musical  beauty  is  in  the  intrinsic  musical 
form.  And  yet  here,  too,  we  must  admit,  that,  in 
the  last  analysis,  structure  and  form  need  not  be 
different.  The  perfect  structure  will  be  such  a  unity 
that  it,  too,  will  be  felt  as  one  —  not  only  "  the 
orderly  distribution  of  harmonies  and  keys  in  such 
a  manner  that  the  mind  can  realize  the  concatena 
tion  as  a  complete  and  distinct  work  of  art."  The 
ideal  musical  consciousness  would  have  an  ideally 
great  range  ;  it  would  not  only  realize  the  concat 
enation,  but  it  would  take  it  in  as  one  takes  in  a 
single  phrase,  a  simple  tune,  retaining  it  from  first 
note  to  last.  The  ordinary  musical  consciousness 
has  merely  a  much  shorter  breath.  It  can  "  feel  " 
an  air,  a  movement ;  it  cannot  "  feel "  a  symphony, 
it  can  only  perceive  the  relation  of  keys  and  har 
monies  therein.  With  repeated  hearing,  study,  ex 
perience,  this  span  of  beauty  may  be  indefinitely 
extended  —  in  the  individual,  as  in  the  race.  But 
no  one  will  deny  that  the  direct  experience  of 
beauty,  the  single  aBsthetic  thrill,  is  measured  ex 
actly  by  the  length  of  this  span.  It  is  only  genius 
—  hearer  or  composer  —  who  can  operate  "  a 
longue  haleine." 

So  it  is  that  we  must  understand  the  develop 
ment  in  musical  form  from  the  cut  and  dried  sonata 


192      THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

form  to  the  wayward  yet  infinitely  greater  beauty 
of  Beethoven ;  and  thence  to  the  "  free  forms  "  of 
modern  music.  "  Infinite  melody  "  is  a  contradic 
tion  in  terms,  because  when  the  first  term  cannot 
be  present  in  consciousness  with  the  last  there  is 
nothing  to  control  and  direct  the  progression ;  and 
our  musical  memory  is  limited.  Yet  we  can  con 
ceive,  theoretically,  the  possibility  of  an  indefinite 
widening  of  the  memory. 

It  was  on  some  such  grounds  as  these  that  Poe 
laid  down  his  famous  "  Poetic  Principle,"  —  that  a 
long  poem  does  not  exist ;  that  "  a  long  poem " 
is  simply  a  flat  contradiction  in  terms.  He  says, 
indeed,  that  because  "  elevating  excitement,"  the 
end  of  a  poem,  is  "  through  a  psychical  necessity  " 
transient,  therefore  no  poem  should  be  longer  than 
the  natural  term  of  such  excitement.  It  is  clearly 
possible  to  substitute  for  "  elevating  excitement," 
immediate  musical  feeling  of  the  individual.  What 
is  the  meaning  of  "  feeling,"  "  impression,"  here  ?  It 
is  the  power  of  entering  into  a  Gestaltsqualitat  — 
a  motor  group,  a  scheme  in  which  every  element  is 
the  mechanical  cue  to  the  following.  Beauty  ceases 
for  the  hearer  where  this  carrying  power,  the 
"  funded  capital "  of  tone-linkings  ceases.  In  just 
the  same  way,  if  rhythm  were  a  perception  rather 
than  an  impression,  we  ought  to  be  able  to  appre 
hend  a  rhythm  of  which  the  unit  periods  were 
hours.  Yet  we  may  so  bridge  over  the  moments  of 
beauty  in  experience  that  we  are  enabled,  without 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  193 

stretching  the  figure  to  a  breaking-point,  to  speak 
of  a  symphony  or  an  opera  as  a  single  beautiful 
work  of  art. 

vn 

But  what  of  the  difficulties  which  such  a  theory 
must  meet  ?  The  most  obvious  one  is  the  short  life 
of  musical  works.  If  musical  beauty  is  founded  in 
natural  laws,  why  does  music  so  quickly  grow  old  ? 
The  answer  is  that  music  is  a  phenomenon  of  ex 
pectation  as  founded  on  these  natural  laws.  It  is 
the  tendency  of  one  note  to  progress  to  another 
which  is  the  basis  of  the  vividness  of  our  experi 
ence.  We  expect,  indeed,  what  belongs  objectively 
to  the  development  of  a  melody,  but  only  that 
particular  variety  of  progression  to  which  we  have 
become  accustomed.  So  it  is  that  music  which 
presents  only  the  old,  simple  progressions  gives  the 
greatest  sense  of  ease,  but  the  least  sense  of  effort  — 
the  ideal  motion  not  being  hindered  on  its  way.  In 
tensity,  vividness,  would  be  felt  where  the  progres 
sion  is  less  obvious,  but  felt  as  "  fitting  in  "  when  it 
is  once  made  ;  and  where  it  is  not  obvious  at  all  — 
where  the  link  is  not  felt,  a  sense  of  dissatisfac 
tion  and  restlessness  arises.  So  it  is  with  music 
which  we  know  by  heart.  It  is  not  that  we  know 
each  note,  and  so  expect  it,  but  that  it  is  felt  as 
necessarily  issuing  out  of  the  preceding.  A  piece  of 
poor  music,  really  heterogeneous  and  unconnected, 
might  be  thoroughly  familiar,  and  yet  never,  in 


194      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

this  sense,  felt  as  satisfying  expectation.  In  the 
same  way,  music  in  which  the  progressions  were 
germane  to  the  existing  tonality-feeling,  while  still 
not  absolutely  obvious,  would  not  be  less  quicken 
ing  to  the  musical  sense,  even  if  learned  by  heart. 
It  is  clear  that  there  is  an  external  and  an  internal 
expectation  —  one,  imposed  by  memory,  for  the  par 
ticular  piece ;  the  other  constituted  partly  by  in 
trinsic  internal  relations,  partly  by  the  degree  to 
which  these  internal  relations  have  been  exploited. 
That  is,  the  possibility  of  musical  expectation,  and 
pleasure  in  its  satisfaction,  is  conditioned  by  the 
possession  of  a  tonality-feeling  which  covers  the 
constituents  of  the  piece  of  music,  but  which  has 
not  become  absolutely  mechanical  in  its  action. 
Just  as  rhythm  needs  an  obstacle  to  make  the 
structure  felt,  so  melody  needs  some  variation 
from  the  obvious  set  of  relations  already  won 
and  possessed.  If  that  possession  is  too  complete, 
the  melody  becomes  as  stale  and  uninteresting 
as  would  a  3-4  rhythm  without  a  change  or  a 
break. 

The  test  of  genius  in  music,  of  the  width  and 
depth  of  mastery,  is  to  be  able  to  become  familiar 
without  ceasing  to  be  strange.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  in  music  to  be  great  is  always  to  be  misunder 
stood,  it  is  no  less  true,  here  as  elsewhere,  that  to 
be  misunderstood  is  not  always  to  be  great.  And 
music  may  be  merely  strange,  and  pass  into  ob 
livion,  without  ever  having  passed  that  stage  of 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  195 

surprised  and  delighted   acceptance  which  is  the 
test  of  its  truth  to  fundamental  laws. 

But  how  shall  music  advance  ?  How  shall  it  set 
out  to  win  new  relations  ?  It  is  at  least  conceivable 
that  it  takes  the  method  of  another  art  which  we 
have  just  studied.  To  get  new  beauties,  it  does  not 
say,  —  Go  to,  I  will  add  to  the  beauties  I  already 
have !  It  makes  new  occasions,  and  by  way  of 
these  finds  the  impulse  it  seeks.  Renoir  paints  the 
baigneuse  of  Montmartre,  and  finds  "  the  odd,  beau 
tiful  huddle  of  lines "  in  so  doing ;  Rodin  por 
trays  ever  new  subtleties  of  situation  and  mood, 
and  by  way  of  these  comes  most  naturally  to  "  the 
unedited  poses."  So  a  musician,  we  may  imagine, 
comes  to  new  and  strange  utterances  by  way  of  a 
new  and  strange  motion  or  cry  that  he  imitates. 
Out  of  the  various  bents  and  impulses  that  these 
give  him  he  chooses  the  ones  that  chance  to  be 
beautiful.  And  in  time  these  new  beauties  have  be 
come  worn  away  like  the  trite  metaphors  that  are 
now  no  longer  metaphors,  but  part  of  the  "  funded 
capital."  That  was  a  ridiculous  device  of  Schu 
mann's,  who  found  a  motif  for  one  of  his  loveliest 
things  by  using  the  letters  of  his  temporary  fair 
one's  name  —  A  B  E  G  G ;  but  it  may  not  be 
so  utterly  unlike  the  procedure  by  which  music 
grows. 


196      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

VIII 

But  what  provision  must  be  made  for  the  emo 
tions  of  music  ?  It  cannot  be  that  the  majority 
of  musicians,  who  are  strangely  enough  the  very 
ones  to  insist  that  music  is  merely  the  language 
of  emotion,  are  utterly  and  essentially  wrong. 
Nor  has  it  been  attempted  to  prove  them  so.  The 
beauty  of  music,  we  have  sought  to  show,  grows 
and  flowers  out  of  tone-relations  alone,  consists  in 
tone-sequences  alone.  But  it  has  not  been  said  that 
music  did  not  arouse  emotion,  nor  that  it  might 
not  on  occasion  even  express  it. 

It  is  in  fact  now  rather  a  commonplace  in 
musical  theory,  to  show  the  emotional  means  which 
music  has  at  its  command  ;  and  I  shall  therefore 
be  very  brief  in  my  reference  to  them.  They  may 
be  shortly  classed  as  expressive  by  association  and 
by  direct  induction.  Expressive  by  association  are 
passages  of  direct  imitation  :  the  tolling  of  bells, 
the  clash  of  arms,  the  roar  of  wind,  the  hum  of 
spinning  wheels,  even  to  the  bleating  of  sheep  and 
the  whirr  of  windmills ;  the  cadence  of  the  voice  in 
pleading,  laughter,  love ;  from  such  imitations  we 
are  reminded  of  a  fact  or  an  emotion.  More  inti 
mate  is  the  expression  by  induction ;  emotion  is 
aroused  by  activities  which  themselves  form  part  of 
the  emotions  in  question.  Thus  the  differences  in 
tempo,  reproduced  in  nervous  response,  call  up  the 
gayety,  sadness,  hesitation,  firmness,  haste,  growing 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  197 

excitement,  etc.,  of  which  whole  experiences  these 
movement  types  form  a  part. 

These  emotions,  as  has  often  been  shown,  are 
absolutely  general  and  indefinite  in  their  character, 
and  are,  on  the  whole,  even  in  their  intensity,  no 
measure  of  the  beauty  of  the  music  which  arouses 
them.  Indeed,  we  can  get  intense  emotion  from 
sound  which  is  entirely  unmusical.  So,  too,  loud- 
ness,  softness,  crescendo,  diminuendo,  volume,  pierc- 
ingness,have  their  emotional  accompaniments.  It  is 
to  Hanslick  that  we  owe  the  general  summing  up 
of  these  possibilities  of  expression  as  "  the  dynamic 
figures  of  occurrences."  How  this  dynamic  skeleton 
is  filled  out  through  association,  or  that  special  form 
of  association  which  we  know  as  direct  induction, 
is  not  hard  to  understand  on  psychological  grounds. 
It  is  not  necessary  to  repeat  here  the  reasons  for 
the  literally  "  moving  "  appeal  of  sound-stimula 
tions,  which  have  been  already  detailed  under  the 
subject  of  rhythm. 

Yet  there  still  remains  a  residue  of  emotion  not 
entirely  accounted  for.  It  has  been  said  that  these, 
the  emotions  expressed,  or  aroused,  are  more  or  less 
independent  of  the  intrinsic  musical  beauty.  But 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  there  is  an  intense  emotion 
which  grows  with  the  measure  of  the  beauty  of  a 
piece  of  music,  and  which  music  lovers  are  yet 
loth  to  identify  with  the  so-called  general  aesthetic 
emotion,  or  with  the  "  satisfaction  of  expectation," 
different  varieties  of  which,  in  fusion,  we  have  tried 


198      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

to  show  as  the  basis  of  the  musical  experience.  The 
aesthetic  emotion  from  a  picture  is  not  like  this,  they 
say,  and  a  mere  satisfaction  of  expectation  is  unut 
terably  tame.  This  is  unique,  aesthetic,  individual ! 
I  believe  that  the  clue  to  this  objection  is  the 
natural  impulse  of  mankind  to  confuse  the  intensity 
of  an  experience  with  a  difference  in  kind.  But  first 
of  all,  there  must  be  added  to  our  list  of  definite 
emotions  from  music,  those  which  attach  themselves 
to  the  internal  relations  of  the  notes.  Gurney  has 
said  that  when  we  feel  ourselves  yearning  for  the 
unutterable,  we  are  really  yearning  for  the  next 
note.  That  is  the  secret !  Each  one  of  those  ten 
dencies,  demands,  leanings,  strivings,  returns,  as 
between  tone  and  tone  in  a  melody,  is  necessarily 
accompanied  by  the  feeling-tone  which  belongs  to 
such  an  attitude.  And  it  is  to  be  noted  that  all  the 
more  poignant  emotions  we  get  from  music  are  al 
ways  stated  in  terms  of  urgency,  of  strain,  of  effort. 
That  is  because  these  emotions,  and  these  alone,  are 
inescapable  in  music  since  they  are  founded  on  the 
intrinsic  relations  of  the  notes  themselves.  It  is 
just  for  this  reason,  too,  that  music,  just  in  propor 
tion  to  its  beauty,  is  felt,  as  some  one  says,  like 
vinegar  on  a  wound,  by  those  in  grief  or  anxiety. 

"  I  shall  loathe  sweet  tunes,  where  a  note  grown  strong 
Relents  and  recoils,  and  climbs  and  closes." 

It  is  the  yearning  that  is  felt  most  strongly,  the 
more  vividly  are  the  real  musical  relations  of  the 
notes  brought  out. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  199 

Music  expresses  and  causes  tension,  strain,  yearn 
ing,  through  its  inner,  its  "  absolute  "  nature.  But 
it  does  more ;  it  satisfies  these  yearnings.  It  not 
only  creates  an  expectation  to  satisfy  it,  but  the 
expectation  itself  is  of  a  poignant,  emotional,  per 
sonal  character.  What  is  the  emotion  that  is 
aroused  by  such  a  satisfaction  ? 

The  answer  to  this  question  takes  us  back  again 
to  that  old  picturesque  theory  of  Schopenhauer  — 
that  music  is  the  objectification  of  the  will.  Scho 
penhauer  meant  this  in  a  metaphysical,  and  to  us 
an  inadmissible  sense ;  but  I  believe  that  the  psy 
chological  analysis  of  the  musical  experience  which 
we  have  just  completed  shows  that  there  is  another 
sense  in  which  it  is  absolutely  true. 

The  best  psychological  theory  of  the  experience 
of  volition  makes  it  the  imaging  of  a  movement  or 
action,  followed  by  feelings  of  strain,  and  then  of 
the  movement  carried  out.  The  anticipation  is  the 
essential.  Without  anticipation,  as  in  the  reflex, 
winking,  the  action  appears  involuntary.  Without 
the  feeling  of  effort  or  strain,  as  in  simply  raising 
the  empty  hand,  the  self-feeling  is  weaker.  When 
all  these  three  elements,  image,  effort,  success,  are 
present  most  vividly,  the  feeling  is  of  triumphant 
volition.  Now  my  thesis  is  —  the  thesis  toward 
which  every  thought  of  the  preceding  has  pointed 
—  that  the  fundamental  facts  of  the  musical  ex 
perience  are  supremely  fitted  to  bring  about  the 
illusion  and  the  exaltation  of  the  triumphant  will. 


200      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

The  image,  dimly  foreshadowed,  is  given  in  the 
half-consciousness  of  each  note  as  it  appears,  and 
in  that  sense  of  coming  integration  already  recog 
nized.  The  proof  is  the  shock  and  disappointment 
when  the  wrong  note  is  sounded;  if  we  had  not 
some  anticipation  of  the  right,  the  wrong  one  would 
not  shock.  The  strain  we  have  in  the  effort  of  the 
organism  to  reach  the  note,  the  tendency  to  which 
is  implicit  in  the  preceding.  The  success  is  given 
in  the  coming  of  the  note  itself. 

All  this  is  no  less  true  of  rhythm  —  but  there 
the  expectation  is  more  mechanical,  less  conscious, 
as  has  been  fully  shown.  The  more  beautiful,  that 
is,  the  more  inevitably,  irresistibly  right  the  music, 
the  more  powerful  the  influence  to  this  illusion  of 
the  triumphant  will.  The  exaltation  of  musical 
emotion  is  thus  the  direct  measure  of  the  perfec 
tion  of  the  relations  —  the  beauty  of  the  music. 
This,  then,  is  the  only  intimate,  immediate,  intrin 
sic  emotion  of  music  —  the  illusion  of  the  trium 
phant  will ! 

One  word  more  on  the  interpretation  of  music 
in  general  a3sthetic  terms.  All  that  has  been  said 
goes  to  show  that  music  possesses  to  the  very 
highest  degree  the  power  of  stimulation.  Can  we 
attribute  to  it  repose  in  any  other  sense  than  that 
of  satisfying  a  desire  that  it  arouses  ?  We  can  do 
so  in  pointing  out  that  music  ever  returns  upon 
itself  —  that  its  motion  is  cyclic.  Music  is  the  art 
of  auditory  implications ;  but  more  than  this,  its 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  MUSIC  201 

last  note  returns  to  its  first.  It  is  as  truly  a  unity 
as  if  it  were  static.  We  may  say  that  the  beauty  of  a 
picture  is  only  entered  into  when  the  eye  has  roved 
over  the  whole  canvas,  and  holds  all  the  elements 
indirectly  while  it  is  fixated  upon  one  point.  In 
exactly  the  same  way  music  is  not  beauty  unless  it 
is  all  there ;  at  every  point  a  fusion  of  the  heard 
tone  with  the  once  heard  tones  in  the  order  of  their 
hearing.  The  melody,  as  a  set  of  implications,  is 
as  essentially  timeless  as  the  picture.  By  melody 
too,  then,  is  given  the  perfect  moment,  the  moment 
of  unity  and  completeness,  of  stimulation  and  repose. 
The  aesthetic  emotion  for  music  is  then  the 
favorable  stimulation  of  the  sense  of  hearing  and 
those  other  senses  that  are  bound  up  with  it,  to 
gether  with  the  repose  of  perfect  unity.  It  has 
a  richer  color,  a  more  intense  exaltation  in  the 
illusion  of  the  triumphant  will,  which  is  indeed  the 
peculiar  mark  of  the  perfect  moment  for  the  self 
in  action. 


VI 
THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE 


VI 

THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE 


THAT  in  the  practice  and  pleasure  of  art  for 
art's  sake  there  lurks  an  unworthy  element, 
is  a  superstition  that  recurs  in  every  generation  of 
critics.  A  most  accomplished  and  modern  disciple 
of  the  gay  science  but  yesterday  made  it  a  reproach 
to  the  greatest  living  English  novelist,  that  he,  too, 
was  all  for  beauty,  all  for  art,  and  had  no  great 
informing  purpose.  "  Art  for  art's  sake  "  is  clearly, 
to  this  critic's  mind,  compatible  with  the  lack  of 
something  all  desirable  for  novels.  Yet  if  there  is 
indeed  a  characteristic  excellence  of  the  novel,  if 
there  is  something  the  lack  of  which  in  a  novel  is 
rightly  deplored,  then  the  real  art  for  art's  sake  is 
bound  to  include  this  characteristic  excellence.  If 
an  informing  purpose  is  needed,  no  true  artist  can 
dispense  with  it.  Otherwise  art  for  art's  sake  is  a 
contradiction  in  terms. 

The  critic  I  have  quoted  merely  voices  the  lin« 
gering  Puritan  distrust  of  beauty  as  an  end  in  itself, 
and  so  repudiates  the  conception  of  beauty  as  con 
taining  all  the  excellences  of  a  work  of  art.  He 
thinks  of  beauty  as  cut  up  into  small  snips  and 


206      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

shreds  of  momentary  sensations ;  as  the  sweet  sound 
of  melodious  words  and  cadences ;  or  as  something 
abstract,  pattern-like,  imposed  from  without,  —  a 
Procrustes-bed  of  symmetry  and  proportion ;  or  as 
a  view  of  life  Circe-like,  insidious,  a  golden  languor, 
made  of  "  the  selfish  serenities  of  wild-wood  and 
dream-palace."  All  these,  apart  or  together,  are 
thought  of  as  the  "  beauty,"  at  which  the  artist 
"  for  art's  sake  "  aims,  and  to  that  is  opposed  the 
nobler  informing  purpose.  But  the  truer  view  of 
beauty  makes  it  simply  the  epitome  of  all  which  a 
work  of  art  ought  to  be,  and  thus  the  only  end  and 
aim  of  every  work  of  art.  The  beauty  of  literature 
receives  into  itself  all  the  precepts  of  literature : 
there  is  no  "  ought "  beyond  it.  And  art  for  art's 
sake  is  but  art  conscious  of  its  aim,  the  production 
of  that  all-embracing  beauty. 

What,  then,  is  the  beauty  of  literature?  How 
may  we  know  its  characteristic  excellences  ?  It  is 
strange  how,  in  all  serious  discussion,  to  the  con 
founding  of  some  current  ideas  of  criticism,  we  are 
thrown  back,  inevitably,  on  this  concept  of  excel 
lence  !  The  most  ardent  of  impressionists  wakes 
up  sooner  or  later  to  the  idea  that  he  has  been 
talking  values  all  his  life.  The  excellences  of  liter 
ature  !  They  must  lie  within  the  general  formula 
for  beauty,  yet  they  must  be  conditioned  by  the 
possibilities  of  the  special  medium  of  literature. 
The  general  formula,  abstract  and  metaphysical  as 
it  must  be,  may  not  be  applied  directly ;  for  abstract 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE      207 

thought  will  fit  only  that  art  which  can  convey  it ; 
hence  the  struggle  of  theorists  with  painting,  music, 
and  architecture,  and  the  failure  of  Hegel,  for  in 
stance,  to  show  how  beauty  as  "  the  expression  of 
the  Idea  "  resides  in  these  arts.  But  if  the  general 
formula  is  always  translated  relatively  to  the  sense- 
medium  through  which  beauty  must  reach  the 
human  being,  it  may  be  preserved,  while  yet  affirm 
ing  all  the  special  demands  of  the  particular  art. 
Beauty  is  a  constant  function  of  the  varying  me 
dium.  The  end  of  Beauty  is  always  the  same,  the 
perfect  moment  of  unity  and  self-completeness,  of 
repose  in  excitement.  But  this  end  is  attained 
by  different  means  furnished  by  different  media : 
through  vision  and  its  accompanying  activities; 
through  hearing  and  its  accompanying  activities ; 
and  for  literature,  through  hearing  in  the  special 
sense  of  communication  by  word.  It  is  the  nature 
of  this  medium  that  we  must  further  discover. 


n 

Now  the  word  is  nothing  in  itself ;  it  is  not 
sound  primarily,  but  thought.  The  word  is  but  a 
sign,  a  negligible  quantity  in  human  intercourse  — 
a  counter  in  which  the  corns  are  ideas  and  emotions 
—  merely  legal  tender,  of  no  value  save  in  ex 
change.  What  we  really  experience  in  the  sound 
of  a  sentence,  in  the  sight  of  a  printed  page,  is  a 
complex  sequence  of  visual  and  other  images,  ideas, 


208       THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

emotions,  feelings,  logical  relations,  swept  along  in 
the  stream  of  consciousness,  —  differing,  indeed,  in 
certain  ways  from  daily  experience,  but  yet  pri 
marily  of  the  web  of  life  itself.  The  words  in  their 
nuances,  march,  tempo,  melody  add  certain  elements 
to  this  flood  —  hasten,  retard,  undulate,  or  calm  it ; 
but  it  is  the  thought,  the  understood  experience, 
that  is  the  stuff  of  literature. 

Words  are  first  of  all  meanings,  and  meanings 
are  to  be  understood  and  lived  through.  We  can 
hardly  even  speak  of  the  meaning  of  a  word,  but 
rather  of  what  it  is,  directly,  in  the  mental  state 
that  is  called  up  by  it.  Every  definition  of  a  word 
is  but  a  feeble  and  distant  approximation  of  the 
unique  flash  of  experience  belonging  to  that  word. 
It  is  not  the  sound  sensation  nor  the  visual  image 
evoked  by  the  word  which  counts,  but  the  whole  of 
the  mental  experience,  to  which  the  word  is  but  an 
occasion  and  a  cue.  Therefore,  since  literature  is 
the  art  of  words,  it  is  the  stream  of  thought  itself 
that  we  must  consider  as  the  material  of  literature. 
In  short,  literature  is  the  dialect  of  life  —  as  Ste 
venson  said  ;  it  is  by  literature  that  the  business  of 
life  is  carried  on.  Some  one,  however,  may  here 
demur:  visual  signs,  too,  are  the  dialect  of  life. 
We  understand  by  what  we  see,  and  we  live  by 
what  we  understand.  The  curve  of  a  line,  the  cres 
cendo  of  a  note,  serve  also  for  wordless  messages. 
Why  are  not,  then,  painting  and  music  the  vehicles 
of  experience,  and  to  be  judged  first  as  evocation  of 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       209 

life,  and  only  afterward  as  sight  and  hearing  ?  This 
conceded,  we  are  thrown  back  on  that  view  of  art 
as  "  the  fixed  quantity  of  imaginative  thought 
supplemented  by  certain  technical  qualities,  —  of 
color  in  painting,  of  sound  in  music,  of  rhythmical 
words  in  poetry,"  from  which  it  has  been  the  one 
aim  of  the  preceding  arguments  of  this  book  to 
free  us. 

The  holders  of  this  view,  however,  ignore  the  his 
tory  and  significance  of  language.  Our  sight  and 
hearing  are  given  to  us  prior  to  our  understanding 
or  use  of  them.  In  a  way,  we  submit  to  them  — 
they  are  always  with  us.  We  dwell  in  them  through 
passive  states,  through  seasons  of  indifference; 
moreover  when  we  see  to  understand,  we  do  not 
see,  and  when  we  hear  to  understand  we  do  not 
hear.  Only  shreds  of  sensation,  caught  up  in  our 
flight  from  one  action  to  another,  serve  as  signals 
for  the  meanings  which  concern  us.  In  proportion 
as  action  is  prompt  and  effective,  does  the  cue  as 
such  tend  to  disappear,  until,  in  all  matters  of  skill, 
piano-playing,  fencing,  billiard-playing,  the  sight  or 
sound  which  serves  as  cue  drops  almost  altogether 
out  of  consciousness.  So  far  as  it  is  vehicle  of  in 
formation,  it  is  no  longer  sight  or  sound  as  such  — 
interest  has  devoured  it.  But  language  came  into 
being  to  supplement  the  lacks  of  sight  and  sound. 
It  was  created  by  ourselves,  to  embody  all  active 
outreaching  mental  experience,  and  it  comes  into 
particular  existence  to  meet  an  insistent  emergency 


210      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

—  a  literally  crying  need.  In  short,  it  is  constituted 
by  meanings  —  its  essence  is  communication.  Sight 
and  sound  have  a  relatively  independent  existence, 
and  may  hence  claim  a  realm  of  art  that  is  largely 
independent  of  meanings.  Not  so  the  art  of  words, 
which  can  be  but  the  art  of  meanings,  of  human 
experience  alone. 

And  yet  again,  were  the  evocation  of  life  the 
means  and  material  of  all  art,  that  art  in  which 
the  level  of  imaginative  thought  was  low,  the  range 
of  human  experience  narrow,  would  take  a  low 
place  in  the  scale.  What,  then,  of  music  and  archi 
tecture?  Inferior  arts,  they  could  not  challenge 
comparison  with  the  poignant,  profound,  all-em 
bracing  art  of  literature.  But  this  is  patently  not 
the  fact.  There  is  no  hierarchy  of  the  arts.  We 
may  not  rank  St.  Paul's  Cathedral  below  "  Para 
dise  Lost."  Yet  if  the  material  of  all  experience 
is  the  material  of  all  art,  they  must  not  only  be 
compared,  but  "  Paradise  Lost "  must  be  admitted 
incomparably  the  greater.  No  —  we  may  not  admit 
that  all  the  arts  alike  deal  with  the  material  of 
expression.  The  excellence  of  music  and  architec 
ture,  whatever  it  may  be,  cannot  depend  on  this 
material.  Yet  by  hypothesis  it  must  be  through 
the  use  of  its  material  that  the  end  of  beauty  is 
reached  by  every  art.  A  picture  has  lines  and 
masses  and  colors,  wherewith  to  play  with  the 
faculty  of  vision,  to  weave  a  spell  for  the  whole 
man.  Beauty  is  the  power  to  enchant  him  through 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE      211 

the  eye  and  all  that  waits  upon  it,  into  a  moment 
of  perfection.  Literature  has  "all  thoughts,  all 
passions,  all  delights"  —  the  treasury  of  life  —  to 
play  with,  to  weave  a  spell  for  the  whole  man. 
Beauty  in  literature  is  the  power  to  enchant  him, 
through  the  mind  and  heart,  across  the  dialect  of 
life,  into  a  moment  of  perfection. 


Ill 

The  art  of  letters,  then,  is  the  art  whose  mate 
rial  is  life  itself.  Such,  indeed,  is  the  implication 
of  the  approved  theories  of  style.  Words,  phrases, 
sentences,  chapters,  are  excellent  in  so  far  as  they 
are  identical  with  thought  in  all  its  shades  of  feel 
ing.  "  Economy  of  attention,"  Spencer's  familiar 
phrase  for  the  philosophy  of  style,  his  explanation 
of  even  the  most  ornate  and  extravagant  forms,  is 
but  another  name  for  this  desired  lucidity  of  the 
medium.  Pater,  himself  an  artist  in  the  overlaying 
of  phrases,  has  the  same  teaching.  "  All  the  laws  of 
good  writing  aim  at  a  similar  unity  or  identity  of 
the  mind  in  all  the  processes  by  which  the  word 
is  associated  to  its  import.  The  term  is  right,  and 
has  its  essential  beauty,  when  it  becomes,  in  a  man 
ner,  what  it  signifies,  as  with  the  names  of  simple 
sensations." l  He  quotes  therewith  De  Maupassant 
on  Flaubert:  "Among  all  the  expressions  in  the 
world,  all  forms  and  turns  of  expression,  there  is 
1  Appreciations :  An  Essay  on  Style. 


212       THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

but  one  —  one  form,  one  mode  —  to  express  what 
I  want  to  say."  And  adds,  "  The  one  word  for  the 
one  thing,  the  one  thought,  amid  the  multitude  of 
words,  terms,  that  might  just  do :  the  problem  of 
style  was  there  !  —  the  unique  word,  phrase,  sen 
tence,  paragraph,  essay,  or  song,  absolutely  pro 
per  to  the  single  mental  presentation  or  vision 
within."  .  .  . 

Thought  in  words  is  the  matter  of  literature; 
and  words  exist  but  for  thought,  and  get  their 
excellence  as  thought ;  yet,  as  Flaubert  says,  the 
idea  only  exists  by  virtue  of  the  form.  The  form, 
or  the  word,  is  the  idea ;  that  is,  it  carries  along 
with  it  the  fringe  of  suggestion  which  crystallizes 
the  floating  possibility  in  the  stream  of  thought. 
A  glance  at  the  history  of  language  shows  how 
this  must  have  been  so.  Words  in  their  first  for 
mation  were  doubtless  constituted  by  their  imita 
tive  power.  As  Taine  has  said,1  at  the  first  they 
arose  in  contact  with  the  objects ;  they  imitated 
them  by  the  grimaces  of  mouth  and  nose  which  ac 
companied  their  sound,  by  the  roughness,  smooth 
ness,  length,  or  shortness  of  this  sound,  by  the 
rattle  or  whistle  of  the  throat,  by  the  inflation  or 
contraction  of  the  chest. 

This  primitive  imitative  power  of  the  word  sur 
vives  in  the  so-called  onomatopoetic  words,  which 
aim  simply  at  reproducing  the  sounds  of  nature. 
A  second  order  of  imitation  arises  through  the 
1  H.  Taine,  La  Fontaine  et  ses  Fables,  p.  288. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       213 

associations  of  sensations.  The  different  sensa 
tions,  auditory,  visual,  olfactory,  tactile,  motor,  and 
organic  have  common  qualities,  which  they  share 
with  other  more  complex  experiences ;  of  form,  as 
force  or  feebleness  ;  of  feeling,  as  harshness,  sweet 
ness,  and  so  on.  It  is,  indeed,  another  case  of  the 
form-qualities  to  which  we  recurred  so  often  in  the 
chapter  on  music.  Clear  and  smooth  vowels  will 
give  the  impression  of  volatility  and  delicacy ;  open, 
broad  ones  of  elevation  or  extension  (airy,  flee; 
large,  far).  The  consonants  which  are  hard  to 
pronounce  will  give  the  impression  of  effort,  of 
shock,  of  violence,  of  difficulty,  of  heaviness, — 
"  the  round  squat  turret,  black  as  the  fool's  heart ;  " 
those  which  are  easy  of  pronunciation  express  ease, 
smoothness,  fluidity,  calm,  lightness,  (facile,  suave, 
roulade)  ;  —  "  lucent  syrops,  tinct  with  cinnamon," 
a  line  like  honey  on  the  tongue,  of  which  physical 
organ,  indeed,  one  becomes,  with  the  word  "  tinct," 
definitely  conscious. 

In  fact,  the  main  point  to  notice  in  the  enume 
ration  of  the  expressive  qualities  of  sounds,  is  that 
it  is  the  movement  in  utterance  which  character 
izes  them.  That  movement  tends  to  reproduce 
itself  in  the  hearer,  and  carries  with  it  its  feeling- 
tone  of  ease  or  difficulty,  explosiveness  or  sweet 
ness  long  drawn  out.  It  is  thus  by  a  kind  of 
sympathetic  induction  rather  than  by  external  imi 
tation  that  these  words  of  the  second  type  become 
expressive. 


214   THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Finally,  the  two  moments  may  be  combined,  as 
in  such  a  word  as  "  roaring,"  which  is  directly  imi 
tative  of  a  sound,  and  by  the  muscular  activity  it 
calls  into  play  suggests  the  extended  energy  of 
the  action  itself. 

The  stage  in  which  the  word  becomes  a  mere 
colorless,  algebraic  sign  of  object  or  process  never 
occurs,  practically,  for  in  any  case  it  has  accumu 
lated  in  its  history  and  vicissitudes  a  fringe  of  sugges- 
tiveness,  as  a  ship  accumulates  barnacles.  "  Words 
carry  with  them  all  the  meanings  they  have  worn," 
says  Walter  Raleigh  in  his  "  Essay  on  Style."  "  A 
slight  technical  implication,  a  faint  tinge  of  archa 
ism  in  the  common  turn  of  speech  that  you  em 
ploy,  and  in  a  moment  you  have  shaken  off  the 
mob  that  scours  the  rutted  highway,  and  are  ad 
dressing  a  select  audience  of  ticket-holders  with 
closed  doors."  Manifold  may  be  the  implications 
and  suggestions  of  even  a  single  letter.  Thus  a 
charming  anonymous  essay  on  the  word  "  Grey." 
"  Gray  is  a  quiet  color  for  daylight  things,  but  there 
is  a  touch  of  difference,  of  romance,  even,  about 
things  that  are  grey.  Gray  is  a  color  for  fur,  and 
Quaker  gowns,  and  breasts  of  doves,  and  a  gray 
day,  and  a  gentlewoman's  hair ;  and  horses  must  be 
gray.  .  .  .  Now  grey  is  for  eyes,  the  eyes  of  a 
witch,  with  green  lights  in  them  and  much  wicked, 
ness.  Gray  eyes  would  be  as  tender  and  yielding 
and  true  as  blue  ones ;  a  coquette  must  have  eyes 
of  grey." 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE         215 

Words  do  not  have  meanings,  they  are  mean 
ings  through  their  power  of  direct  suggestion 
and  induction.  They  may  become  what  they  sig 
nify.  Nor  is  this  power  confined  to  words  alone ; 
on  its  possession  by  the  phrase,  sentence,  or  verse 
rests  the  whole  theory  of  style.  The  short, 
sharp  staccato,  the  bellowing  turbulent,  the  swim 
ming  melodious  circling  sentence  are  truly  what 
they  mean,  in  their  form  as  in  the  objective  sense 
of  their  words.  The  sound-values  of  rhythm  and 
pace  have  been  in  other  chapters  fully  dwelt  upon ; 
the  expressive  power  of  breaks  and  variations  is 
worth  noting  also.  Of  the  irresistible  significance 
of  rhythm,  even  against  content,  we  have  an  exam 
ple  amusingly  commented  on  by  Mr.  G.  K.  Ches 
terton  in  his  "  Twelve  Types."  "  He  (Byron)  may 
arraign  existence  on  the  most  deadly  charges,  he 
may  condemn  it  with  the  most  desolating  verdict, 
but  he  cannot  alter  the  fact  that  on  some  walk  in 
a  spring  morning  when  all  the  limbs  are  swinging 
and  all  the  blood  alive  in  the  body,  the  lips  may 
be  caught  repeating : 

'  Oh,  there  's  not  a  joy  the  world  can  give  like  that  it  takes 

away, 
When  the  glow  of  early  youth  declines  in  beauty's  dull 


That   automatic  recitation  is  the    answer  to  the 
whole  pessimism  of  Byron." 


216      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 


IV 

Such,  then,  are  some  of  the  means  by  which  Ian* 
guage  becomes  identical  with  thought,  and  most 
truly  the  dialect  of  life.  The  genius  will  have  ways, 
to  which  these  briefly  outlined  ones  will  seem 
crude  and  obvious,  but  they  will  be  none  the  less 
of  the  same  nature.  Shall  we  then  conclude  that 
the  beauty  of  literature  is  here  ?  that,  in  the  words 
of  Pater,  from  the  essay  I  have  quoted,  "  In  that 
perfect  justice  (of  the  unique  word)  .  .  .  omni 
present  in  good  work,  in  function  at  every  point, 
from  single  epithets  to  the  rhythm  of  a  whole  book, 
lay  the  specific,  indispensable,  very  intellectual 
beauty  of  literature,  the  possibility  of  which  con 
stitutes  it  a  fine  art." 

In  its  last  analysis,  such  a  conception  of  litera 
ture  amounts  to  the  unimpeded  intercourse  of  mind 
with  mind.  Literature  would  be  a  language  which 
dispenses  with  gesture,  facial  expression,  tone  of 
voice ;  which  is,  in  its  halts,  accelerations  and  re 
tardations,  emphases  and  concessions,  the  apothe 
osis  of  conversation.  But  this  clearness,  —  in  the 
sublime  sense,  including  the  ornate  and  the  subtle, 
—  this  luminous  lucidity,  —  is  it  not  quite  indeter 
minate  ?  Clearness  is  said  of  a  medium.  What  is 
it  that  shines  through? 

Were  this  clearness  the  beauty  we  are  seeking, 
whatever  in  the  world  that  wanted  to  get  itself 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       217 

said,  would,  if  it  were  perfectly  said,  become  a  final 
achievement  of  literature.  All  that  the  plain  man 
looks  for,  we  must  think  rightly,  in  poetry  and 
prose,  might  be  absent,  and  yet  we  should  have  to 
acknowledge  its  excellence.  Let  us  then  consider 
this  quality  by  which  the  words  become  what  they 
signify  as  the  specific  beauty  rather  of  style  than 
of  literature ;  the  mere  refining  of  the  gold  from 
which  the  work  of  art  has  yet  to  be  made.  Lan 
guage  is  the  dialect  of  life ;  and  the  most  perfect 
language  can  be  no  more  than  the  most  perfect 
truth  of  intercourse.  It  must  then  be  through  the 
treatment  of  life,  or  the  sense  of  life  itself,  that  we 
are  somehow  to  attain  the  perfect  moment  of  beauty. 

The  sense  of  life  !  In  what  meaning  are  these 
words  to  be  taken  ?  Not  the  completest  sense  of  all, 
because  the  essence  of  life  is  in  personal  responsi 
bility  to  a  situation,  and  this  is  exactly  what  in  our 
experience  of  literature  disappears.  First  of  all, 
then,  before  asking  how  the  moment  of  beauty  is 
to  be  attained,  we  must  see  how  it  is  psychologi 
cally  possible  to  have  a  sense  of  life  that  is  yet 
purged  of  the  will  to  live. 

All  experience  of  life  is  a  complication  of  ideas, 
emotions,  and  attitudes  or  impulses  to  action  in 
varying  proportions.  The  sentiment  of  reality  is 
constituted  by  our  tendency  to  interfere,  to  "  take 
a  hand."  Sometimes  the  stage  of  our  consciousness 
is  so  fully  occupied  by  the  images  of  others  that 
our  own  reaction  is  less  vivid.  Finally,  all  condi- 


218       THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

tions  and  possibilities  of  reaction  may  be  so  mini 
mizetl  that  the  only  attitude  possible  is  our  accept 
ance  or  rejection  of  a  world  in  which  such  things 
can  be.  What  does  it  "  matter  "  to  me  whether  or 
not  "  the  old,  unhappy,  far-off  things  "  really  hap 
pened  ?  The  worlds  of  the  Borgias,  of  Don  Juan, 
and  of  the  Russian  war  stand  on  the  same  level  of 
reality.  Aucassin  and  Nicolette  are  as  near  to  me 
as  Abelard  and  Heloi'se.  For  in  relation  to  these 
persons  my  impulse  is  nil.  I  submit  to  them,  I 
cannot  change  or  help  them ;  and  because  I  have 
no  impulse  to  interfere,  they  are  not  vividly  real  to 
me.  And,  in  general,  in  so  far  as  I  am  led  to  con 
template  or  to  dwell  on  anything  in  idea,  in  so 
far  does  my  personal  attitude  tend  to  parallel  this 
impersonal  one  toward  real  persons  temporally  or 
geographically  out  of  reach. 

Now  in  literature  all  conditions  tend  to  the 
enormous  preponderance  of  the  ideal  element  in 
experience.  My  mind  in  reading  is  completely 
filled  with  ideas  of  the  appearance,  ways,  manners, 
and  situation  of  the  people  concerned.  I  leave 
them  a  clear  field.  My  emotions  are  enlisted  only 
as  the  inevitable  fringe  of  association  belonging  to 
vivid  ideas  —  the  ideas  of  their  emotions.  So  far 
as  all  the  possibilities  of  understanding  are  fulfilled 
for  me,  so  far  as  I  am  in  possession  of  all  the  con 
ditions,  so  far  do  I  "  realize  "  the  characters,  but 
realize  them  as  ideas  tinged  with  feeling. 

Here  there  will  be  asseverations  to  the  contrary. 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE      219 

What !  feel  no  real  emotion  over  Little  Nell,  or 
Colonel  Newcome  ?  no  emotion  in  that  great  scene 
of  passion  and  despair,  the  parting  of  Richard 
Feverel  and  Lucy,  —  a  scene  which  none  can  read 
save  with  tight  throat  and  burning  eyes  !  Even  so. 
It  is  not  real  emotion.  You  have  the  vivid  ideas, 
so  vivid  that  a  fringe  of  emotional  association  ac 
companies  them,  as  you  might  shudder  remember 
ing  a  bad  dream.  But  the  real  emotion  arises  only 
from  the  real  impulse,  the  real  responsibility. 

The  sense  of  life  that  literature  gives  might  be 
described  as  life  in  its  aspect  as  idea.  That  this 
fact  is  the  cause  of  the  peace  and  painlessness  of 
literature  —  since  it  is  by  his  actions,  as  Aristotle 
says,  that  man  is  happy  or  the  reverse  —  need  not 
concern  us  here.  For  the  beauty  of  literature,  and 
our  joy  in  it,  lie  not  primarily  in  its  lack  of  power 
to  hurt  us.  The  point  is  that  literature  gives  none 
the  less  truly  a  sense  of  life  because  it  happens 
to  be  one  extreme  aspect  of  life.  The  literary 
way  is  only  one  of  the  ways  in  which  life  can  be 
met. 

To  give  the  sense  of  life  perfectly  —  to  create 
the  illusion  of  life  —  is  this,  then,  the  beauty  of 
literature  ?  But  we  are  seeking  for  the  perfect  mo 
ment  of  stimulation  and  repose.  Why  should  the 
perfect  illusion  of  life  give  this,  any  more  than  life 
itself  does  ?  So  the  "  vision  "  of  a  picture  might 
be  intensely  clear,  and  yet  the  picture  itself  un- 
beautiful.  Such  a  complete  "  sense  of  life,"  such 


220      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

clear  "  vision,"  would  show  the  artist's  mastery  of 
technique,  but  not  his  power  to  create  beauty.  In 
the  art  of  literature,  as  in  the  art  of  painting,  the 
normal  function  is  but  the  first  condition,  the  state 
of  perfection  is  the  end  at  which  to  aim. 

It  is  just  this  distinction  that  we  can  properly 
make  between  the  characteristic  or  typical  in  the 
sense  of  differentiated,  and  the  great  or  excellent 
in  literature.  In  the  theory  of  some  writers,  perfect 
fidelity  to  the  type  is  the  only  originality.  To  paint 
the  Russian  peasant  or  the  French  bourgeois  as  he 
is,  to  catch  the  exact  shade  of  exquisite  soullessness 
in  Oriental  loves,  to  reproduce  the  Berserker  rage 
or  the  dull  horror  of  battle,  is  indeed  to  give  the 
perfect  sense  of  life.  But  the  perfect,  or  the  com 
plete,  sense  of  life  is  not  the  moment  of  perfect 
life. 

Yet  to  this  assertion  two  answers  might  be  made. 
The  authors  of  "  Bel- Ami,"  or  "  Madame  Chrysan- 
theme,"  or  "  The  Triumph  of  Death,"  might  claim 
to  be  saved  by  their  form.  The  march  of  events, 
the  rounding  climax,  the  crystal-clear  unity  of  the 
finished  work,  they  might  say,  gives  the  indispen 
sable  union,  for  the  perfect  moment  of  stimulation 
and  repose.  No  syllable  in  the  slow  unfolding  of 
exquisite  cadences  but  is  supremely  placed  from 
the  first  page  to  the  last.  As  note  calls  to  note, 
so  thought  calls  to  thought,  and  feeling  to  feeling, 
and  the  last  word  is  an  answer  to  the  first  of  the 
inevitable  procession.  A  writer's  donnee,  they 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       221 

would  say,  is  his  own.  The  reader  may  only  beg  — 
Make  me  something  fine  after  your  own  fashion ! 

And  they  would  have  to  be  acknowledged  partly 
in  the  right.  In  that  inevitable  unity  of  form  there 
is  indeed  a  necessary  element  of  the  perfect  mo 
ment  ;  but  it  is  not  a  perfect  unity.  For  the  matter 
of  their  art  should  be,  in  the  last  analysis,  life  itself ; 
and  the  unity  of  life  itself,  the  one  basic  unity  of 
all,  they  have  missed.  It  is  a  hollow  sphere  they 
present,  and  nothing  solid.  Henry  James  has  spent 
the  whole  of  a  remarkable  essay  on  D'Annunzio's 
creations  in  determining  the  meaning  of  "  the  fact 
that  their  total  beauty  somehow  extraordinarily 
fails  to  march  with  their  beauty  of  parts,  and  that 
something  is  all  the  while  at  work  undermining 
that  bulwark  against  ugliness  which  it  is  their  ob 
vious  theory  of  their  own  office  to  throw  up."  The 
secret  is,  he  avers,  that  the  themes,  the  "  anecdotes," 
could  find  their  extension  and  consummation  only 
in  the  rest  of  life.  Shut  out,  as  they  are,  from  the 
rest  of  life,  shut  out  from  all  fruition  and  assimi 
lation,  and  so  from  all  hope  of  dignity,  they  lose 
absolutely  their  power  to  sway  us. 

It  might  be  simpler  to  say  that  these  works  lack 
the  first  beauty  which  literature  as  the  dialect  of 
life  can  have  —  they  lack  the  repose  of  centrality  ; 
they  have  no  identity  with  the  meaning  of  life  as  a 
whole.  It  could  not  be  said  of  them,  as  Bagehot 
said  of  Shakespeare :  "  He  puts  things  together,  he 
refers  things  to  a  principle;  rather,  they  group 


222     THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

themselves  in  his  intelligence  insensibly  around  a 
principle;  ...  a  cool  oneness,  a  poised  person 
ality,  pervades  him."  But  in  these  men  there  is  no 
cool  oneness,  no  reasonable  soul,  and  so  they  miss 
the  central  unity  of  life,  which  can  give  unity  to 
literature.  Even  the  apparent  structural  unity  fails 
when  looked  at  closely;  the  actions  of  the  charac 
ters  are  seen  to  be  mechanical  —  their  meaning  is 
not  inevitable. 

The  second  answer  to  our  assertion  that  the 
"  sense  of  life "  is  not  the  beauty  of  literature 
might  call  attention  to  the  fact  that  sense  of  life 
may  be  taken  as  understanding  of  life.  A  complete 
sense  of  life  must  include  the  conditions  of  life,  and 
the  conditions  of  life  involve  this  very  "  energetic 
identity  "  on  which  we  have  insisted.  And  this  con 
tention  we  must  admit.  So  long  as  the  sense  of 
life  is  taken  as  the  illusion  of  life,  our  words  hold 
good.  But  if  to  that  is  added  understanding  of 
life,  the  door  is  open  to  the  profoundest  excellences 
of  literature.  Henry  James  has  glimpsed  this  truth 
in  saying  that  no  good  novel  will  ever  proceed  from 
a  superficial  mind.  Stevenson  has  gone  further. 
44  But  the  truth  is  when  books  are  conceived  under 
a  great  stress,  with  a  soul  of  ninefold  power,  nine 
times  heated  and  electrified  by  effort,  the  condi 
tions  of  our  being  are  seized  with  such  an  ample 
grasp,  that  even  should  the  main  design  be  trivial 
or  base,  some  truth  and  beauty  cannot  fail  to  be 
expressed." 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       223 


V 

The  conditions  of  our  being !  If  we  accept,  af 
firm,  profoundly  rest  in  what  is  presented  to  us,  we 
have  the  first  condition  of  that  repose  which  is  the 
essence  of  the  aesthetic  experience.  And  from  this 
highest  demand  can  be  viewed  the  hierarchy  of  the 
lesser  perfections  which  go  to  make  up  the  "  perfect 
moment"  of  literature.  Instead  of  reaching  this 
point  by  successive  eliminations,  we  might  indeed 
have  reached  it  in  one  stride.  The  perfect  moment 
across  the  dialect  of  life,  the  moment  of  perfect 
life,  must  be  in  truth  that  in  which  we  touch  the 
confines  of  our  being,  look  upon  our  world,  all  in 
all,  as  revealed  in  some  great  moment,  and  see  that 
it  is  good  —  that  we  grasp  it,  possess  it,  that  it  is 
akin  to  us,  that  it  is  identical  with  our  deepest 
wills.  The  work  that  grasps  the  conditions  of  our 
being  gives  ourselves  back  to  us  completed. 

In  the  conditions  of  our  being  in  a  less  profound 
sense  may  be  found  the  further  means  to  the  per 
fect  moment.  Thus  the  progress  of  events,  the  de 
velopment  of  feelings,  must  be  in  harmony  with 
our  natural  processes.  The  development,  the  rise, 
complication,  expectation,  gratification,  the  sus 
pense,  climax,  and  drop  of  the  great  novel,  corre 
spond  to  the  natural  functioning  of  our  mental 
processes.  It  is  an  experience  that  we  seek,  multi 
plied,  perfected,  expanded  —  the  life  moment  of  a 


224      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

man  greater  than  we.  This,  too,  is  the  ultimate 
meaning  of  the  demands  of  style.  Lucidity,  indeed, 
there  must  be,  —  identity  with  the  thought ;  but 
besides  the  value  of  the  thought  in  its  approxima 
tion  to  the  conditions  of  our  being,  we  seek  the 
vividness  of  that  thought,  —  the  perfect  moment 
of  apprehension,  as  well  as  of  experience.  It  is  the 
beauty  of  style  to  be  lucid ;  but  the  beauty  of  lucid 
ity  is  to  reinforce  the  springs  of  thought. 

Even  to  the  minor  elements  of  style,  the  tone- 
coloring,  the  rhythm,  the  melody,  —  the  essence 
of  beauty,  that  is,  of  the  perfect  moment,  is  given 
by  the  perfecting  of  the  experience.  The  beauty 
of  liquids  is  their  ease  and  happiness  of  utterance. 
The  beauty  of  rhythm  is  its  aiding  and  compelling 
power,  on  utterance  and  thought.  There  is  a  sen 
suous  pleasure  in  a  great  style ;  we  love  to  mouth 
it,  for  it  is  made  to  mouth.  As  Flaubert  says  some 
what  brutally,  "  Je  ne  sais  qu'une  phrase  est  bonne 
qu'apres  Favoir  fait  passer  par  mon  gueuloir." 

In  the  end  it  might  be  said  that  literature  gives 
us  the  moment  of  perfection,  and  is  thus  possessed 
of  beauty,  when  it  reveals  ourselves  to  ourselves  in 
a  better  world  of  experience  ;  in  the  conditions  of 
our  moral  being,  in  the  conditions  of  our  thought 
processes,  in  the  conditions  of  our  utterance 
and  our  breathing ;  —  all  these,  concentric  cir 
cles,  in  which  the  centre  of  repose  is  given  by  the 
underlying  identity  of  ourselves  with  this  world. 
Because  it  goes  to  the  roots  of  experience,  and 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       225 

seeks  to  give  the  conditions  of  our  being  as  they 
really  are,  literature  may  be  truly  called  a  criti 
cism  of  life.  Yet  the  end  of  literature  is  not  the 
criticism  of  life  ;  rather  the  appreciation  of  life  — 
the  full  savour  of  life  in  its  entirety.  The  final 
definition  of  literature  is  the  art  of  experience. 


VI 

But  then  literature  would  give  only  the  perfect 
moments  of  existence,  would  ignore  the  tragedies, 
ironies,  pettiness  of  life !  Such  an  interpretation  is  a 
quite  mistaken  one.  As  the  great  painting  uses  the 
vivid  reproduction  of  an  ugly  face,  a  squalid  hovel, 
to  create  a  beautiful  picture,  beautiful  because  all 
the  conditions  of  seeing  are  made  to  contribute  to 
our  being  made  whole  in  seeing ;  so  great  literature 
can  attain  through  any  given  set  of  facts  to  the 
deeper  harmony  of  life,  can  touch  the  one  poised, 
unconquerable  soul,  and  can  reinforce  the  moment 
of  self-completeness  by  every  parallel  device  of 
stimulation  and  concentration.  And  because  it  is 
most  often  in  the  tragedies  that  the  conditions  of 
our  being  are  laid  bare,  and  the  strings  which  re 
verberate  to  the  emotions  most  easily  played  upon, 
it  is  likely  that  the  greatest  books  of  all  will  be  the 
tragedies  themselves.  The  art  of  experience  needs 
contrasts  no  less  than  does  the  visual  or  auditory  art. 

This  beauty  of  literature,  because  it  is  a  hierar 
chy  of  beauties  more  and  less  essential,  exists  in 


226      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

all  varieties  and  in  all  shades.  If  the  old  compari 
son  and  contrast  of  idealism  and  realism  is  referred 
to  here,  it  is  because  that  ancient  controversy  seems 
not  even  yet  entirely  outworn.  If  realism  means 
close  observation  of  facts  and  neglect  of  ideas, 
and  idealism,  neglect  of  prosaic  facts  and  devotion 
to  ideas,  then  we  must  admit  that  realism  and 
idealism  are  the  names  of  two  defective  types. 
Strictly  speaking,  whatever  goes  deep  enough  to 
the  truth  of  things,  gets  nearer  reality,  is  realism ; 
yet  to  get  nearer  reality  is  to  attain  true  ideas,  and 
that  is  idealism  too.  The  great  work 'of  literature 
is  realistic  because  it  does  not  lose  sight  of  the 
ideal.  Our  popular  use  of  idealistic  refers,  indeed, 
to  the  world  seen  through  rose-colored  glasses ; 
but  for  that  possible  variety  of  literary  effort  it  is 
better  to  use  the  word  Romance.  Romance  is  the 
world  of  our  youthful  dreams  of  things,  not  as  they 
do  happen,  or  as  in  our  nobler  moments  we  will 
them  to  happen,  but  as,  without  any  special  deeper 
meaning,  we  should  wish  them  to  happen.  That 
is  the  world  of  the  gold-haired  maiden,  "  the  lover 
with  the  red-roan  steed  of  steeds,"  the  purse  of 
Fortunatus,  the  treasure -trove,  the  villain  con 
fronted  with  his  guilt.  "  Never  the  time  and  the 
place  and  the  loved  one  all  together !  "  But  in 
Romance  they  come  together.  The  total  depravity 
of  inanimate  things  has  become  the  stars  in  their 
courses  fighting  for  us.  Stevenson  calls  it  the  poe 
try  of  circumstance  —  for  the  dreams  of  youth 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  LITERATURE       227. 

are  properly  healthy  and  material.  The  salvage 
from  the  wreck  in  "  Robinson  Crusoe,"  he  tells 
us,  satisfies  the  mind  like  things  to  eat.  Romance 
gives  us  the  perfect  moment  of  the  material  and 
human  —  with  the  divine  left  out. 

It  has  sometimes  been  made  a  reproach  to  critics 
- — more  often,  I  fear,  by  those  who  hold,  like  my 
self,  that  beauty  and  excellence  in  art  are  iden 
tical —  that  they  discourse  too  little  of  form  in 
literature,  and  too  much  of  content.  But  all  our 
taking  thought  will  have  been  vain,  if  it  is  not 
now  patent  that  the  first  beauty  of  literature  is, 
and  must  be,  its  identity  with  the  central  flame  of 
life,  —  the  primal  conditions  of  our  being.  Thus  it 
is  that  the  critic  is  justified  in  asking  first  of  all, 
How  does  this  man  look  on  life  ?  Has  he  revealed 
a  new  —  or  better  —  the  eternal  old  meaning  ?  The 
Weltanschauung  is  the  critic's  first  consideration, 
and  after  that  he  may  properly  take  up  that  second 
ary  grasp  of  the  conditions  of  our  being  in  mental 
processes,  revealed  in  the  structure,  march  of  inci 
dents,  suspense,  and  climaxes,  and  the  beauty  or 
idiosyncracy  of  style.  It  is  then  literally  false  that 
it  does  not  matter  what  a  man  says,  but  only  how 
he  says  it.  What  he  says  is  all  that  matters,  for  it 
will  not  be  great  thought  without  some  greatness  in 
the  saying.  Art  for  art's  sake  in  literature  is  then 
art  for  life's  sake,  and  the  "  informing  purpose,"  in 
so  far  as  that  means  the  vision  of  our  deepest  selves, 
is  its  first  condition. 


228      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

And  because  the  Beauty  of  Literature  is  consti 
tuted  by  its  quality  as  life  itself,  we  may  defer  de 
tailed  consideration  of  the  species  and  varieties  of 
literature.  Prose  and  poetry,  drama  and  novel, 
have  each  their  own  special  excellences  springing 
from  the  respective  situations  they  had,  and  have, 
to  meet.  Yet  these  but  add  elements  to  the  one 
great  power  they  all  must  have  as  literature, — 
the  power  to  give  the  perfect  experience  of  life  in 
its  fullness  and  vividness,  and  in  its  identity  with 
the  central  meanings  of  existence,  —  unity  and  self- 
completeness  together,  —  in  a  form  which  offers  to 
our  mental  functions  the  perfect  moment  of  stimu 
lation  and  repose. 


VII 

THE  NATURE   OF  THE  EMO 
TIONS  OF  THE  DRAMA 


VII 

THE  NATURE  OF  THE  EMOTIONS  OF  THE 
DRAMA 


THAT  psychologist  who,  writing  on  the  prob 
lems  of  dramatic  art,  called  his  brochure  "  The 
Dispute  over  Tragedy,"  gave  the  right  name  to  a 
singular  situation.  Of  all  the  riddles  of  aesthetic 
experience,  none  has  been  so  early  propounded,  so 
indefatigably  attempted,  so  variously  and  unsatis 
factorily  solved,  as  this.  What  is  dramatic  ?  What 
constitutes  a  tragedy  ?  How  can  we  take  pleasure 
in  painful  experiences?  These  questions  are  like 
Banquo's  ghost,  and  will  not  down. 

The  ingenious  Bernays  has  said  that  it  was  all 
the  fault  of  Aristotle.  The  last  phrase  of  the  fa 
mous  definition  in  the  "  Poetics,"  which  should  re 
late  the  nature,  end,  and  aim  of  tragedy,  is  left,  in 
his  works  as  we  have  them,  probably  through  the 
suppression  or  loss  of  context,  without  elucidating 
commentary.  And  the  writers  on  tragedy  have  ever 
since  so  striven  to  guess  his  meaning,  and  to  make 
their  answers  square  with  contemporary  drama,  that 
they  have  given  comparatively  slight  attention  to 
the  immediate,  unbiased  investigation  of  the  phe- 


232      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

nomenon  itself.  Aristotle's  definition  is  as  follows : 1 
"  Tragedy,  then,  is  an  imitation  of  an  action  that 
is  serious,  complete,  and  of  a  certain  magnitude ; 
in  language  embellished  with  each  kind  of  artistic 
ornament,  the  several  kinds  being  found  in  sepa 
rate  parts  of  the  play :  in  the  form  of  action,  not 
of  narrative ;  through  pity  and  fear  effecting  the 
proper  purgation  of  these  emotions."  In  what  fol 
lows,  he  takes  up  and  explains  this  definition,  phrase 
by  phrase,  until  the  very  last.  What  is  meant  by 
the  Purgation  (Katharsis)  through  pity  and  fear  ? 
It  is  at  least  what  tragedy  "  effects,"  and  is  thus 
evidently  the  function  of  tragedy.  But  a  thing  is 
determined,  constructed,  judged,  according  to  its 
function ;  the  function  is,  so  to  speak,  its  genetic 
formula.  With  a  clear  view  of  that,  the  rest  of 
the  definition  could  conceivably  have  been  con 
structed  without  further  explanation ;  without  it, 
the  key  to  the  whole  fails.  "  Purgation  of  these 
emotions  ;"  did  it  mean  purification  of  the  emotions, 
or  purgation  of  the  soul  from  the  emotions?  And 
what  emotions  ?  Pity  and  fear,  or  "  these  and  such 
like,"  thus  including  all  emotions  that  tragedy  could 
bring  to  expression  ? 

Our  knowledge  of  the  severely  moral  bent  of  the 
explicit  art  criticism  of  the  Greeks  has  inclined 
many  to  accept  the  first  interpretation  ;  and  mod 
ern  interests  impel  in  the  same  direction.  It  is  nat 
ural  to  think  of  the  generally  elevating  and  soften- 
1  S.  H.  Butcher,  Aristotle's  Theory  of  Poetry  and  Fine  Art,  1895. 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE  DRAMA          233 

ing  effects  of  great  art  as  a  kind  of  moral  clarify 
ing,  and  the  question  how  this  should  be  effected 
just  by  pity  and  fear  was  not  pressed.  So  Lessing 
in  the  "  Hamburgische  Dramaturgic  "  takes  Kathar- 
sis  as  the  conversion  of  the  emotions  in  general  into 
virtuous  dispositions. 

Before  we  ask  ourselves  seriously  how  far  this 
represents  our  experience  of  the  drama,  we  must 
question  its  fidelity  to  the  thought  of  Aristotle; 
and  that  question  seems  to  have  received  a  final 
answer  in  the  exhaustive  discussion  of  Bernays.1 
Without  going  into  his  arguments,  suffice  it  to  say 
that  Aristotle,  scientist  and  physician's  son  as  he 
was,  had  in  mind  in  using  this  striking  metaphor 
of  the  Katharsis  of  the  emotions,  a  perfectly  defi 
nite  procedure,  familiar  in  the  treatment,  by  excit 
ing  music,  of  persons  overcome  by  the  ecstasy  or 
"  enthusiasm  "  characteristic  of  certain  religious 
rites.  Bernays  quotes  Milton's  preface  to  "  Samson 
Agonistes  :  "  "  Tragedy  is  said  by  Aristotle  to  be  of 
power,  by  raising  pity  and  fear,  or  terror,  to  purge 
the  mind  of  those  and  such  like  passions  ;  that  is, 
to  temper  and  reduce  them  to  just  measure  with  a 
kind  of  delight,  stirred  by  reading  or  seeing  those 
passions  well  imitated.  Nor  is  Nature  wanting  in 
her  own  effects  to  make  good  his  assertion  ;  for  so 
in  physic,  things  of  melancholic  hue  and  quality 
are  used  against  melancholy,  sour  against  sour, 

1  Zwei  Adhandlungen  uber  d.  Aristotelische  Theorie  d.  Drama, 
1880. 


234      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

salt  to  remove  salt  humours,"  adding  "  the  homoa- 
opathic  comparison  shows  how  near  he  was  to  the 
correct  notion."  Bernays  concludes  that  by  Kathar- 
sis  is  denoted  the  "  alleviating  discharge  "  of  the 
emotions  themselves.  In  other  words,  pity  and  fear 
are  bad,  and  it  is  a  good  thing  to  get  rid  of  them 
in  a  harmless  way,  as  it  is  better  to  be  vaccinated 
than  to  have  small  pox. 

Now  this  alleviating  discharge  is  pleasurable 
(/«0'  ^801/^5),  and  the  pleasure  seems,  from  allied 
passages,  to  arise  not  in  the  accomplished  relief  from 
oppression,  but  in  the  process  itself.  This  becomes 
intelligible  from  the  point  of  view  of  Aristotle's 
definition  of  pleasure  as  an  ecstatic  condition  of 
the  soul.  For  every  emotion  contains,  according  to 
Aristotle,  be  it  ever  so  painful,  an  ecstatic,  and 
hence  a  pleasurable  element ;  so  that  the  excitement 
of  pity  and  fear  in  the  ecstatic  degree  would  effect, 
at  the  same  time  with  an  alleviating  discharge,  a 
pleasure  also.  Pity  and  fear  are  aroused  to  be  al 
layed,  and  to  give  pleasure  in  the  arousing  and  the 
relief. 

Such,  approximately,  is  Aristotle's  view  of  the 
Tragic  Emotion,  or  Katharsis.  Is  it  also  our  own  ? 
To  clear  the  field  for  this  inquiry,  it  will  be  well 
first  of  all  to  insist  on  a  distinction  which  is  mostly 
discounted  in  significance  because  taken  for 
granted.  We  speak  of  Aristotle's  Katharsis  as  the 
Tragic  Emotion,  forgetting  that  to-day  Tragedy 
and  the  Tragic  are  no  longer  identical.  Aristotle 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA         235 

conceives  himself  to  be  dealing  with  the  peculiar 
emotion  aroused  by  a  certain  dramatic  form,  the 
name  of  which  has  nothing  to  do  with  its  content. 
For  Tragedy  is  literally  goat-song,  perhaps  from 
the  goat-skins  worn  by  the  first  performers  of  trag 
edy  disguised  as  satyrs.  Since  then  we  have  bor 
rowed  the  name  of  that  dramatic  form  to  apply  to 
events  which  have  the  same  type  or  issue  as  in  that 
form.  In  popular  speech  to-day  the  word  tragic  at 
taches  itself  rather  to  the  catastrophe  than  to  the 
struggle,  and  therefore,  I  cannot  but  think,  modern 
discussion  of  "  the  tragic  "  is  wrong  in  attempting 
to  combine  the  Aristotelian  and  the  modern  shades 
of  meaning,  and  to  embody  them  both  in  a  single 
definition.  Aristotle  is  dealing  with  the  whole  ef 
fect  of  the  dramatic  representation  of  what  we 
should  call  a  tragic  occurrence.  It  is  really  the 
theory  of  the  dramatic  experience  and  not  of  the 
tragic,  in  our  sense,  which  occupies  him.  Therefore, 
as  I  say,  we  must  not  assume,  with  many  modern 
critics,  that  an  analysis  of  the  tragic  in  experience 
will  solve  the  problem  of  the  Katharsis.  Our 
"  tragic  event,"  it  is  true,  is  of  the  kind  which  dra 
matically  treated  helped  to  bring  about  this  pecu 
liar  effect.  But  the  question  of  Aristotle  and  our 
problem  of  Katharsis  is  the  problem  of  the  emotion 
aroused  by  the  Tragic  Drama.  What,  then,  is  the 
nature  of  dramatic  emotion  ? 


236      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 


n 

The  analogy  of  Aristotle's  conception  of  the 
emotion  of  tragedy  with  certain  modern  views  is 
evident.  To  feel  pain  is  to  live  intensely,  it  is  said ; 
to  be  absorbed  in  great,  even  though  overwhelm 
ing,  events  is  to  make  us  realize  our  own  pulsing 
life.  The  criticism  to  be  made  on  this  theory  is, 
however,  no  less  simple :  it  consists  merely  in  deny 
ing  the  fact.  It  does  not  give  us  pleasure  to  have 
painful  emotions  or  to  see  other  people's  sorrows,  in 
spite  of  the  remains  of  the  "gorilleferoce  "  in  us,  to 
which  Taine  and  M.  Faguet  attribute  this  imputed 
pleasure.  And  if  we  feel  pleasure,  excitement,  ele 
vation  in  the  representation  of  the  tragic,  it  must 
be  due  to  some  other  element  in  the  experience 
than  the  mere  self-realization  involved  in  suffering. 
It  is  indeed  our  first  impulse  to  say  that  the  pain 
ful  quality  vanishes  when  the  exciting  events  are 
known  to  be  unreal ;  pity  and  fear  are  painful  be 
cause  too  intense,  and  in  the  drama  are  just  suffi 
ciently  moderated.  The  rejoinder  is  easy,  that  pity 
and  fear  are  never  anything  but  painful  down  to 
the  vanishing  point.  The  slight  pity  for  a  child's 
bruised  finger  is  not  more  pleasurable  because  less 
keen ;  while  our  feeling,  whatever  it  is,  for  Ophelia 
or  Gretchen,  becomes  more  pleasurable  in  propor 
tion  to  its  intensity. 

It  is  clear  that  the  matter  is  not  so  simple  as 


EMOTIONS  OF  THE   DRAMA         237 

Aristotle's  psychology  would  make  it.  Pity  and 
fear  do  not  in  themselves  produce  pleasure,  relief, 
and  repose.  These  emotions  as  aroused  by  tragedy 
are  either  not  what  we  know  as  pity  and  fear  in 
real  life,  or  the  manner  of  their  undergoing  brings 
in  an  entirely  new  element,  on  which  Aristotle  has 
not  touched.  In  some  way  or  other  the  pity  and 
fear  of  tragedy  are  not  like  the  pity  and  fear  of 
real  lif e,  and  in  this  distinction  lies  the  whole  mys 
tery  of  the  dramatic  Katharsis. 

But  there  is  an  extension  of  Aristotle's  theory, 
lineally  descended  from  that  of  Lessing,  which  pro 
fesses  to  elucidate  this  difference  and  must  be  taken 
account  of,  inasmuch  as  it  represents  the  modern 
popular  view.  Professor  Butcher,  in  his  edition  of 
the  "  Poetics,"  concludes,  on  the  basis  of  a  reference 
in  the  "  Politics  "  implying  that  the  Katharsis  of  en 
thusiasm  is  not  identical  with  the  Katharsis  of  pity 
and  fear,  that  the  word  is  to  be  taken  less  literally, 
as  an  expulsion  of  the  morbid  elements  in  the 
emotions,  —  and  these  he  takes  to  be  the  selfish 
elements  which  cling  to  them  in  real  life.  Thus 
"  the  spectator,  who  is  brought  face  to  face  with 
grander  sufferings  than  his  own,  experiences  a 
sympathetic  ecstasy,  a  lifting  out  of  himself.  It  is 
precisely  in  this  transport  of  feeling,  which  carries 
a  man  outside  his  individual  self,  that  the  distinc 
tive  tragic  pleasure  resides.  Pity  and  fear  are 
purged  of  the  impure  element  which  clings  to  them 
in  life.  In  the  glow  of  tragic  excitement  these  feel- 


238      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

ings  are  so  transformed  that  the  net  result  is  a 
noble  emotional  satisfaction." 

In  spite  of  our  feeling  that  the  literal  and  naive 
reading  of  the  analogy  was  probably  after  all  nearer 
Aristotle's  meaning,  we  may  accept  the  words  of 
Professor  Butcher  as  its  modern  formulation.  They 
sound,  indeed,  all  but  a  truism :  yet  they  are  seen 
on  examination  to  glide  lightly  over  some  psycho 
logical  difficulties.  Firstly,  the  step  is  a  long  one 
from  the  pity  and  fear  felt  by  the  Greek  toward 
or  about  the  actors,  to  a  sharing  of  their  emotion. 
The  one  is  a  definite  external  relation,  limited  to 
two  emotions  ;  the  other,  the  "  sympathetic  ecstasy," 
opens  the  door  to  all  conceivable  emotions,  and 
needs  at  least  to  be  justified.  But,  secondly,  even 
suppose  the  step  taken  ;  suppose  the  "  sympathetic 
imitation"  conceded  as  a  fact:  the  objections  to 
Aristotle's  interpretation  are  equally  applicable  to 
this.  Why  should  this  "  transport  of  sympathetic 
feeling"  not  take  the  form  of  a  transport  of  pain? 
Why  should  the  net  result  be  "  a  noble  emotional 
satisfaction  ? "  If  pity  and  fear  remain  pity  and 
fear,  whether  selfish  or  unselfish,  it  doth  not  yet 
appear  why  they  are  emotionally  satisfactory.  The 
"  so  transformed  "  of  the  passage  quoted  assumes 
the  point  at  issue  and  begs  the  question.  That 
is,  if  this  transformation  of  feeling  does  indeed 
take  place,  there  is  at  least  nothing  in  the  nature 
of  the  situation,  as  yet  explained,  to  account  for  it. 
But  explanation  there  must  be.  To  this,  the  lost 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA          239 

passage  on  the  Katharsis  must  have  been  devoted  ; 
this,  every  thorough-going  study  of  the  theory  of  the 
drama  must  make  an  indispensable  preliminary. 
What  there  is  in  the  nature  of  tragic  art  capa 
ble  of  transforming  painful  to  pleasurable  emotion 
must  be  made  clear.  Before  we  can  accept  Professor 
Butcher's  view  of  the  function  of  Tragedy,  its 
possibility  as  a  psychological  experience  must  be 
demonstrated.  For  the  immediately  pleasurable 
aesthetic  effect  of  Tragedy,  a  certain  kind  of  pity 
and  fear,  operating  in  a  special  way,  are  required. 
It  must  be  thus  only  in  the  peculiar  character  of 
the  emotions  aroused  that  the  distinctive  nature 
of  the  tragic  experience  consists.  What  is  this  pecu 
liar  character? 

m 

A  necessary  step  to  the  explanation  of  our  plea 
sure  in  supposedly  painful  emotions  is  to  make  clear 
how  we  can  feel  any  emotion  at  all  in  watching 
what  we  know  to  be  unreal,  and  to  show  how  this 
emotion  is  sympathetic,  that  is,  imitative,  rather 
than  of  an  objective  reference.  In  brief,  why  do  we 
feel  with,  rather  than  toward  or  about,  the  actors  ? 

The  answer  to  this  question  requires  a  reference 
to  the  current  theory  of  emotion.  According  to 
modern  psychologists,  emotion  is  constituted  by  the 
instinctive  response  to  a  situation ;  it  is  the  feeling 
accompanying  very  complicated  physical  reactions, 
which  have  their  roots  in  actions  once  useful  in  the 


240      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

history  of  mankind.  Thus  the  familiar  "expres 
sion  "  of  anger,  the  flushed  face,  dilated  nostril, 
clenched  fist,  are  remains  or  marks  of  reactions  ser 
viceable  in  mortal  combat.  But  these,  the  "  coarser  " 
bodily  changes  proper  to  anger,  are  accompanied  by 
numberless  organic  reactions,  the  "  feel "  of  all  of 
which  together  is  an  indispensable  element  of  the 
emotion  of  anger.  The  point  to  be  noted  in  all  this 
is  that  these  reactions  are  actions,  called  up  by 
something  with  which  we  literally  have  to  do. 

A  person  involved  in  real  experience  does  not 
reproduce  the  emotions  about  him,  for  in  real  life 
he  must  respond  to  the  situation,  take  an  attitude 
of  help,  consolation,  warning ;  and  the  character  of 
these  reactions  determines  for  him  an  emotion  of 
his  own.  Even  though  he  really  do  nothing,  the 
multitudinous  minor  impulses  to  action  going  to 
make  up  his  attitude  appreciably  interfere  with  the 
reproduction  of  the  reactions  of  the  object  of  his 
interest.  In  an  exactly  opposite  way  the  artificial 
conditions  of  the  spectator  at  a  play,  which  rein 
force  the  vivid  reproduction  of  ideas,  and  check 
action,  stifle  those  emotions  directed  toward  the 
players,  the  objective  emotions  of  which  we  have 
spoken.  The  spectator  is  completely  cut  off  from 
all  possibilities  of  influence  on  events.  Between  his 
world  and  that  across  the  footlights  an  inexpressible 
gulf  is  fixed.  He  cannot  take  an  "  attitude,"  he  can 
have  nothing  to  do  in  this  galere.  Since  he  may 
not  act,  even  those  beginnings  of  action  which  make 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA          241 

the  basis  of  emotion  are  inhibited  in  him.  The  spec 
tator  at  a  play  experiences  much  more  clearly  and 
sharply  than  the  sympathetic  observer ;  only  the 
proportions  of  his  mental  contents  are  different. 
This,  I  say,  accounts  for  the  absence  of  the  real 
pity  and  fear,  which  were  supposed  to  be  directed 
toward  the  persons  in  the  play.  But  so  far  as  yet 
appears  there  is  every  reason  to  expect  the  sympa 
thetic  reproduction  of  the  emotions  of  the  persons 
themselves. 

Let  us  briefly  recall  the  situation.  The  house  is 
darkened  and  quiet ;  all  lines  converge  to  the  stage, 
which  is  brightly  lighted,  and  heightened  in  visual 
effect  by  every  device  known  to  art.  The  onlooker's 
mind  is  emptied  of  its  content ;  all  feeling  of  self 
is  pushed  down  to  its  very  lowest  level.  He  has  be 
fore  him  a  situation  which  he  understands  through 
sight  and  hearing,  and  in  which  he  follows  the  ac 
tion  not  only  by  comprehension,  but  by  instinctive 
imitation.  This  is  the  great  vehicle  of  suggestion. 
We  cannot  see  tears  rise  without  moisture  in  our 
own  eyes ;  we  reproduce  a  yawn  even  against  our 
will;  the  sudden  or  the  regular  movement  of  a 
companion  we  are  forced  to  follow,  at  least  incip- 
iently.  Now  the  expression  which  we  imitate  brings 
up  in  us  to  a  certain  extent  the  whole  complex  of 
ideas  and  feeling-tones  belonging  to  that  expres 
sion.  Moreover,  the  more  closely  we  attend  to  it, 
the  more  explicitly  do  we  imitate  it,  by  an  evident 
psychological  principle.  Thus  in  the  artificially  con- 


242      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

trived  situation  of  the  spectator  at  a  play,  he  is 
forced,  not  only  to  understand  intellectually,  but 
also  to  follow,  quite  literally,  the  emotional  move 
ments  of  the  actors.  The  process  of  understanding, 
raised  to  the  highest  pitch,  involves  by  its  very  na 
ture  also  reproduction  of  what  is  understood.  The 
complex  of  the  ideas  and  associations  of  the  per 
sons  of  the  play  is  ideally  reproduced.  Are  not  the 
organic  reactions  belonging  to  these  set  up  too?  — 
not  directly,  in  response  to  a  situation  in  which  the 
spectator  may  act,  but  indirectly,  by  reproduction 
of  the  mental  contents  of  one  who  may  act,  the 
person  of  the  drama.  The  final  answer  to  this 
question  contains,  to  my  mind,  the  whole  kernel  of 
the  dramatic  mystery,  and  the  starting-point  for 
an  aBsthetic  theory  of  tragedy. 


IV 

Every  play  contains  at  least  two  actors.  The 
suggestion  of  states  of  mind  does  not  come  from 
the  hero  alone,  but  is  given  by  two  persons,  or 
groups  of  persons,  at  once.  These  persons  are, 
normally,  in  conflict.  Othello  menaces,  Desdemona 
shrinks  ;  Nora  asserts  her  right,  Hilmar  his  claim ; 
L'Aiglon  vaunts  his  inherited  personality,  Metter- 
nich  —  holds  the  candle  to  the  mirror !  But  what 
of  the  spectator  ?  He  cannot  at  once  shrink  and 
menace,  assert  and  deny,  as  the  conditions  of  sym 
pathetic  reproduction  would  seem  to  demand.  Real 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE  DRAMA         243 

emotion  implies  a  definite  set  of  reactions  of  the 
nature  of  movements ;  and  two  opposed  movements 
cannot  take  place  at  the  same  time.  Ideas,  how 
ever,  can  dwell  together  in  amity.  The  spectator 
has  a  vivid  picture  of  Othello  and  Desdemona  to 
gether;  but  his  reactions  have  neutralized  each 
other,  and  his  emotions,  lacking  their  organic 
conditions,  are  in  abeyance. 

This  is  the  typical  dramatic  moment,  for  it  is 
the  one  which  is  alone  characteristic  of  the  drama. 
Only  in  the  simultaneous  realization  of  two  op 
posing  forces  is  the  full  mutual  checking  of  emo 
tional  impulses  possible,  and  it  is  only  in  this 
simultaneous  realization  that  the  drama  differs 
from  all  other  forms  of  art.  When  the  two  an 
tagonistic  purposes  are  actually  presented  to  the 
onlooker  in  the  same  moment  of  time,  then  alone 
can  be  felt  the  vividness  of  realization,  the  tension 
of  conflict,  the  balance  of  emotion,  the  "  allevia 
tion  "  of  the  true  Kath  arsis  ! 

But  what  is  this  ?  No  emotion  after  all,  when 
the  very  traditional  test  of  our  enjoyment  of  a 
play  is  the  amount  of  feeling  it  arouses !  —  when 
hearts  beat,  hands  clench,  tears  flow  !  Emotion 
there  is,  it  may  not  be  denied ;  but  not  the  sympa 
thetic  emotions  of  the  traditional  theory. 

What  emotion?  The  mutual  checking  of  im 
pulses  issues  in  a  balance,  a  tension,  a  conflict 
which  is  yet  a  bond ;  and  this  it  is  which  is  the 
clue  to  the  excitement  or  exaltation  which  in  the 


244      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

dramatic  experience  usurps  the  place  of  definite 
feeling.  We  have  met  this  phenomenon  before. 
^Esthetic  emotion  in  general,  we  have  heard,  con 
sists  just  in  the  union  of  a  kind  of  stimulation  or 
enhanced  life,  with  repose;  a  heightening  of  the 
vital  energies  unaccompanied  by  any  tendency  to 
movement,  —  in  short,  that  gathering  of  forces 
which  we  connect  with  action,  and  which  is  felt  the 
more  because  action  is  checked.  Just  such  a  repose 
through  equilibrium  of  impulses  is  given  by  the 
dramatic  conflict.  Introspection  makes  assurance 
doubly  sure.  The  tense  exaltation  of  the  typical 
aesthetic  experience,  undirected,  unlimited,  pure  of 
personal  or  particular  reference,  is  reproduced  in 
this  nameless  ecstasy  of  the  tragic  drama.  The 
mysterious  Katharsis,  the  emotion  of  tragedy,  is, 
then,  a  special  type  of  the  unique  aesthetic  emotion. 

And  it  is  the  singular  peculiar  characteristic 
of  the  drama  —  the  face  to  face  confrontation  of 
forces  —  which  furnishes  these  conditions.  As  we 
might  have  foreseen,  the  peculiar  Katharsis,  or 
pleasurable  disappearance  or  alleviation  of  emotion 
in  tragedy,  is  based  on  just  those  elements  in 
which  the  drama  differs  from  other  forms  of  art. 
Confrontation,  and  not  action,  as  the  dramatic 
principle,  is  the  important  deduction  from  our 
theory;  —  is,  indeed,  but  the  objective  aspect  of  it. 

The  view  of  confrontation  as  the  dramatic  prin 
ciple  is  confirmed  by  dramatic  literature.  We 
emphasize  in  our  study  of  Greek  plays  their  sim- 


EMOTIONS  OF  THE   DRAMA         245 

plicity  of  plot,  their  absence  of  intrigue,  their 
sculptural,  bas-relief  quality.  The  Greek  drama 
makes  of  a  poem  a  crisis,  says  M.  Faguet.  A 
tragedy  is  a  well-composed  group,  a  fine  contrast, 
a  beautiful  effect  of  imposing  symmetry  —  as  in 
the  "  Antigone,"  "  on  one  side  civil  law  in  all  its 
blind  rigor,  on  the  other  moral  law  in  all  its  splen 
dor."  The  only  element  in  common  with  the  mod 
ern  type  is  found  in  the  conflict  of  wills.  Could 
such  a  play  as  the  "  Suppliants  "  of  Euripides  find 
any  aesthetic  justification,  save  that  it  has  the  one 
dramatic  essential  —  confrontation,  balance  of  emo 
tions?  The  very  scenes  of  short  speeches,  of  ob 
jurgation  or  sententious  repartee,  which  cannot  but 
have  for  us  an  element  of  the  grotesque,  must  have 
been  as  pleasing  as  they  were  to  the  Greek  audi 
ence,  from  the  fact  that  they  brought  to  sharpest 
vision  the  confrontation  of  the  two  antagonists. 
The  mediaeval  drama,  which  has  become  popularly 
known  in  "  Everyman,"  is  nothing  but  a  succes 
sion  of  duels,  material  or  spiritual.  It  is  indeed  the 
two  profiles  confronting  one  another,  our  sympathy 
balanced,  and  suspended,  as  it  were,  between  them, 
which  characterize  our  recollections  of  this  whole 
great  field.  The  modern  critics  and  comparers  of 
English  and  French  drama  are  fond  of  contrasting 
the  full,  rich,  even  prodigal  characterization,  rhe 
torical  and  lyrical  beauty  of  the  Shakespearean 
drama  with  the  cold,  clear,  logical,  but  resistless 
movement  of  the  French.  Yet  the  contrast  is  not 


246      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

quite  that  between  characterization  and  form ;  the 
essential  form  is  common  to  both.  In  the  first 
place,  Elizabethan  drama  was  platform  drama  — 
that  is,  by  the  testimony  of  contemporaries,  little 
concerned  with  anything  but  the  succession  of  more 
or  Jess  unconnected  scenes  between  two  or  three 
persons.  And  we  see  clearly  that  the  great  dramatic 
power  of  "  Hamlet,"  for  instance,  must  lie,  not  in 
the  movement  of  a  wavering  purpose,  but  in  the 
separate  scenes  of  his  struggle,  each  one  wonder 
fully  rich,  vivid,  balanced,  but  almost  a  unit  in 
itself.  On  the  theory  that  the  true  dramatic  form 
is  logical  progress,  dramatic  —  as  contrasted  with 
literary  —  power  would  have  to  be  denied  to 
"  Hamlet."  The  aesthetic  meaning  of  "  Lear  "  is 
not  in  the  terrible  retribution  of  pride  and  self- 
will,  but  in  the  cruel  confrontation  of  father  and 
daughters. 

This  is  no  less  true  of  the  first  great  French 
plays.  It  is  certainly  not  the  resistless  movement 
of  the  intrigue  which  makes  the  "  Misanthrope," 
"  Tartufe,"  the  "  Precieuses  Ridicules,"  master 
pieces  of  comedy  as  well  as  of  literature.  Their 
dramatic  value  lies  in  their  piquancy  of  confron 
tation.  The  tug-of-war  between  Alceste  and  Celi- 
mene,  between  Rodrigue  and  Chimene  in  "  Le 
Cid,"  is  what  we  think  of  as  dramatic  ;  and  it  is 
this  same  element  which  is  found  as  well  in  the  com 
plicated  and  overflowing  English  plays.  And  in 
modern  French  drama,  for  all  its  "  logic,"  the  dom- 


EMOTIONS  OF  THE   DRAMA         247 

mating  factor  is  the  "  scene  a  faire,"  —  what  I  have 
called  the  scene  of  confrontation.  The  notoriously 
successful  scene  in  the  English  drama  of  to-day,  the 
duel  of  Sophy  and  Lord  Quex  —  tolerably  empty 
of  real  feeling  or  significance  though  it  is  —  be 
comes  successful  merely  through  the  consummate 
handling  of  the  face-to-face  element.  Only  by  ad 
mitting  this  esthetic  moment  of  arrest  can  we  allow 
dramatic  value  to  such  a  play  as  "Les  Affaires 
sont  les  Affaires "  —  a  truly  static  drama.  The 
hero  of  this  is,  in  the  words  of  a  reviewer,  "  essen 
tially  the  same  force  in  magnitude  and  direction 
from  the  rise  to  the  fall  of  the  curtain.  It  does  not 
move ;  it  is  we  who  are  taken  around  it  so  that  we 
may  see  its  various  facets.  It  is  not  moulded  by 
the  successive  incidents  of  the  play,  but  only  dis 
closed  by  them  ;  sibi  constat"  Yet  we  cannot  deny 
to  the  play  dramatic  power ;  and  the  reason  for  this 
is,  as  I  believe,  because  it  does,  after  all,  possess  the 
dramatic  essential  —  not  action,  but  tension. 


It  will  be  demanded,  however,  what  place  there 
is  then  for  a  temporal  factor,  if  the  typical  dra 
matic  experience  depends  upon  the  great  scene? 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  drama  is  a  work  of 
art  developed  in  time,  like  music  and  poetry.  It 
comes  to  a  climax  and  a  resolution  ;  it  evolves  its 
.harmonies  like  the  symphony,  in  irrevocable  order. 


248      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

"We  cannot  afford  to  neglect,  in  such  an  aesthetic 
analysis,  what  is  an  undoubted  element  in  dramatic 
effect,  the  so-called  inevitable  march  of  events.  In 
answer  to  this  objection  we  may  hold  that  the  tem 
poral  factor  is  a  corollary  of  the  primary  demand 
for  confrontation.  It  is  necessary  that  the  confron 
tation  or  conflict  should  be  vividly  imagined,  with 
all  possible  associative  reinforcements  —  that  it 
should  be  brought  up  to  the  turn  of  the  screw,  as 
it  were.  For  this,  then,  motivation  is  absolutely 
necessary.  An  attitude  is  only  clearly  "  realized  " 
when  it  is  made  to  seem  inevitable.  It  takes  com 
plete  possession  of  our  minds  only  when  it  inhibits 
all  other  possibilities.  At  any  given  scene,  the 
power  of  a  part  to  reproduce  itself  in  us  is  mea 
sured  by  the  convincing  quality  given  it  by  mo 
tivation,  and  for  this  there  must  be  a  full  body 
of  associations  to  draw  on,  to  round  out  and  com 
plete  understanding.  The  villain  of  the  play  is,  for 
instance,  less  completely  "suggested"  to  us,  be 
cause  our  associations  are  supposedly  less  rich  for 
such  characters ;  as  a  beggar  hypnotized  and  made 
to  feel  himself  a  king  has  meagre  mental  equip 
ment  for  the  part.  Now,  this  inner  possession  can 
come  about  only  through  the  compelling  force  of  a 
long  course  of  preparation.  In  providing  such  an 
accumulation  of  impulses,  none  was  greater  than 
the  younger  Dumas  —  and  none  had  to  be  greater ! 
To  make  his  audience  accept  —  that  is,  identify 
itself  with  —  the  action  of  the  hero  in  "  Denise," 


EMOTIONS  OF  THE  DRAMA         249 

or  the  mother's  decision  in  "  Les  Idees  de  Mme. 
Aubray,"  so  subversive  of  general  social  feeling,  and 
thereby  to  experience  fully  the  great  dramatic  mo 
ment  in  each  play,  there  had  to  go  the  effect  of 
innumerable  small  impulses.  And  to  realize  some 
situations  is  even  beyond  the  scope  of  a  play's  de 
velopment.  It  is  an  acute  remark  of  Mr.  G.  K. 
Chesterton's,  that  many  plays  nowadays  turn  on 
problems  of  marriage :  which  subject  is  one  for 
slow  years  of  adjustment,  patience,  adaptation,  en 
deavor  ;  while  the  drama  requires  quick  decisions, 
bouleversements,  etc.,  and  would  do  wisely  to  con 
fine  itself  to  fields  in  which  such  bouleversements 
can  be  made  credible.  At  any  rate,  motivation  is 
desirable  for  the  dramatic  confrontation,  and  time 
—  the  working-out  —  is  an  essential  condition  of 
motivation.  To  make  the  dramatic  conflict  ever 
sharper  and  deeper,  until  it  either  melts  into  har 
mony,  or  ceases  through  the  destruction  of  one 
element,  is  the  whole  duty  of  the  development, 
and  makes  it  necessary.  That  development  is  tem 
poral,  is,  dramatically,  only  a  device  for  damming 
the  flood  that  it  may  break  at  last  with  greater 
force. 

This,  too,  is  an  answer  to  the  objection  that  if 
confrontation  is  the  dramatic  essential,  bare  oppo 
sition,  because  the  clearest  confrontation,  would  be 
the  greatest  drama,  and  the  "  Suppliants  "  of  Euri 
pides  be  indeed  an  example  of  it.  Bare  opposition 
is  never  real  confrontation  in  our  sense,  for  that 


250      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

must  be  an  arrest,  a  mutual  antagonism  of  all  im 
pulses  of  soul  and  sense.  It  must  possess  the  whole 
man.  It  needs  to  take  in  "  all  thoughts,  all  passions, 
all  delights,"  to  be  complete,  and  the  measure  of 
its  completeness  is  the  measure  of  its  esthetic 
value. 

In  the  same  way,  the  demand  for  profound  truth 
and  significance  in  the  drama  is  clearly  to  be 
reached  from  the  purely  dramatic  need.  Inner 
"possession,"  the  condition  for  our  dramatic  ten 
sion,  depends  not  alone  on  the  cumulation  of  sug 
gestions  —  suggestion  in  its,  so  to  speak,  quantita 
tive  aspect.  The  attitude  of  a  character  must  be 
necessary  in  itself:  that  is,  it  must  be  true  to  the 
great  and  general  laws  of  life.  If  it  is  funda 
mentally  false,  even  with  the  longest  and  com- 
pletest  preparation,  it  rings  hollow.  We  cannot 
completely  enter  into  it.  Thus  we  see  that  the  one 
central  requirement,  the  dramatic  germ,  leads  to 
the  most  far-reaching  demands  for  logic,  sanity, 
and  morality  in  the  ideas  of  a  play. 

This  should  not  be  interpreted  as  exhausting  the 
aesthetic  value  of  logic  and  morality  in  the  drama. 
The  drama  is  a  species  of  literature :  and  these 
qualities,  apart  from  the  fact  that  they  are  necessary 
to  the  full  dramatic  moment,  have  also  an  aesthetic 
effect  proper  to  themselves.  Thus  the  development 
has  the  beauty  which  lies  in  a  necessary  progress  ; 
but  this  beauty  is  common  to  the  epic,  the  novel, 
and  the  symphony,  while  the  unity  given  by  the 


EMOTIONS    OF  THE  DRAMA          251 

confrontation  and  tension  of  simultaneous  forces 
belongs  to  the  drama  alone.  It  is  therefore  devel 
opment  as  serving  the  dramatic  end  that  I  have 
deduced. 

Yet  we  may  well  recall  here  the  other  aspect 
of  the  experience.  Analogous  to  the  pleasure  in 
rhythm  and  in  music,  in  which  the  awaited  beat  or 
tone  slips,  as  it  were,  into  a  place  already  prepared 
for  it,  with  the  satisfaction  of  harmonious  ner 
vous  adjustment,  is  the  pleasure  in  an  inevitable  and 
irrevocable  progress.  For  it  is  not  felt  as  inevita 
ble  unless  the  whole  crystallization  of  the  situation 
makes  such,  and  only  such,  an  action  or  thought 
necessary  at  a  certain  point  in  the  structure,  makes 
it  to  a  certain  extent  anticipated,  and  so  recognized 
with  acclaim  on  its  appearance.  We  will  an  event 
in  anticipating  and  accepting  it;  and  we  realize' 
it  as  it  comes.  Nothing  more  is  to  be  found  in  the 
psychological  analysis  of  the  will  itself  —  theo 
retically,  the  two  states  are  nearly  identical.  Thus 
this  continual  anticipation  and  "  coming  true " 
takes  on  the  feeling-tone  of  all  volition ;  and  so  in 
music,  as  I  have  shown  at  length,  and  in  drama, 
and  to  a  degree  in  all  forms  of  literature,  we  have 
the  illusion  of  the  triumphant  will.  This  is  the  se 
cret  of  that  creative  joy  felt  by  the  spectator  at 
a  drama,  which  has  been  so  often  noted.  It  is  this 
illusion  of  the  triumphant  will,  too,  which  enters 
largely  into  our  acceptance  of  the  tragic  end. 
Much  has  been  said,  in  the  "  dispute  over  tragedy," 


252      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

of  the  so-called  "  Resignation  "  of  the  tragic  hero, 
and  of  the  audience  in  relation  to  his  fate.  But  I 
believe  that  these  writers  are  wrong  in  connecting 
this  resignation  primarily  with  a  moral  attitude. 
What  is  foreseen  as  perfectly  inevitable,  is  suffi 
ciently  "accepted"  in  the  psychological  sense  — 
that  is,  vividly  imagined  and  awaited,  —  to  con 
tribute  to  this  illusion  of  volition.  Hence  arise, 
for  the  catastrophe  of  drama,  that  exaltation  and 
stern  joy  which  are  indissolubly  connected  with  the 
experience  of  will  in  real  life. 


VI 

We  have  spoken  of  the  dramatic,  and  have  de 
sired  to  show  that  its  peculiar  aesthetic  experience 
arises  out  of  the  tension  or  balance  of  emotion  in 
the  confrontation  of  opposing  forces.  If  this  is  a 
fruitful  theory,  it  should  throw  light  on  the  dis 
tinction  between  the  different  forms  of  the  drama, 
and  on  the  principal  issues  of  that  "  Dispute  over 
Tragedy  "  which  is  always  with  us. 

The  possible  results  of  a  meeting  of  two  forces 
are  these.  Both  forces,  or  one  force,  may  be  de 
stroyed  ;  or,  short  of  destruction,  the  two  may  melt 
into  harmony,  or  one  may  give  way  before  the 
other.  I  think  it  may  be  said  that  these  alterna 
tives  represent  the  distinctions  of  Tragedy  and 
Comedy.  When  two  aims  are  absolutely  irrecon 
cilable,  and  when  the  forces  tending  to  them  are 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA  253 

important,  —  that  is,  powerful,  —  there  must  be 
somewhere  destruction,  and  we  have  tragedy. 
When  they  are  reconcilable,  if  they  are  important, 
we  have  serious  comedy ;  when  not  important,  or 
not  envisaged  as  important,  we  have  light  comedy. 
Thus  Tragedy  and  Comedy  are  closely  related,  — 
more  closely  than  we  are  prone  to  think.  In  the 
words  of  the  late  Professor  Everett,  in  "  Poetry, 
Comedy,  and  Duty:"  "The  tragic  is,  like  the  comic, 
simply  the  incongruous.  The  great  Tragedy  of 
Nature,  which  is  called  the  Struggle  for  Existence, 
results  simply  from  a  greater  or  less  incongruous- 
ness  between  any  form  of  life  and  its  surround 
ings.  .  .  .  The  comic  is  found  in  an  incongruous 
relation  considered  merely  as  to  its  form,  while 
the  tragic  is  found  in  an  incongruous  relation 
taken  as  to  its  reality."  For  this  word  incongruity 
I  would  substitute  collision  or  conflict.  When  there 
is  no  way  out,  we  have  Tragedy ;  when  there  is  a 
way  out,  we  have  Comedy.  And  when  things  are 
taken  superficially  enough,  there  always  is  a  way 
out,  for  we  can  at  least  always  agree  to  disagree. 
In  any  case,  the  end  of  the  conflict  is  a  period,  re 
pose,  unity.  This  seems  to  be  borne  out  by  im 
mediate  introspection.  The  feelings  with  which  we 
come  from  a  great  tragedy  or  a  great  comedy  are 
indeed  almost  identical.  The  excitement,  tension, 
sunk  into  repose,  are  common  to  both ;  the  satis 
faction  with  a  good  ending  is  strangely  paralleled 
by  our  resignation  to  a  bad  one,  —  significant  of 


254      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

our  real  indifference  to  the  fact,  so  long  as  the 
Esthetic  Unity  is  reached. 

In  George  Meredith's  wonderful  little  essay  on 
the  Comic  Spirit,  this  view  is  rather  remarkably 
confirmed.  He  has  defined  Comedy  as  the  contrast 
of  the  middle  way,  the  way  of  common  sense,  with 
our  human  vagaries,  "  Comme  un  point  fixe  fait 
remarquer  l'emportement  des  autres."  Comedy,  he 
says,  teaches  the  world  to  understand  what  ails  it. 
..."  Comedy  is  the  fountain  of  sound  sense,"  and 
again,  "  the  use  of  the  true  comedy  is  to  awaken 
thoughtful  laughter."  "  Men's  future  upon  earth 
does  not  attract  it ;  their  honesty  and  shapeliness 
in  the  present  does ;  and  whenever  they  wax  out 
of  proportion,  overblown,  affected,  pretentious, 
bombastical,  hypocritical,  pedantic,  fantastically 
delicate ;  whenever  it  sees  them  self-deceived  or 
hoodwinked,  given  to  run  riot  in  idolatries,  drifting 
into  vanities,  congregating  in  absurdities,  planning 
shortsightedly,  plotting  dementedly  ;  whenever  they 
are  at  variance  with  their  professions,  and  violate 
the  unwritten  but  perceptible  laws  binding  them 
in  consideration  one  to  another  ;  whenever  they 
offend  sound  reason,  fair  justice ;  are  false  in 
humility  or  moved  with  conceit,  individually  or  in 
the  bulk  —  the  Spirit  overhead  will  look  humorously 
malign  and  cast  an  oblique  light  on  them,  followed 
by  volleys  of  silvery  laughter.  That  is  the  Comic 
Spirit."  The  Comic  Spirit  is  the  just  common  sense, 
the  subconscious  wisdom  of  the  ages.  There  is  a 


EMOTIONS  OF  THE   DRAMA          255 

golden  mean,  the  Comic  Spirit  shows  it  to  us  in  the 
light  of  our  flashing  laughter  at  the  deviation  there 
from.  And  because  there  is,  even  the  unreconciled 
—  if  reconcilable  —  difference  or  conflict  is  not  seri 
ous.  That  is  why  true  Comedy  seems  to  find  its  best 
field  in  a  developed  social  life.  The  incongruities 
of  human  nature  hurt  if  they  are  pressed  too  deep, 
because  they  are  irreconcilable ;  they  too  quickly 
edge  the  tragic  gulf.  But  the  incongruities  of  the 
conventional  life  do  not  hurt  when  pressed.  To 
change  our  metaphor,  adjustment  to  the  middle 
way  is  here  so  easily  credible  and  possible,  that  it 
is  the  very  hunting-ground  for  the  Comic  Spirit. 

The  reputed  masterpiece  of  Moliere  shows  us 
Alceste  and  Celimene  in  the  end  still  at  odds.  But 
light-heartedness  and  sincerity  are  not  to  common 
sense  incompatible,  and  thus  we  are  rightly  led  up 
to  the  impasse  by  paths  of  laughter.  Wherever 
the  middle  way  is  divined,  there  is  the  possible 
entrance  of  the  Spirit  of  Comedy.  It  is  certainly 
a  detriment  to  the  purely  tragic  effect  of  Pinero's 
greatest  play,  that  the  middle  way,  the  possibility 
of  reconciliation,  is  shadowed  forth  in  the  last 
word,  —  the  cry  of  the  stepdaughter  of  the  Second 
Mrs.  Tanqueray,  "  If  I  had  only  been  more  merci 
ful  !  "  Dumas  fils  would  never  have  allowed  that. 
He  would  have  written  his  play  around  that 
thought,  and  made  it  indeed  a  reconciling  drama 
—  or  he  would  have  suppressed  the  cry.  The  end 
of  Romeo  and  Juliet  —  dare  I  confess  it  ?  —  has 


256      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

always  hovered  for  me  close  to  that  border  which 
is  not  sublime.  For  the  hapless  lovers  missed  all 
for  want  of  a  little  common  sense.  There  was 
naught  inevitable  in  their  plight.  I  see  the  Comic 
Spirit  leaning  across  to  stay  the  hand  of  the  im 
petuous  Komeo.  Why  not  take  a  moment's  sober 
thought  ?  she  murmurs. 

Tragedy  ensues  when  there  is  no  way  out.  It  is 
not  that  ruin  or  death  for  those  in  whom  these 
forces  are  embodied  is  of  the  essence  of  the  situa 
tion  ;  only  that  in  the  complete  destruction  of  a 
force  or  purpose  when  it  has  been  embodied  in  a 
strong  desperate  character,  the  death  of  that  charac 
ter  is  usually  involved.  There  is  no  solution  but  to 
cut  the  knot.  The  tragic  has  been  defined  as  "  that 
quality  of  experience  whereby,  in  and  through 
some  serious  collision,  followed  by  fatal  catastrophe 
or  inner  ruin,  something  valuable  in  personality  be 
comes  manifest,  either  as  sublime  or  admirable  in  the 
hero,  or  as  triumph  of  an  idea."  But  "  Lear,"  "  Mac 
beth,"  "Hamlet,"  "  CEdipus  King,"  "Othello," 
exist  to  contravene  this  view.  No,  the  tragic  (in  its 
first  sense,  in  the  sense  derived  from  the  dramatic 
form  from  which  it  is  named)  is  in  the  collision  it 
self ;  it  is  the  profound  and,  to  our  vision,  the  irre 
concilable  antagonism  of  different  elements  in  life. 
And  in  life  we  accept  it  because  we  must;  we 
transcend  it  because,  as  moral  beings,  we  may.  The 
sublime  in  actual  tragic  experience  is  the  reaction  of 
the  unconquerable  Soul.  In  tragic  literature  another 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA         257 

element  appears.  We  are  helped  in  transcending 
the  essential  contradictions  of  life  presented  to  us, 
because  the  conditions  of  literature  in  "  preparing  " 
an  event  create  for  us  the  illusion  of  volition,  the 
acceptance  of  fate.  And  in  the  tragic  drama,  to  all 
these  elements  of  the  complex  experience,  there  is 
added  the  exaltation  of  the  aesthetic  "  arrest,"  the 
tension  of  confrontations. 

The  question  of  the  "  highest "  or  "  most  tragic  " 
form  of  tragedy  seems  to  have  been  settled  by 
general  agreement.  It  has  been  held  that  the 
tragic  of  the  justified  opposing  force  is  the  more 
full  of  meaning  and  importance,  for  the  reason  that 
more  interesting  and  complex  feelings  are  called 
into  play  on  each  side  than  in  the  case  of  the  un 
justified  opposing  force.  But  the  definition  of  the 
tragic  drama  we  have  won  seems  further  to  illumi 
nate  our  undoubted  preference  for  this  type.  We 
demand  aesthetically  all  that  will  make  the  con 
frontation,  the  dramatic  tension,  more  clearly  felt ; 
and  we  cannot  realize  fully  a  side  which  should  be 
unjustified.  In  such  a  play  as  Maeterlinck's  "  Agla- 
vaine  and  Selysette  "  there  is  no  movement,  and 
even  the  conflict  is  subterranean  ;  yet,  as  all  the 
characters  are  in  their  way  noble,  and  in  their 
way  justified,  we  find  it  among  the  most  poignant 
of  his  plays.  Nay,  more,  in  any  situation  the  more 
nearly  the  conflict  is  shown  to  be  absolutely  inevi 
table,  arising  out  of  the  very  nature  of  life  as  we 
know  it,  —  completely  justified,  or  at  least  felt  as 


258      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

inevitable  .on  both  sides,  —  t he  more  are  we  shaken 
by  the  distinctive  tragic  emotion.  The  conflict  of 
duties  to  one's  self  and  to  the  world  is  the  sharp 
est  of  tragedies.  Luther,  as  Freytag  well  shows,  is 
a  really  tragic  figure  from  the  moment  when  we 
conceive  of  the  inner  connection  of  his  intolerance 
with  all  that  is  good  and  great  in  his  nature. 
As  the  expression  of  such  a  conflict  of  impulses 
good  in  themselves,  "  Magda  "  is  a  greater  tragedy 
than  the  "  Joy  of  Living ; "  "  Ghosts  "  than  "  Hedda 
Gabler ; "  the  story  of  "  Francesca  da  Rimini " 
(I  do  not  mean  D' Annunzio's  play)  than  "  La  Citta 
Morta." 

What,  then,  shall  be  said  of  the  so-called  tragic 
"  Guilt,"  in  which  the  hero  rushes  on  impiously 
to  his  doom?  It  is  clear  that  this  question  is 
closely  related  to  the  much-debated  "  Greatness  " 
of  the  tragic  hero.  If  there  is  guilt,  there  must 
be  also  greatness,  to  impress  that  side  of  the  can 
vas  on  our  vision.  It  is,  indeed,  almost  a  quantita 
tive  problem.  Strength,  energy,  depth  of  passion, 
breadth  of  vision,  power  and  place,  ravish  our  at 
tention  and  our  unconscious  imitation.  What  is 
lacking  in  extensity  of  associative  reproduction 
must  be  added  in  intensity.  And,  in  fact,  we  find 
that  it  is  the  giants  who  bear  the  tragic  "  Schuld." 
Hamlet  is  not  guilty;  rather  "  one  like  ourselves," 
in  Aristotle's  phrase,  and  therefore  he  need  not  be 
great.  I  agree  with  Volkelt's  view  that  even  the 
traditional  tremendous  will  of  the  tragic  hero  may 


EMOTIONS   OF  THE   DRAMA  259 

be  dispensed  with.  No  doubt  it  is  most  often 
strength  of  will  which  brings  out  the  original  con 
flict.  But  that  conflict  once  given,  as  it  is  given, 
for  example,  in  "  Hamlet,"  the  main  point  is  to 
increase  the  weight  of  each  side,  which  can  indeed 
be  done  by  other  elements  of  greatness.  On  the 
other  hand,  I  disagree  with  Volkelt's  reason  for 
thus  exempting  will,  which  is,  that  the  contrast 
feeling  of  "  how  great  a  fall  was  there  "  may  be 
given  by  other  qualities  in  the  hero  than  that  of 
will.  As  I  have  urged,  it  is  not  the  catastrophe 
which  is  of  the  tragic  essence,  and  therefore  not 
for  the  sake  of  the  catastrophe  that  we  should 
marshal  our  elements.  The  climax  of  tragedy  and 
of  our  feeling  is  in  the  deadlock  of  forces,  and 
whatever  is  not  absolutely  essential  thereto  may  be 
done  without. 

VII 

The  phenomenon  of  our  aesthetic  reaction  on  the 
so-called  painful  experiences  of  the  drama  has  then 
been  discussed  at  length  and  accounted  for.  There 
is  an  undoubted  emotional  experience  of  great  in 
tensity  ;  and  yet  that  emotion  turns  out  to  be  not 
the  emotion  in  the  drama,  but  rather  the  emotion 
from  the  drama,  —  a  unique  independent  emotion 
of  tension,  otherwise  a  form  of  the  characteristic 
aesthetic  emotion  with  which  we  have  been  before 
engaged.  The  playwright  who  scornfully  rejects 
the  spectator  supposed  to  be  aesthetic,  ideally  con- 


260      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

templative  and  emotionally  indifferent,  is  vindi 
cated.  There  must  be  a  vivid  emotional  effect,  but 
it  is  the  spectator's  very  own,  and  not  a  copy  of 
the  hero's  emotion,  because  it  is  the  product  of  the 
essential  form  of  the  drama  itself,  the  confrontation 
of  forces. 

Secondly,  that  confrontation  of  forces  has  re 
vealed  itself  as  indeed  essential.  This  is  not  the 
time-honored  view  of  tragedy  as  collision,  which 
has  been  arrived  at  simply  by  observing  that  great 
tragic  dramas  are  mostly  collisions,  making  the 
drama  a  picture  thereof,  but  not  explaining  why 
it  must  be  such.  I  have  tried,  on  the  contrary, 
to  show  that  confrontation  is  a  necessary  product 
of  the  bare  form  of  dramatic  representation,  —  two 
people  face  to  face.  But  if  this  bare  form  or  scheme 
of  confrontation  is  understood  and  interpreted  as 
profoundly  as  possible,  then  all  the  other  character 
istics  of  the  tragic  drama  are  seen  to  flow  from  it ; 
and  thus  for  the  first  time  to  be  really  explained  by 
being  accounted  for.  The  tragic  drama  not  only  is, 
but  must  be,  collision,  because  confrontation,  under 
stood  as  richly  as  possible,  must  be  collision.  It 
must  be  "  inevitable,"  and  it  must  have  movement, 
because  only  so  is  the  confrontation  reinforced. 

In  brief,  others  have  said  that  the  drama,  or 
tragedy,  is  conflict,  the  perfect  opposition  of  two 
forces.  We  should  rather  say  that  the  drama  is 
first  of  all  picture,  living  representation  of  colloquy ; 
as  such,  it  is  balance,  confrontation ;  and  conf routa- 


EMOTIONS   OF   THE   DRAMA  261 

tion  to  its  ideal  degree  of  intensity  is  conflict.  No 
drama  can  dispense  with  picture ;  and  so  no  drama 
is  free  from  the  obligation  to  add  unto  itself  these 
other  qualities  also.  The  acting  play  is  the  play  of 
confrontations. 


VIII 
THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS 


VIII 

THE   BEAUTY   OF   IDEAS 


THE  Idea  of  Beauty  has  been  greatly  widened 
since  the  age  of  Plato.  Then,  it  was  only  in 
order,  proportion,  unity  in  variety,  that  beauty  was 
admitted  to  consist ;  to-day  we  hold  that  the  mod 
erns  have  caught  a  profounder  beauty,  the  beauty 
of  meanings,  and  we  make  it  matter  for  rejoicing 
that  nothing  is  too  small,  too  strange,  or  too  ugly  to 
enter,  through  its  power  of  suggestion,  the  realm  of 
the  aesthetically  valuable ;  and  that  the  definition  of 
beauty  should  have  been  extended  to  include,  under 
the  name  of  Romantic,  Symbolic,  Expressive,  or 
Ideal  Beauty,  all  of  the  elements  of  aesthetic  expe 
rience,  all  that  emotionally  stirs  us  in  representa 
tion.  But  while  this  view  is  a  natural  development, 
it  is  not  of  necessity  unassailable ;  and  it  is  open 
to  question  whether  the  addition  of  an  independ 
ent  element  of  expression  to  the  older  definition  of 
beauty  can  be  justified  by  its  consequences  for  art. 
Such  an  inquiry,  however,  cannot  stop  with  the 
relation  of  the  deeper  meanings  of  modern  art  to 
the  conception  of  beauty.  It  must  go  further  and 
find  out  what  elements,  the  sensuous  form  or  the 


266      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF   BEAUTY 

ideas  that  are  bound  up  with  it,  in  a  work  of  art, 
of  the  classical  as  well  as  of  the  idealistic  type, 
really  constitute  its  aesthetic  value.  What  is  it  that 
makes  the  beauty  of  the  "  Venus  of  Milo"?  Is  it 
the  pose  and  the  modeling,  or  the  idea  of  the  eter 
nal  feminine  that  it  expresses  to  us  ?  What  is  it 
that  makes  the  beauty  of  St.  Mark's  or  of  Giotto's 
tower?  the  relation  of  the  lines  and  masses  or  the 
sacred  significance  of  the  edifice  they  go  to  form  ? 
What  is  it  that  makes  the  beauty  of  the  Ninth 
Symphony  ?  the  perfection  of  the  melodic  sequence, 
or  the  Hymn  of  Joy,  the  message  from  the  Infinite 
which  they  are  meant  to  utter  ? 

The  antithesis  between  these  two  points  of  view 
is,  of  course,  not  the  same  as  that  other  antithesis 
between  "  art  for  art's  sake  "  and  art  in  the  light 
of  its  moral  meanings  and  effects.  What  we  now 
call  romantic  or  expressive  art  can  certainly  be 
made  the  more  fruitful  in  moral  suggestions ;  but 
this  fact  bears  not  at  all  on  the  question  of  what 
belongs  fundamentally  to  the  nature  of  beauty. 
We  know,  moreover,  that  on  this  matter  the  camps 
of  the  formalists  and  the  romanticists  are  divided. 
The  Greeks,  the  lovers  of  formal  beauty,  were  so 
alive  to  the  moral  effects  of  art  that  their  theories 
were  in  danger  of  being  quite  overwhelmed  by  this 
view.  On  the  other  hand,  the  lovers  of  ideas  in  art, 
the  natural  enemies,  as  one  would  have  thought,  of 
art  for  art's  sake,  have  been  most  often  impatient 
of  any  consideration  of  its  moral  elements  or  effects. 


THE   BEAUTY  OF   IDEAS  267 

This  second  question,  then,  of  art  as  pleasure  or  as 
moral  influence  can  be  once  for  all  excluded  from 
the  discussion.  So  far  as  yet  appears,  the  issue  is 
between  form  and  expression. 

There  is,  perhaps,  some  point  of  common  agree 
ment  from  which  to  survey  and  distinguish  more  ex 
actly  these  two  diverging  tendencies.  Such  a  coign 
of  vantage  is  offered  by  the  nature  of  the  aesthetic 
attitude,  —  for  since  Kant  there  has  been  among 
aestheticians  no  essential  difference  of  opinion  on 
this  point.  The  aesthetic  attitude,  all  agree,  is  dis 
interested.  We  care  for  the  image  or  appearance 
of  the  object,  for  the  way  its  form  affects  us,  and 
not  for  the  actual  existence  of  the  object  itself.  If 
I  delight  aesthetically  in  a  cluster  of  grapes,  I  do 
not  want  to  eat  them,  but  only  to  enjoy  their  image, 
and  my  feeling  of  pleasure,  as  aesthetic,  would  not 
be  changed  if  before  me  were  only  a  mirage,  an 
hallucination,  or  a  picture.  It  is  just  the  pleasure 
in  perception  that  appeals  to  me,  —  therein  both 
schools  agree,  —  and  the  only  matter  at  issue  is  the 
question  of  what  this  disinterested  pleasure  of  per 
ception  includes.  Is  that  pleasure  bound  up  with 
the  mechanism  of  perception  itself,  or  does  it  come 
from  the  end  of  the  process  and  the  ease  with  which 
it  is  reached,  —  from  the  idea,  in  the  contemplation 
of  which  we  delight  ? 

One  school  asserts  that  the  real  pleasure  in  per 
ception  comes  only  from  form.  The  given  object 
is  beautiful,  through  its  original  qualities  of  line, 


268       THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

color,  or  sound,  which  strike  the  special  senses  in  a 
way  that  is  pleasing  to  them  ;  and  through  its  com- 
binations  of  these  qualities,  which  affect  the  whole 
human  organism  in  a  directly  pleasurable  way. 
What  is  outside  of  the  given  object  of  art  —  is 
meant,  suggested,  or  recalled  by  it  —  belongs,  it  is 
said,  to  absolutely  un aesthetic  processes,  as  is  shown 
by  the  fact  that  many  things,  which  we  are  the 
first  to  acknowledge  as  ugly,  are  the  exciting  cause 
of  great  thoughts  and  delightful  associations.  The 
opposed  school  maintains  that  the  meanings  of 
a  work  of  art  are  all  that  it  exists  for.  The  pre 
sentation  of  an  idea,  by  whatever  sensuous  means, 
so  only  that  they  be  transparent,  and  the  joy  of  the 
soul  in  contemplating  this  idea,  must  be  the  object 
and  the  end  of  art.  The  later  idealists  admit  value 
to  the  form  only  in  so  far  as  it  may  express,  con 
vey,  symbolize,  or  suggest  the  content,  whether  as 
pure  idea,  or  as  a  shadowing  forth  of  the  Divine 
World-Meaning. 

These  theories  are  certainly  intelligible ;  but  the 
results  of  applying  them  with  logical  consistency 
are  rather  terrifying.  Andrew  Lang  says  some 
where  that  the  logical  consequence  of  the  formal 
theory  of  art  in  all  its  nakedness  would  make 
Tennyson  the  youth,  Swinburne,  and  Edgar  Poe 
the  greatest  poets  of  the  world,  and  those  delicious 
effusions  of  Edward  Lear,  "  The  Jumblies  "  and 
"  On  the  Coast  of  Coromandel,"  masterpieces.  Yet 
if  we  allow  the  idealists  to  pass  sentence,  what 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  269 

shall  become  of  our  treasures  in  "  Kubla  Khan," 
or  "  Ueber  alien  Gipfeln,"  or  "  La  Nuit  de  De- 
cembre"?  The  results  of  such  a  judgment  day 
would  be  even  more  appalling  to  the  true  lover  of 
poetry.  Moreover,  if  the  idea,  the  end  of  art,  need 
not  reside  in  the  object  itself,  but  may  arise  there 
from  by  subtle  suggestion,  the  complications  of 
poetry  or  painting  are  unnecessary.  A  geometric 
figure  may  remind  us  of  the  constitution  of  the 
world  of  space,  a  sundial,  of  the  transitoriness  of 
human  existence,  and  with  a  "  chorus-ending  from 
Euripides,"  the  whole  sweep  of  the  cosmic  meanings 
is  upon  us.  In  the  words  of  Fra  Lippo  Lippi :  — 

"Why,  for  this, 

What  need  of  art  at  all  ?    A  skull  and  bones, 
Two  bits  of  stick  nailed  crosswise,  or  what 's  best, 
A  bell  to  chime  the  hours  with,  does  as  well." 


n 

In  spite  of  this,  however,  a  place  for  ideas  must 
clearly  be  found  in  our  definition  of  beauty ;  and 
yet  it  must  be  so  limited  and  bound  to  the  beautiful 
form  that  corollaries  such  as  we  have  just  drawn 
will  be  impossible.  An  interesting  attempt  to  re 
concile  these  two  points  of  view  —  to  establish  an 
organic  relation  between  form  and  idea  —  is  found 
in  "  The  Sense  of  Beauty "  by  Professor  George 
Santayana.  The  central  point  of  this  writer's  theory 
is  his  definition  of  beauty  as  the  objectification  of 


270      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

pleasure.  ^Esthetic  experience,  lie  says,  is  based 
partly  on  form,  partly  on  expression,  but  the  plea 
sure  felt  is  always  projected  into  the  object,  and  is 
felt  as  a  quality  of  it.  All  kinds  of  external  asso 
ciations  may  connect  themselves  with  the  work  of 
art,  but  so  long  as  they  remain  external,  and  keep, 
so  to  speak,  their  values  for  themselves,  they  can 
not  be  said  to  add  beauty  to  the  object.  But  when 
they  are  present  only  in  their  effect,  —  a  diffused 
feeling  of  pleasure,  —  that  diffused  feeling  is  at 
tributed  directly  to  the  object,  is  felt  as  if  it  inheres 
therein,  and  so  the  object  becomes  more  beautiful, 
for  beauty  is  objectified  pleasure.  Professor  San- 
tayana  designates  form  as  beauty  in  the  first  term, 
and  expression  as  beauty  in  the  second  term. 
Beauty  in  the  first  term  can  exist  alone, —  not  so 
beauty  in  the  second  term.  It  must  have  a  little 
beauty  of  the  first  term  to  graft  itself  upon.  "  A 
map,  for  instance,  is  not  usually  thought  of  as  an 
aesthetic  object,  and  yet,  let  the  tints  of  it  be  a 
little  subtle,  let  the  lines  be  a  little  delicate,  and 
the  masses  of  land  and  sea  somewhat  balanced,  and 
we  really  have  a  beautiful  thing,  the  charm  of 
which  consists  almost  entirely  in  its  meaning." 

Now  here,  it  seems  to  me,  is  a  weak  point  in 
Professor  Santayana's  armor.  If  such  wonderful 
elements  of  beauty  can  be  projected  into  a  fairly 
colorless  object  by  virtue  of  its  fringe  of  suggestive- 
ness,  why  should  not  beauty  of  the  second  term  be 
felt  in  objects  without  that  little  bit  of  intrinsic 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  271 

worth  of  form?  Is  not  such  indeed  the  fact?  What 
else  is  the  meaning  of  the  story  of  "  Beauty  and 
the  Beast"?  The  squat  and  hideous  Indian  idol,  the 
scarabaeus,  the  bit  of  Aztec  pottery,  become  attrac 
tive  and  desired  for  themselves  by  virtue  of  their 
halo  of  pleasure  from  dim  associations.  And  all 
these  values  are  felt  as  completely  objectified,  and 
so  fulfill  the  requirements  for  "  beauty  in  the  second 
term."  That  small  amount  of  intrinsic  beauty  on 
which  to  graft  the  beauty  of  the  second  term  is, 
therefore,  not  a  necessary  condition,  so  that  we  are 
left,  on  Professor  Santayana's  theory,  with  the 
strange  paradox  of  so-called  beautiful  objects  which 
are,  nevertheless,  confessedly  ugly. 

What,  then,  is  the  flaw  in  this  definition  ?  While 
we  concede  the  objectification  of  pleasure  in  all  these 
cases,  we  cannot,  it  would  seem,  admit  a  correspond 
ing  change  from  non-aesthetic  to  aesthetic  feelings. 
The  personal  attitude  towards  an  object,  based  on 
the  sentiments  objectified  in  it,  and  the  aesthetic 
attitude  are  two  different  things.  The  truth  is,  that 
all  this  objectified  tone-feeling  is  directly  dependent 
on  the  original  real  existence  of  the  object  that  calls 
it  up,  and  on  our  practical  personal  relation  to  it, 
and  is  thus,  by  universal  agreement,  definitely  non- 
aesthetic.  I  enjoy  the  cast  of  the  great  Venus  very 
nearly  as  much  as  the  original,  —  but  who  cares  for 
casts  of  the  Aztec  gods,  or  of  the  prehistoric  carv 
ings  of  the  reindeer  period?  Who  wants  an  imita 
tion  scarabaeus  ?  To  have  the  real  thing,  to  see  it, 


272      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

to  touch  it,  to  know  that  it  has  had  real  experiences 
that  would  fill  me  with  wonder  and  with  awe,  "  to 
love  it  for  the  dangers  it  has  passed,"  —  to  feel  that 
I  myself  am  through  it  actually  linked  with  its 
mysterious  history, — that  is  the  value  it  has  for 
me  ;  not  a  pleasure  of  perception  at  all,  but  a  very 
definite,  practical  interest  in  my  own  personality. 
If  the  pleasure  lay  only  in  disinterested  perception, 
any  representation  of  the  object  ought  to  have  the 
same  value. 

What,  then,  the  author  of  "  The  Sense  of  Beauty" 
calls  "  the  beauty  of  the  second  term,"  — the  power 
to  suggest  feeling  through  the  medium  of  associ 
ated  ideas,  —  we  may  deny  to  impart  any  aesthetic 
character  whatever.  Professor  Santayana  has,  in 
deed,  mediated  between  the  formalists  and  the  ideal 
ists  ;  but  his  theory  would  lead  us  to  attributions 
of  beauty  from  which  common  sense  revolts ;  and 
we  have  seen  the  secret  of  its  deficiency  to  lie  in 
the  confusion  of  the  personal  with  the  aesthetic  at 
titude.  If  now  we  amend  his  definition,  "  Beauty 
is  objectified  pleasure,"  to  "  Beauty  is  objectified 
aesthetic  pleasure,"  we  are  advanced  no  further. 


Ill 

The  problem  stands,  then :  how  to  provide  for 
the  presence  of  ideas  in  the  work  of  art,  and  the 
definite  emotions  aroused  by  it,  either  by  bringing 
ihem  somehow  into  the  definition  of  beauty  in  itself, 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  273 

or  by  showing  how  their  presence  is  related  to  the 
full  aesthetic  experience.  But,  first  of  all,  we  have 
to  ask  how  the  aesthetic  pleasure  even  in  formal 
beauty  is  constituted,  and  to  what  extent  expression 
belongs  to  the  beauty  of  pure  form.  Form  is  im 
pressive,  or  directly  beautiful,  through  its  harmony 
V?ith  the  conditions  offered  by  our  senses,  primarily 
of  sight  and  hearing,  and  through  the  harmony  of 
its  combinations  of  suggestions  and  impulses  with 
the  entire  organism.  I  enjoy  a  well-composed  pic 
ture  like  Titian's  "  Sacred  and  Profane  Love," 
because  the  good  composition  means  such  a  balanced 
relation  of  impulses  of  attention,  of  incipient  move 
ments,  as  harmonizes  with  such  an  organism  as  mine, 
tending  to  move  toward  both  sides,  and  yet  unified 
and  stable ;  and  because  the  combination  of  colors 
is  at  once  stimulating  and  soothing  to  my  eyes.  So 
much  for  impression,  beauty  of  the  first  term.  But 
it  is  not  only  that  harmonious  state  of  my  visual 
and  motor  functions  that  I  get  out  of  the  form  of  a 
picture.  No,  I  have,  besides  all  this  pleasure,  a  real 
exhilaration  or  emotion,  a  definite  mood  of  repose 
or  gayety  or  triumph,  without  any  fringe  of  asso 
ciation,  which  yet  certainly  contributes  to  my  feel 
ing  of  the  beauty  of  the  experience,  and  so  of  the 
work  of  art.  How  did  it  come  out  of  the  form? 

Well,  this  very  harmonious  excitation  of  the 
organism  has  brought  with  it  just  such  an  organic 
reverberation  as,  the  current  theory  of  emotion 
asserts,  must  be  at  the  bottom  of  all  our  emotional 


274       THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

states.  A  certain  sequence  of  nervous  shocks  and 
of  vasomotor  changes,  certain  stimulations  and 
relations  and  contractions  of  the  internal  organs 
have  been  set  up  as  the  "  diffusive  wave  "  from 
the  sense-stimulations,  and  a  particular  emotional 
tinge  is  the  result.  That  is  a  direct  impression,  but 
an  expression  too.  Take  the  same  case  on  a  much 
lower  level.  A  glass  of  wine  makes  me  cheerful, 
not  because  it  arouses  cheerful  ideas  directly,  but 
because  the  organic  changes  it  sets  up  are  such  as 
belong  to  the  motived  expression  of  joy,  and  have 
the  same  effect.  A  deep,  slow  movement  played  by 
an  orchestra  can  affect  me  in  two  ways.  It  may  be 
that  I  have  usually  connected  that  sort  of  music 
with  religious  experiences,  and  all  the  profound 
and  inspiring  feelings  belonging  thereto ;  and  so  I 
transfer  those  feelings  to  the  music  and  give  it 
those  adjectives.  Or  the  slowness  of  the  rhythmic 
pulse  that  is  set  up  in  me,  the  largeness,  the  volume, 
the  depth  of  sound,  all  bring  about  in  me  the  kind 
of  nervous  state  that  belongs  to  a  reposeful  and 
yet  deeply  moved  feeling.  The  second  experience 
is  expression  through  impression,  through  the  in 
ward  changes  that  the  form  itself  sets  up.  The  first 
is  expression  through  the  medium  of  something  ex 
ternal,  —  an  idea  which  brings  with  it  a  feeling,  — 
something  that  does  not  belong  to  the  music  itself, 
but  to  my  own  individual  experiences. 

This  distinction  between  internal  and  external 
expressiveness  is  perfectly  clear  for  music,  and  also 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  275 

for  architecture.  In  painting,  too,  it  can  easily  be 
traced.  We  know  the  effect  that  is  produced  by 
broken  lines,  by  upward  moving  ones,  —  like  the 
"  always  aspiring "  of  the  Gothic  cathedral.  The 
low-lying,  wide  expanses  of  some  of  the  old  Dutch 
landscapists  give  us  repose,  not  because  they  remind 
us  of  the  peaceful  happiness  of  the  land,  but  because 
we  cannot  melt  ourselves  into  all  those  horizontal 
lines  without  that  restful  feeling  which  accompanies 
such  relaxation ;  and  our  emotion  is  read  into  the 
picture  as  aesthetic  pleasure,  because  it  came  out  of 
the  abstract  forms,  —  the  painting  in  the  picture. 
The  beauty  of  form  is  thus  seen  to  be  inseparably 
allied  with  a  certain  degree  of  emotional  expressive 
ness  in  a  way  that  does  not  distract,  like  the  asso 
ciation  of  ideas,  from  the  pure  esthetic  experience. 
This  quality  of  expressiveness  should  not,  however, 
become  a  part  of  the  definition  of  beauty,  so  that 
it  should  be  said  that  the  greater  the  emotional 
expressiveness,  the  more  beautiful  the  object.  For 
if  that  were  true,  such  music,  for  instance,  as  all 
acknowledge  quite  mediocre,  would  be  felt  as  most 
beautiful  by  those  who  find  in  it  a  strong  and  defi 
nite  emotion  ;  and  a  Strauss  waltz,  which  makes  us 
more  merry  than  one  by  Mendelssohn,  should  be  in 
so  far  more  beautiful.  This,  of  course,  we  are  not 
ready  to  concede  ;  and  it  seems,  therefore,  most 
logical  to  regard  the  special  emotional  effects  of 
formal  beauty  rather  as  a  corollary  to,  than  as  a  part 
of,  the  essential  aesthetic  mood.  But  if  we  give  the 


276      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

name  emotion  to  that  perfectly  vague  but  unmistak 
able  excitement  with  which  we  respond  to  purely 
formal  beauty,  —  that  indescribable  exaltation  with 
which  we  listen  to  "  absolute  "  music,  —  then  wf 
must  say  that  that  emotion  is  but  another  name  for 
aesthetic  pleasure.  Objectively,  we  have  formal 
beauty ;  subjectively,  on  the  physiological  side,  a 
harmonious  action  of  the  organism,  and  on  the  men 
tal  side  the  undefined  exaltation  which  is  known  as 
sesthetic  pleasure. 

rv* 

Up  to  this  point,  however,  we  have  considered 
only  the  relation  between  purely  formal  beauty 
and  the  various  shades  of  emotional  response  to  it ; 
now  we  may  turn  to  the  original  question  which  we 
set  ourselves,  how  to  provide,  in  our  definition  of 
beauty,  for  the  presence  of  ideas  in  the  work  of  art. 
No  one  will  deny  that  the  full  aesthetic  experience 
cannot  be  dismissed  with  the  treatment  of  formal 
beauty;  and,  although  Professor  Santayana's 
"  beauty  in  the  second  term  "  may  be  rejected  as  a 
purely  individual,  arbitrary,  interested,  and  hence 
unaesthetic  element,  the  explicit  content  of  a  work  of 
art  cannot  be  ignored.  The  suggested  ideas  aroused 
by  an  old  rose  garden  may  be  no  addition  to  its 
beauty,  but  the  same  cannot  be  said  of  the  great 
ideas  contained  directly  in  Shakespeare's  poetry. 
Yet  great  ideas  alone  do  not  make  great  art,  else  we 
must  count  Aristotle  and  Spinoza  and  Kant  great 


THE   BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  277 

poets  too.  Must  we  then  be  satisfied  to  rest  in  the 
dualism  of  those  who  maintain  that  great  creations 
of  art  are  the  expression  of  great  truths  under  the 
laws  of  poetic  form?  Is  the  esthetic  expression 
indeed  the  recognition  of  truth  plus  the  feeling  of 
beauty  of  form,  or  is  it  a  fusion  of  these  into  a 
third  undivided  pulse  of  esthetic  emotion  ?  Is  there 
no  way  of  overcoming,  for  those  arts  which  do  ex 
press  ideas,  this  dualism  of  form  and  content  in 
our  theory  of  the  beautiful  ? 

Let  us  analyze  a  little  more  closely  this  notion 
of  the  content.  Music  and  architecture  cannot 
properly  be  said  to  have  any  content,  although 
they  have  a  meaning  according  to  their  uses,  like 
a  funeral  dirge  and  a  hymn  of  joy,  a  prison  and  a 
temple.  But  this  meaning  is  extraneous.  It  is 
given  by  the  work  itself  only  in  so  far  as  the  form 
induces  the  emotion  which  belongs  to  the  idea,  —  as 
the  dirge,  sadness  ;  the  temple,  awe.  The  idea  of 
burial  or  of  worship  is  nowhere  to  be  found  in  the 
work  of  art.  In  the  hierarchy  of  arts,  painting  and 
sculpture  show  the  first  trace  of  a  content.  This 
content,  however,  is  at  once  seen  to  be  susceptible 
of  farther  analysis.  The  "  Sistine  Madonna  "  pic 
tures  a  mother  and  child  worshiped,  which  may  be 
called  the  subject,  —  but  this  does  not  exhaust  the 
content.  The  real  meaning  of  the  picture,  to  which 
may  be  given  the  name  of  theme,  is  the  divine  ele 
ment  in  maternal  love.  The  subjects  of  Dona- 
tello's  "  John  the  Baptist "  and  ««  Saint  George,"  of 


278      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

Michael  Angelo's  "  David  "  and  "  Moses,"  can  be 
described  only  as  men  of  different  types  in  differ 
ent  attitudes  ;  their  themes,  however,  are  moral 
ideas,  expressing  the  moral  significance  of  each  per 
sonality.  The  subject  of  "  The  Angelus  "  is  given 
in  its  name  ;  its  theme  is  humble  piety.  From  the 
infinite  number  of  possible  examples  one  more 
will  suffice,  —  the  well-known  "  War  "  by  Franz 
Stuck,  in  the  Neue  Pinacothek,  —  the  subject 
a  youth,  under  a  lurid  sky,  trampling  under  his 
horse's  feet  the  bodies  of  the  slain.  The  theme  is 
again  a  moral  idea,  —  the  horrors  of  war. 

If  we  now  ask  whether  we  can  attribute  beauty 
to  the  ideas  of  painting  and  sculpture,  a  negative 
answer  is  at  once  suggested.  It  is  manifestly  im 
possible  to  establish  an  order  of  aesthetic  excel 
lence  between  these  subjects.  The  idea  of  peasants 
telling  their  beads  is  more  beautiful  than  the  idea 
of  a  ruthless  destroyer  only  in  so  far  as  it  is 
morally  higher;  and  this  distinction,  therefore, 
has  reference  to  the  theme  and  not  to  the  subject. 
How  far,  however,  moral  and  aesthetic  excellence 
are  coincident  is  a  question  for  which  we  are  not 
yet  ready.  At  this  point  we  care  only  to  point  out 
that  the  mere  idea  of  a  picture  is  neither  aesthetic 
nor  the  reverse. 

But,  it  may  be  objected,  is  not  our  first  thought 
in  stopping  before  a  picture  like  the  "  War," 
"  What  a  wonderful  idea  "  ?  It  is  the  idea  and  not 
the  form  which  strikes  us,  it  may  be  said,  even 


THE  BEAUTY  OF   IDEAS  279 

though  we  may  be  quite  unimpressed  by  the  value 
of  its  moral  significance.  Nevertheless,  this  view 
of  our  own  mental  processes  may  be  held  to  be 
illusory.  What  really  strikes  us  is  the  unity  of 
the  conception.  The  lurid  sky,  the  dark,  livid  faces 
of  the  dead  —  the  whole  color  scheme,  in  short,  is 
so  contrived  as  to  impress  directly,  as  previously 
explained,  without  the  medium  of  an  idea,  with 
that  particular  tinge  of  emotional  tone  which  ought 
to  be  also  the  accompaniment  of  the  idea  of  the 
horrors  of  war.  The  emotion  is  thus  the  envelop 
ing  unity  which  binds  the  subject  and  theme  and 
the  pictorial  form  together.  In  this  sense,  when 
we  say,  "  What  a  wonderful  idea ! "  we  really 
mean,  what  a  wonderful  fitness  of  form  to  idea,  — 
which  is  the  same  as  saying,  what  a  wonderful 
form,  or  more  technically,  what  a  wonderful  unity. 
That  part  of  the  effect  of  beauty  in  a  picture 
which  is  due  to  the  idea  is  thus  the  fundamental 
but  merely  abstract  element  of  unity,  contributing 
to  the  complex  aesthetic  state  only  the  simplest 
condition. 

The  case  of  literature  presents  an  entirely  new 
problem,  for  the  material  of  literature  is  itself, first 
of  all,  idea.  Literature  deals  with  words,  and  words 
exist  only  by  virtue  of  their  meanings.  Even  the 
sound  of  words  is  of  importance  primarily  for  the 
additional  meanings  which  it  suggests,  as  the  word 
liquid  first  means  a  fluid  substance,  and  then  by 
its  sound  suggests  ease  and  smoothness,  and  only 


280       THE   PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

last  of  all  is  noted  as  melodious.  Thus  since  mean 
ings,  ideas,  are  the  material  of  literature,  we  can 
speak  of  the  beauty  of  ideas  in  literature  only  by 
an  artificial  sundering  of  elements  that  are  properly 
in  fusion.  Yet  as  we  may  speak  of  a  motive  or 
musical  idea  and  its  working  out,  although  strictly 
the  idea  involves  its  own  working  out,  so  we  may 
conceive  of  the  central  thought  of  a  literary  work, 
and  of  its  development.  But  the  relation  here  is 
not  of  content  and  form,  like  the  content  and  form 
of  a  picture ;  rather  that  of  concentrated  and  di 
luted  form.  So,  too,  as  in  music,  we  may  distinguish 
form  and  structure.  Structure  is  offered  to  the 
intellect  —  it  clears  and  vivifies  understanding ;  it 
is  not  felt,  it  is  perceived.  Anything  which  is  made 
up  of  parts  —  beginning,  middle,  and  end,  climax 
and  resolution  —  possesses  structure.  But  form  in 
the  intimate  sense  is  the  intrinsic,  inevitable  rela 
tion  of  cause  and  effect ;  in  this  sense,  it  is  seen  to 
be  truly  content  also.  In  literature,  as  to  structure, 
it  is  the  relation  of  parts :  as  to  form,  it  is  the 
succession  of  events,  the  movement,  combination 
and  resolution  of  separate  ideas  and  emotions, 
which  give  us  aesthetic  pleasure  or  the  reverse.  As 
action  must  follow  excitement,  or  despair  satiety, 
so  the  relation  of  parts,  the  order  of  presentation, 
must  be  adapted  to  mutual  reinforcement.  Thus 
the  porter's  scene  in  "  Macbeth  "  is  related  to  the 
neighboring  scenes,  as  De  Quincey  has  shown  in 
his  famous  essay.  And  just  as  in  music  the  feeling 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  281 

of  "  Tightness  "  ensues  when  the  awaited  note  slips 
into  place,  so  the  feeling  of  Brightness"  comes  when 
the  inevitable  consequences  follow  the  premises  of 
a  plot. 

The  particular  separate  ideas  of  such  a  develop 
ment  partake  of  beauty,  then,  in  so  far  as  they 
minister  to  the  movement  of  the  whole,  just  as  the 
separate  lines  in  a  swaying,  swirling  robe  of  one 
of  Botticelli's  women  minister  to  the  whole  con 
ception.  The  catastrophe,  in  other  words,  must  be 
as  inevitably  related  to  the  sequence  of  ideas  as 
the  final  chords  of  a  symphony  to  the  sequence  of 
notes.  The  attitude  of  mind  with  which  we  wel 
come  it  is  the  same,  whether  on  the  plane  of  the 
responses  of  the  psychophysical  organism  or  of  the 
ideal  understanding. 


But  before  finally  relegating  the  idea  to  its  place 
in  the  aesthetic  scheme,  we  must  ask  whether  the 
specific  emotional  content  can  claim  independent 
a3sthetic  value  ;  for  we  can  scarcely  ignore  the  fact 
that  almost  all  naive  response  to  literature,  and  in 
deed  to  all  forms  of  art,  is,  or  is  believed  to  be, 
specifically  emotional.  Maupassant,  in  his  intro 
duction  to  "  Pierre  et  Jean,"  distinguishes  thus 
between  the  demand  of  the  critic  —  "  Make  me 
something  fine  according  to  your  temperament  "  — 
and  the  cry  of  the  public  — "  Move  me,  terrify 
me,  make  me  weep  !  "  And  yet  to  the  assertion  of 


282      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

common  sense  that  the  desire  of  the  naive  enjoyer 
of  art  is  definite  emotional  excitement,  we  may 
venture  to  oppose  a  negative.  The  average  person 
who  weeps  at  the  theatre,  or  over  a  novel,  would 
no  doubt  repudiate  the  suggestion  that  it  is  not 
primarily  the  emotion  of  terror,  or  pity,  that  he 
feels.  But  a  closer  interpretation  shows  that  it 
is  almost  impossible  to  disengage,  in  such  an  ex 
perience,  the  particular  emotions.  What  is  felt 
is  rather  pleasurable  excitement,  pleasure  raised 
to  the  pitch  of  exaltation,  with  a  fringe  of  emo 
tional  association.  The  notion  of  specific  emotions 
is  illusory  in  the  same  sense  that  our  notion  of 
pleasure  from  specific  emotions  in  listening  to  music 
is  illusory.  The  ordinary  descriptions  of  music 
are  all  couched  in  emotional  or  even  ideational 
terms,  —  from  the  musical  adventures  of  "  Charles 
Auchester  "  down,  —  and  yet  we  know,  as  Gurney 
says,  that  when,  in  listening  to  music,  we  think 
we  are  yearning  after  the  unutterable,  we  are 
really  yearning  after  the  next  note ;  and  when 
we  think  it  is  the  yearning  that  gives  us  plea 
sure,  it  is  really  the  triumphant  acceptance  of  the 
melodic  Tightness  of  that  next  note.  So  the  much- 
discussed  Katharsis,  or  emotion  of  Tragedy,  is  not 
the  experience  of  emotions  and  pleasure  in  that 
experience,  but  rather  pleasure  in  the  experience 
of  ideas,  tinged  with  emotion,  which  belong  to 
each  other  with  precisely  that  musical  Tightness. 
Katharsis  is  indeed  not  the  mark  of  Tragedy  alone, 


THE   BEAUTY  OF   IDEAS  283 

although  in  Tragedy  it  has  a  very  great  relative 
intensity ;  it  is  ultimately  only  a  designation  for 
the  specific  aesthetic  pleasure,  to  which  I  can  give 
no  better  name  than  the  oft-repeated  one  of  trium 
phant  acquiescence  in  the  Tightness  of  relations. 
We  think  we  feel  a  situation  directly,  but  what  we 
really  feel  is  pleasure  in  the  Tightness  of  the  man 
ner  of  the  event,  and  in  the  moment  of  perfect 
experience  it  gives  us.  Such  specific  emotion  as 
may  be  detected  in  any  aesthetic  experience  is, 
then,  covered  by  the  definition  of  beauty  only  in 
so  far  as  it  has  become  form  rather  than  content, 

—  is  valuable  only  in  its  relations  rather  than  in 
itself.    The  experience  of  pity  or  fear,  even  though 
generalized,    unselfish,    etc.,  —  after   the    various 
formulas  of  the  expounders  of  dramatic  emotion, 

—  does  not  impart  aesthetic  character  of  itself ;  it 
becomes  aesthetic  only  if  it  appears  at  such  a  point 
in  the  tragedy,  linked  in  such  a  way  to  the  de 
veloping  plot,  that  it  belongs  to  the  unified  and 
reciprocally  harmonious  circle  of  experiences. 


VI 

But  we  have  up  to  this  time  consistently  neglected 
the  central  idea  of  the  work  of  art,  and  its  claim 
to  be  included  in  the  aesthetic  formula.  We  have 
defined  beauty  as  that  which  brings  about  a  state 
of  harmonious  completeness,  of  repose  in  activity, 
in  the  psychophysical  and  psychological  realms. 


284      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

This  harmonious  repose  can  exist  only  with  a  dis 
interested  attitude  toward  the  objects  which  have 
brought  this  state  about.  Whether  the  Melian 
Venus  or  "  Hamlet "  or  "  Lohengrin  "  live,  we 
care  not ;  only  that  if  they  live,  it  shall  be  so.  In 
this  sense,  our  attitude  is  interested,  our  will  is 
active,  but  only  toward  the  existence  of  the  form. 
But  with  the  introduction  of  the  central  theme,  we 
cease  to  be  disinterested,  —  our  hypothetical  is 
changed  to  an  affirmative.  The  moral  idea  we  must 
accept  or  reject,  for  it  bears  a  direct  relation  to 
our  personality.  We  will,  or  do  not  will,  that,  in 
the  real  world  in  which  we  ourselves  have  to  live 
and  struggle,  certain  forces  shall  be  operative,  — 
that  there  shall  be  the  beauty  of  health,  as  in  the 
"  Discobolus ;  "  maternal  love  which  is  divine,  as 
in  the  "  Sistine  Madonna  ;  "  that  war  shall  be  hor 
rible  ;  that  sloth  un  striven  against  shall  triumph 
over  love,  as  in  "  The  Statue  and  the  Bust ;  "  that 
defiance  of  the  social  organism  shall  involve  self- 
destruction,  as  in  "  Anna  Karenina."  The  person 
or  the  combination  of  events  expressing  this  idea 
we  do  not  seek  in  our  personal  experience,  but  we 
do  demand  for  our  own  a  world  in  which  this  idea 
rules.  Thus  it  must  be  admitted  that  there  is, 
strictly  speaking,  at  the  core  of  every  aesthetic 
response  to  a  work  of  art  containing  an  idea,  a 
non-sesthetic  element,  an  element  of  personal  and 
interested  judgment. 

On  the  other  hand,  this  affirmation  or  acceptance 


THE  BEAUTY  OF  IDEAS  285 

of  a  moral  idea  implies  the  quietude  of  the  will ; 
just  that  state  of  harmony,  of  repose,  which  we 
have  found  to  be  the  mark  of  the  aesthetic  on  the 
lower  planes  of  being.  In  so  far,  then,  as  we  accept 
the  moral  idea  which  a  work  of  art  presents,  in  so 
far  that  idea  has  the  power  of  bringing  us  to  the  state 
of  harmony,  and  in  so  far  it  is  beautiful.  And  vice 
versa,  works  of  art  which  leave  us  in  a  state  of 
moral  rebellion  are  unbeautiful,  not  because  they 
are  immoral,  but  because  they  are  disturbing  to  the 
moral  sense.  Literature  which  ignores  the  funda 
mental  moral  principle  of  the  freedom  of  the  will, 
like  the  works  of  Flaubert,  Maupassant,  much  of 
Zola,  Loti,  and  Thomas  Hardy,  fails  of  beauty,  in 
asmuch  as  it  fails  of  the  perfect  reposeful  harmony 
of  human  nature  in  its  entirety. 

Thus  a  thoroughgoing  analysis  of  the  nature  of 
the  aesthetic  experience  in  its  simplest  and  most 
sensuous  form  has  given  us  a  principle,  —  the 
principle  of  unity  in  harmonious  functioning,  — 
which  has  enabled  us  to  follow  the  track  of  beauty 
into  the  more  complex  realms  of  ideas  and  of  moral 
attitudes,  and  to  discover  that  there  also  the  law 
of  internal  relation  and  of  fitness  for  imitative  re 
sponse  holds  for  all  embodiments  of  beauty.  That 
harmonious,  imitative  response,  the  psychophysical 
state  known  on  its  feeling  side  as  aBsthetic  pleasure, 
we  have  seen  to  be,  first,  a  kind  of  physiological 
equilibrium,  a  "  coexistence  of  opposing  impulses 
which  heightens  the  sense  of  being  while  it  prevents 


286      THE  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  BEAUTY 

action,"  like  the  impulses  to  movement  correspond 
ing  to  geometrical  symmetry  ;  secondly,  a  psycho 
logical  equilibrium,  in  which  the  flow  of  ideas  and 
impulses  is  a  circle  rounding  upon  itself,  all  asso 
ciations,  emotions,  expectations  indissolubly  linked 
with  the  central  thought  and  leading  back  only  to 
it,  and  proceeding  in  an  irrevocable  order,  which  is 
yet  adapted  to  the  possibilities  of  human  experi 
ence  ;  and  thirdly,  a  quietude  of  the  will,  in  the 
acceptance  of  the  given  moral  attitude  for  the 
whole  scheme  of  life.  Thus  is  given,  in  the  fusion 
of  these  three  orders  of  mental  life,  the  perfect 
moment  of  unity  and  self-completeness. 


Date  Due 


ocrea 


Jw: 

7<*/ 
jfte  psychology  of        Ac 


*-    -^ 


DATE 


ISSUED  TO